Contact Information

Contact information
Contact information:
PONSSE PLC
Ponssentie 22
74200 Vieremä
FINLAND
Tel. +358 20 768 800
Contact details of subsidiaries, service centres, retailers and

contractual service partners are available at:
www.ponsse.com
1
Forewords
Forewords
Dear Customer
We thank you for the trust shown towards Ponsse by selecting

a Ponsse product.
The solutions used in Ponsse products have been tested in

practice and therefore we believe that the forest machine is well
worth your trust. Because the forest machine will be operated in
very difficult conditions, it is of utmost importance that it will be
used and serviced in the correct way.
This manual will guide you in the use of the forest machine and
it will explain the service actions needed and how to carry them
out. By following the service instructions and by using the forest
machine in a sensible way, reliability, efficiency and value of the
forest machine can be enhanced. Service should always be
considered as an important part of profitable forest machine
operations.
The actual repair actions are not included in this manual.

PONSSE OYJ would, however, be pleased to provide information
on service and to send a trained technician for your assistance.
You will find our contact details on the last page of this manual.
Due to the continuous development work, Ponsse Oyj will retain

rights to make changes to the operating and service manuals
without any prior notification.
Familiarize yourself carefully with the forest machine construction

and its operating and service procedures before starting any
operations with the machine.
We wish you best of success!
Ponsse Oyj
Key Flag
All products of Ponsse Oyj have been granted the right to

use the Key flag, the symbol for Finnish work. The Key flag
is a registered, surveyed and supervised symbol for origin,
and it is granted by the Association for Finnish Work. The
right to use the Key flag can be granted to a company, the
products of which have been proven to maintain high degree
of Finnish origin to an origin committee comprised of external
experts. For more information, see www.avainlippu.fi.
Forwarder
These operating and service instructions apply to the following

PONSSE forwarder models:
PONSSE Gazelle
This forwarder is designed to be used only in connection with a

loader manufactured by Ponsse Plc.
PONSSE forwarders are designed for the transportation of wood

to a road to await for further transportation. The purpose of the
grapple, which is located on the loader, is to collect the logs cut
by the harvester and lift them to the load space. Then, the logs
will be transported to the roadside where they will be unloaded
from the load space and put into storage piles using the grapple.
Note! If the forwarder is equipped with a loader model by any

other manufacturer, the use of such a device must be approved
by Ponsse Plc.
Copyright © Ponsse Plc
All rights reserved. Reproduction, transfer, distribution or storage of part or all of the contents in
this document in any form without the prior written permission of Ponsse Plc is strictly prohibited.
PONSSE is a registered trademark of Ponsse Plc and other product names may be trademarks
or trade names of Ponsse Plc.
Ponsse Group and its affiliated companies do not guarantee that the content of the documentation
is flawless or up to date. Information may be corrected, edited, updated or removed without
advance notification. For further information, please contact the appropriate company of Ponsse
Group.
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
APPENDICES
Contact information
1 Safety instructions
1.1 General ........................................................................ 15
1.2 General warning symbol ................................................ 15
1.3 Signal terms ................................................................. 16
1.4 Electronic equipment .................................................... 17
1.5 Purpose of use of the machine ...................................... 18
1.6 Terminology .................................................................. 21
1.7 Safety features ............................................................. 22
1.8 Noise and vibration level ............................................... 24
1.8.1 Machine noise level ........................................ 24
1.8.2 Machine vibration ........................................... 24
1.9 General safety instructions ............................................ 25
1.9.1 Preventing a fire ............................................. 26
1.9.2 Driving on a highway ....................................... 27
1.9.3 Transporting a machine ................................... 27
1.9.4 Driving on ice ................................................. 28
1.9.5 Checking the machine ..................................... 28
1.10 Safety at work .............................................................. 28
1.10.1 Working on slopes .......................................... 29
1.10.1.1 Before starting to work on a slope .................... 30
1.10.1.2 Working on slopes .......................................... 31
1.10.2 Safety at work, forwarders ............................... 32
1.10.3 Safety when working near power lines ............. 33
1.11 Safety in service and repair jobs .................................... 34
1.11.1 General .......................................................... 34
1.11.2 Actions before service ..................................... 34
1.11.3 Hydraulic system ............................................ 35
1.11.4 Cranes ........................................................... 36
1.11.5 Tyres ............................................................. 36
1.12 Note when lifting a machine ........................................... 37
1.13 Emergency exits ........................................................... 38
1.13.1 Opening the side window from inside the
cabin .............................................................. 38
1.13.2 Opening the side window from outside the
cabin .............................................................. 38
1.14 Cabin ........................................................................... 39
1.15 Welding the machine .................................................... 40
1.15.1 Preparations ................................................... 40
1.15.2 Welding the machine ...................................... 40
1.15.3 Actions after welding ....................................... 41
1.16 Starting batteries .......................................................... 42
1.16.1 Battery maintenance and checkups ................. 43
1.17 Hydraulic steps ............................................................. 45
Table of Contents
1.18 Plates .......................................................................... 47

1.18.1 Model plate and CE plate ................................ 47
1.18.1.1 Cabin model plate ........................................... 47
1.18.1.2 CE plate ......................................................... 48
1.19 Forwarder instructions and warning stickers ................... 50
1.19.1 Frame stickers ................................................ 50
1.20 Cabin stickers ............................................................... 55
1.20.1 Stickers located in the cabin ............................ 55
2 Technical specifications
2.1 Locations of plates and the Product Identification
Number ........................................................................ 61
2.2 Technical specifications ................................................. 62
2.3 Main components ......................................................... 65
3 Controls
3.1 General ........................................................................ 69
3.2 Side panel .................................................................... 70
3.3 Opti 4G control panel .................................................... 73
3.4 Alarm lights in cabin ceiling ........................................... 73
3.5 Air conditioner and heater controllers ............................. 74
3.6 Pedals ......................................................................... 74
3.7 Control handles and arm rest switches ........................... 75
3.7.1 Mini handles, forwarder ................................... 75
3.7.2 Clam bunk (optional equipment) ...................... 80
3.7.3 Winch (optional equipment) ............................. 81
3.8 Alarms ......................................................................... 82
3.8.1 Warning and alert lights for diesel
engines .......................................................... 82
3.8.2 Alarm light and strong buzzer sound ................ 82
3.8.3 Low buzzer sound .......................................... 84
3.9 Machine operator's seat ................................................ 86
3.9.1 Operating instructions for BE-GE 9000
series ............................................................. 86
3.10 Fire extinguisher system ............................................... 88
3.10.1 Portable fire extinguishers ............................... 88
3.10.2 Semiautomatic extinguishing system (optional
equipment) ..................................................... 88
3.10.3 Actions in case of a fire ................................... 90
4 Driving instructions
4.1 Machine introduction ..................................................... 93
4.2 Before starting the engine ............................................. 94
4.3 Starting the engine ........................................................ 96
4.4 Driving the machine ...................................................... 97
4.5 Driving on a public road ................................................ 99
4.6 Driving and loading with constant speed ....................... 101
4.7 Automatic parking brake .............................................. 103
4.8 Loader control ............................................................ 104
Table of Contents
4.9 Stopping the engine .................................................... 105

4.9.1 Normal engine stop ....................................... 105
4.9.2 Emergency stop ............................................ 106
4.10 Auxiliary starting current .............................................. 107
4.10.1 Note during auxiliary starting and char-
ging ............................................................. 107
4.10.2 Auxiliary charging with a separate power
source .......................................................... 107
4.10.3 Auxiliary charging with another machine ......... 107
4.10.4 Auxiliary starting with another machine ........... 108
4.11 Towing ....................................................................... 109
4.12 Getting stuck and driving into water .............................. 109
4.13 Machine falling over .................................................... 109
4.14 Moving the machine by driving, lifting and fastening for
transportation ............................................................. 110
4.14.1 Moving the machine by driving ....................... 110
4.14.2 Lifting the machine (picture on previous
page) ........................................................... 111
4.14.3 Fastening the machine for transportation
(picture on previous page) ............................. 111
5 Operating and service instructions

5.1 Read before service or repair work ............................... 117
5.2 Eco-friendly use and service of the forest machine ........ 118
5.3 Tilting the cabin for service and repairs ......................... 119
5.3.1 Read before starting the job ........................... 119
5.3.2 Releasing the cabin's lock ............................. 120
5.3.3 Tilting the cabin ............................................ 120
5.3.4 Lowering the cabin to a lower position ............ 121
5.3.5 Locking the cabin in a lower position .............. 121
5.4 Electrical tilting of the cabin (optional equipment) .......... 122
5.4.1 Tilting the cabin ............................................ 122
5.4.2 Lowering the cabin to a lower position ............ 122
5.5 Adjustments to middle pivot and frame oscillation lock
(Wisent, Gazelle) ........................................................ 123
5.5.1 Tightening of middle pivot horizontal
bearing ......................................................... 123
5.5.2 Frame oscillation lock adjustment .................. 124
5.6 Oil change .................................................................. 125
5.6.1 Clean oil to be recovered ............................... 125
5.6.2 Bogie casings and planetary gears,
Gazelle ........................................................ 126
5.6.3 Planetary gears, front and rear bogie ............. 127
5.6.4 Bogie housings, front and rear bogie .............. 128
5.6.5 Differential gear, front bogie ........................... 129
5.6.6 Differential gear, rear bogie ........................... 130
5.6.7 Differential gear, front axle (6w) ..................... 131
5.6.8 Planetary gears, front axle (6w) ..................... 132
Table of Contents
5.6.9 Lubricating the bogie pivot ............................. 133

5.6.10 Transfer box ................................................. 134
5.6.11 Changing the engine oil and filter ................... 135
5.6.12 Changing the air filter .................................... 136
5.7 Fuel system ................................................................ 136
5.7.1 Fuel and hydraulic oil refilling ......................... 136
5.7.1.1 Refilling without the refuelling/refilling
pump ........................................................... 136
5.7.1.2 Refilling using the refuelling/refilling
pump ........................................................... 137
5.7.2 Fuel refuelling pump (optional equip-
ment) ........................................................... 138
5.7.3 Changing the fuel filters ................................. 139
5.7.3.1 Fuel pre-filter ................................................ 139
5.7.3.2 Fuel filter ...................................................... 139
5.7.3.3 Water separator filter ..................................... 140
5.7.4 Bleeding the fuel system ............................... 141
5.8 Engine control unit (ECU) ............................................ 142
5.9 Poly V-ribbed belt ....................................................... 143
5.10 Bleeding the hydraulic tank's filter casing ...................... 144
5.11 Fine filter system (optional equipment) ......................... 145
5.11.1 Bleed-off filter ............................................... 145
5.11.2 Dehumidifying air filter ................................... 145
5.12 Oil sampling in the hydraulic system ............................. 146
5.13 Differential gear lock in bogie axle ................................ 146
5.14 Differential gear lock in front axle ................................. 147
5.15 Brake system ............................................................. 147
5.15.1 Operating brake ............................................ 147
5.15.2 Parking brake ............................................... 147
5.15.3 Working brake .............................................. 148
5.15.4 Releasing the parking brakes manually .......... 149
5.15.5 Setting the parking brakes to be in a driving
condition ...................................................... 150
5.16 Bleeding the brakes .................................................... 151
5.16.1 Bleeding the working/operating brake (marked
in blue) ......................................................... 152
5.16.2 Bleeding the parking brake (marked in
red) .............................................................. 152
5.16.3 Bleeding the brake pedal ............................... 153
5.17 Washing the machine .................................................. 153
5.18 Tracks ........................................................................ 154
5.18.1 Snow compaction in tracks ............................ 154
5.18.2 Track tension ................................................ 155
Table of Contents
5.19 Heating and air conditioning equipment ........................ 155

5.19.1 Functioning of air conditioner ......................... 155
5.19.2 Operation of air conditioner ........................... 155
5.19.3 Adjustment ................................................... 156
5.19.4 Service and checking of air conditioner .......... 157
5.19.5 Cleaning the cooler cell every 50 hrs .............. 158
5.19.6 Fresh air/recirculation filter change every 300
hrs ............................................................... 158
5.19.7 Scheduled maintenance of the conditioner
every two years ............................................ 159
5.20 Cabin windows ........................................................... 159
5.20.1 Window fastening ......................................... 159
5.20.2 Window cleaning .......................................... 160
5.20.2.1 Washing windows ......................................... 160
5.20.2.2 Stain removal ............................................... 161
5.21 PONSSE Opti6 computer ............................................ 162
5.21.1 Computer start/shutdown .............................. 162
5.21.2 Adjusting the display backlight brightness ....... 163
5.21.3 LED functions ............................................... 163
5.21.3.1 Functioning of Opti6 in low temperatures ........ 164
5.21.3.2 Functioning of Opti6 in high temperat-
ures ............................................................. 164
5.21.3.3 Opti6 operating voltage ................................. 164
5.21.4 Setting the Opti6 computer ready for
welding ........................................................ 164
5.21.5 Opti6 computer's auxiliary equipment ............. 165
5.21.6 Opti6 computer's ports .................................. 165
5.22 Log gate move ............................................................ 166
5.22.1 Log gate forward/backward ........................... 166
5.22.2 Log gate up/down (optional) .......................... 166
5.23 Bulldozer blade functions (optional equipment) ............. 167
5.24 Variable load space VLA (optional Buffalo, Elk and
Elephant) ................................................................... 168
5.24.1 Hydraulic load space widening ....................... 168
5.24.2 Mechanical load space widening .................... 169
6 Scheduled maintenance
6.1 Normal scheduled maintenance ................................... 173
6.2 Warranty services ....................................................... 176
6.3 Tightening torques for common steel screws ................ 180
6.4 Greasing points .......................................................... 182
6.5 Greasing points, clam bunk (optional) .......................... 183
6.6 Filters ......................................................................... 184
Table of Contents
7 Oils and liquids

7.1 Service and cleanness of hydraulics is the provision for
reliability ..................................................................... 187
7.2 Viscosity of hydraulic oil .............................................. 189
7.3 Hydraulic oil ............................................................... 190
7.3.1 First tank of hydraulic oil ................................ 190
7.3.2 Oil change instructions when utilising the
flushing method ............................................ 190
7.3.3 Pre-heating hydraulic oils in cold weather ....... 191
7.4 Engine oil requirements ............................................... 192
7.5 Liquid and oil features, quantities and quality
grades ....................................................................... 193
7.6 Examples of recommendations by different oil
companies .................................................................. 194
7.7 Quality conditions for lubricant greases ........................ 196
7.7.1 Viscosity requirement .................................... 196
7.7.2 Manual greasing ........................................... 196
7.7.3 Central lubrication system ............................. 196
7.7.3.1 NLGI grades of greases used in central lubric-
ation systems ............................................... 197
8 Adjustment instructions
8.1 Read before starting the job ......................................... 201
8.2 Loader pump Rexroth A11VO145 ................................ 201
8.2.1 Checking the stand by pressure ..................... 201
8.2.2 Adjustment of stand by pressure .................... 202
8.2.3 Adjustment of the maximum pressure ............ 202
8.2.4 Stand by and maximum pressure values ........ 203
8.3 K170 valve ................................................................. 203
8.3.2 Pressure adjustment of a valve ...................... 204
8.3.3 MR adjustment value table ............................ 205
8.4 Blocks ........................................................................ 206
8.4.2 Blocks, measuring points and adjustment
screws ......................................................... 206
8.4.3 Brake circuit pressure adjustment .................. 207
8.4.4 Frame lock pressure adjustment .................... 207
8.4.5 Differential lock pressure adjustment .............. 208
8.4.6 Working brake pressure adjustment ............... 208
8.5 Drive transmission ...................................................... 209
8.5.2 Measuring points .......................................... 209
8.5.3 Drive transmission feed pressure measure-
ment ............................................................ 209
8.6 Adjustment values ...................................................... 210
8.7 Tyre pressures ............................................................ 211
8.7.1 Impact of temperature on tyre pressure .......... 211
Table of Contents
9 Electrical system
9.1 General ...................................................................... 215
9.2 Cabin electrical centre ................................................. 216
9.2.1 Electrical centre location and compon-
ents ............................................................. 216
9.2.2 Electrical centre fuses ................................... 218
9.2.3 Relay functions ............................................. 220
9.3 Seat relay and fuses ................................................... 221
9.4 Electrical centre on frame ............................................ 222
9.4.1 Relay and fuse functions ............................... 222
9.5 Main current switch ..................................................... 223
9.6 Batteries .................................................................... 224
9.6.1 Starting batteries .......................................... 224
9.6.2 Cabin battery 12 V ........................................ 225
9.7 Grounding the electrical system ................................... 226
9.8 Sensors ..................................................................... 227
9.8.1 Engine sensors ............................................. 227
9.8.2 Other sensors in the machine ........................ 228
Warranty conditions
Warranty conditions .............................................................. 231
APPENDICES
Electric diagrams - optional equipment
Electric diagram - base machine
Hydraulic diagram
Hydraulic diagrams - Optional equipment
Tyre pressure
Webasto Thermo 90 S
2012 Ponsse Control II
Brigade BE-870 rear view system
Brigade BE-970 reversing camera system
Sit Right 2005 - Seat leveller for tilt compensation
forward/backward
Sit Right 2005 - automatic sideways leveling
Be-Ge 3000
Airvent 9000
10w additional axle (optional equipment, Buffalo and Elk)
10w additional axle (optional equipment, Wisent)
Clam bunk and winch control - Optional equipment
Lifting the front bogie
Defa DVS90 - Optional equipment
1
Safety instructions
Table of Contents Part 1

1.1 General .............................................................................. 15
1.2 General warning symbol ...................................................... 15
1.3 Signal terms ....................................................................... 16
1.4 Electronic equipment .......................................................... 17
1.5 Purpose of use of the machine ............................................ 18
1.6 Terminology ........................................................................ 21
1.7 Safety features ................................................................... 22
1.8 Noise and vibration level ..................................................... 24
1.8.1 Machine noise level .............................................. 24
1.8.2 Machine vibration ................................................. 24
1.9 General safety instructions .................................................. 25
1.9.1 Preventing a fire ................................................... 26
1.9.2 Driving on a highway ............................................. 27
1.9.3 Transporting a machine ......................................... 27
1.9.4 Driving on ice ....................................................... 28
1.9.5 Checking the machine ........................................... 28
1.10 Safety at work .................................................................... 28
1.10.1 Working on slopes ................................................ 29
1.10.1.1 Before starting to work on a slope .......................... 30
1.10.1.2 Working on slopes ................................................ 31
1.10.2 Safety at work, forwarders ..................................... 32
1.10.3 Safety when working near power lines ................... 33
1.11 Safety in service and repair jobs .......................................... 34
1.11.1 General ................................................................ 34
1.11.2 Actions before service ........................................... 34
1.11.3 Hydraulic system .................................................. 35
1.11.4 Cranes ................................................................. 36
1.11.5 Tyres ................................................................... 36
1.12 Note when lifting a machine ................................................. 37
1.13 Emergency exits ................................................................. 38
1.13.1 Opening the side window from inside the
cabin .................................................................... 38
1.13.2 Opening the side window from outside the
cabin .................................................................... 38
1.14 Cabin ................................................................................. 39
1.15 Welding the machine .......................................................... 40

1.15.1 Preparations ......................................................... 40
1.15.2 Welding the machine ............................................ 40
1.15.3 Actions after welding ............................................. 41
1.16 Starting batteries ................................................................ 42
1.16.1 Battery maintenance and checkups ....................... 43
1.17 Hydraulic steps ................................................................... 45
1.18 Plates ................................................................................ 47
1.18.1 Model plate and CE plate ...................................... 47
1.18.1.1 Cabin model plate ................................................. 47
1.18.1.2 CE plate ............................................................... 48
1.19 Forwarder instructions and warning stickers ......................... 50
1.19.1 Frame stickers ...................................................... 50
1.20 Cabin stickers ..................................................................... 55
1.20.1 Stickers located in the cabin .................................. 55
1.1 General
Ponsse Plc designs and manufactures forest machines. The
focus when designing and manufacturing the machines is
on providing the best possible safety and reliability. Using
machines with high power transmissions always involves an
element of danger.
In order to minimise the dangers, read and ensure that you

understand these general safety instructions.
These general safety instructions do not cover all situations

occurring in forest machine operation, but they can help the
operator avoid dangerous situations and potential accidents.
In addition to these instructions, always follow any statutory

regulations, health and safety instructions and labour protec-
tion regulations in force at your place of work.
If any of the information in this manual conflicts with the

operating country's laws and decrees, make sure you follow
the local laws and decrees.
This Owner's Manual is part of the machine; ensure that it is

always available to the operator. If the manual is damaged
or misplaced, immediately get a new one.
1.2 General warning symbol

This general warning symbol is used in this manual to draw
! your attention to aspects where negligence or a fault under
certain conditions may lead to a potentially lethal injury and/or
to a more serious fault or malfunctioning of the machine.
15
1.3 Signal terms

DANGER expresses an imminent and serious dangerous
situation, which will lead to death or a serious personal injury.
WARNING expresses a potentially imminent dangerous

situation, which may lead to a serious injury or death.
ATTENTION indicates a potentially dangerous situation,

which can lead to a less serious or reasonable injury or
damage.
ATTENTION can also be used to draw your attention to

dangerous situations or procedures which can lead to a less
serious or reasonable injury.
This symbol is used to draw your attention to situations or

procedures which can lead to material damage or malfunc-
tioning of the product.
16
1.4 Electronic equipment

Never use hands-free equipment in a thunderstorm.
The use of all radio transmitters with an antenna inside the

cabin (mobile phone, shortwave radio, etc.) is FORBIDDEN.
The aforementioned equipment must be appropriately
installed. The antenna has to be installed to a suitable
grounding surface outside the cabin.
However, note any hazards caused by antennas installed

outside the cabin. Ensure that the antenna cannot come into
contact with, for example, power lines at any time!
The use of all electronics products not tested and type-

approved in accordance with the EMC standard is forbidden
in the immediate vicinity of the machine cabin.
The manufacturer assumes no responsibility for any changes

made to the original electrical system of the machine. These
may put the operation of the machine’s safety systems at
risk.
17
1.5 Purpose of use of the machine

The following machines or machine components may be
used for the purposes listed below only; they have not been
designed or approved for any other use. Please see the figure
below to more easily understand the explanations.
1 Harvester
2 Crane
3 Harvester head
4 Forwarder
5 Loader
6 Grapple
1. Harvester – a forest machine that fells, delimbs, cuts

and measures trees.
The harvester may not be used for any other purpose than
those mentioned above.
2. Crane – a harvester crane used to control the harvester

head and guide the harvester head to a standing tree.
The crane may not be used for any other purpose than those
mentioned above. Especially, it may not be used for lifting
or moving people or goods.
3. Harvester head – a forest machine component that cuts

fells, delimbs and measures trees. It consists of, for
example, feed rollers, delimbing knives, measuring
sensors, a chain saw and a so-called tilt, which allows
the harvester head to operate both in horizontal and
18
vertical positions. The harvester head is attached to the

crane using a rotating joint, which allows the harvester
head to rotate around its vertical axis.
The harvester head may not be used for any other purpose
than those mentioned above. Especially, it may not be used
for lifting or moving people or goods.
4. Forwarder – is a forest machine designed for the

transportation of wood to a road to await for further
transportation. The purpose of the grapple, which is
located in the crane, is to collect the logs cut by the
harvester and lift them to the cargo space. Then, the
logs will be transported to the roadside where the logs
will be unloaded from the cargo space and put into
storage piles using the grapple.
The forwarder may not be used for any other purpose than
5. Loader – a forwarder loading device used to lift trees

to and from the load space.
The loader may not be used for any other purpose than
those mentioned above. Especially, it may not be used for
lifting or moving people or goods.
6. Grapple – a forwarder component used to grab trees.

The grapple is used to collect logs cut by the harvester
and place them in the forwarder's cargo space.
The grapple may not be used for any other purpose than
those mentioned above. Especially, it may not be used for
lifting or moving people or goods.
7. Dual machine – a forest machine that is a combination

of a forwarder and a harvester. When the dual machine
is used as a harvester, it can be used to fell, delimb, cut
and measure trees. If necessary, a dual machine can
be changed into a forwarder, in which case it will be used
to transport logs from the woods to the roadside by pla-
cing them into the cargo space with the grapple and the
crane.
The dual machine may not be used for any other purpose
than those mentioned above.
19
8. Skidder – is a forest machine designed for the transport-

ation of wood to a road to await for further transportation.
The purpose of the grapple, which is located in the crane,
is to collect the logs cut by the harvester and lift them to
the clam bunk. Then, the logs will be transported to the
roadside where they will be unloaded from the clam bunk
using the grapple.
The skidder may not be used for any other purpose than
9. Clam bunk – an additional device located in the cargo

space of a skidder. The clams of the clam bunk are used
to hydraulically lock logs into the skidder's cargo space
so that they will not move when being transported to the
roadside.
The clam bunk may not be used for any other purpose than
20
1.6 Terminology
Explanations for terms used in this safety guide:
● Opti4G – the control system used in a Ponsse harvester

or dual machine.
● OptiControl – a forest machine control system that
integrates all aspects of the machine’s operation – con-
trol of the loader/crane, controls, transmission and diesel
engine – into a single easily managed whole.
● Control system – a system which comprises data col-
lection and transfer equipment and software, and utilises
information technology to make the use of harvesters
and forwarders easier and more efficient.
● Working brake – a brake engaged by the control sys-
tem that affects all the wheels of the machine. The
working brake uses the hydraulic pressure of the brake
system. Pressing the drive pedal releases the brake,
while releasing the accelerator switches the brake on.
● Operating brake – a brake controlled by a pedal on the
cabin floor; affects all the wheels of the machine.
● Parking brake – a brake engaged by the control
system or by the operator that affects all the wheels of
the machine.
● Frame oscillation lock – the front and rear frame of a
forest machine are pivot mounted together so that they
can rotate around the machine's vertical axle. The frame
oscillation lock locks the front and rear frame and
combines them into a single and immobile unit when the
machine is standing still for operational purposes.
21
1.7 Safety features
5
2 7
3
4
6 8
1
1. Steps, slip-resistant objects and handles

Use the steps, slip-resistant objects and handles when
climbing to the cabin.
2. Emergency exit
The side window serves as the emergency exit, see
section 1.13 Emergency exits.
3. EMERGENCY STOP switch
Pressing the EMERGENCY STOP switch stops the
engine and all machine operations, and engages the
parking brake.
4. Warning signals
These warn and inform about safety-related issues.
5. Safety cabin
The cabin is a safety cabin tested in accordance with
global standards (ROPS, FOPS and OPS), in which a
steel frame with polycarbonate windows glued onto it
form a construction protecting the operator.
6. Portable fire extinguishers and extinguishing system
(optional equipment). The portable fire extinguisher is
located on the cabin door.
7. Warning light and buzzer
A malfunction in the machine triggers the alarm.
8. Operator identification. Activates in 10 seconds after
the operator gets off the seat. Disables drive transmis-
sion functions but not when the machine is in operation.
The crane and grapple functions will be disabled. The
disabled functions can be activated by sitting on the
bench and pressing the Driver confirmation button
onscreen.
9. Seat direction switch
22
Activates when the seat is turned sideways when com-

pared to the crane direction.
● Deactivates the crane, rotator and grapple functions
(except for the grapple closed function).
● When the seat is turned away from the crane
towards the engine, the driving direction will auto-
matically change without the need to use the drive
direction switch.
10. Seatbelt
Always wear the seatbelt when operating the machine.
Note exceptional situations, such as driving on ice. The
operator's safety in any dangerous situations cannot be
guaranteed if the seatbelt is not in use.
23
1.8 Noise and vibration level
1.8.1 Machine noise level

Emission sound pressure level with its measuring uncertain-
ties (± 2 dB(A)) inside the machine cabin, measured at the
operator's seat, will not exceed 70 dB(A).
The measurements have been taken in compliance with the

ISO 6394: 2008 standard, with the machine stationary in a
level, open field, the cabin windows and doors shut, the
engine at the maximum rpm and the cabin heater fan at its
average rpm.
1.8.2 Machine vibration

The driving speed, the terrain and the operator's working
methods, in particular, have a major impact on the level of
vibration to which the operator is subjected.
The vibration level measurements have been taken in com-

pliance with ISO 2631-1: 1997, under normal forest machine
operating conditions.
The maximum weighted root mean square value (RMS value)

to which the operator's body is subjected is 0.65 m/s² when
the machine is moving with the measuring uncertainty at ±
0.3 m/s² and 0.37 m/s² when the machine is used in place
with the measuring uncertainty at ± 0.15 m/s².
Total vibration level to which the operator's hands and arms

are subjected with its measuring uncertainty of ± 0.5 m/s²
does not exceed 2.5 m/s².
The operator can influence the vibration level by reducing

the driving speed and adapting the driving method to the
terrain.
24
1.9 General safety instructions

Read and make sure that you understand the manual, and
follow the instructions and warnings before operating the
machine, because they help to prevent dangerous situations
and increase working safety.
Make sure that you follow the regulations of occupational

safety laws in your work.
The forest machine crane must not be used for lifting or

moving people or goods.
As a forest machine operator, you are primarily responsible

for the safety of harvesting and loading, and ensuring that
the machine does not endanger the safety of others.
The forest machine may only be operated by a thoroughly

trained person. Do not allow any untrained person to use the
machine.
A forest machine operator must be in adequate health to

cope with his job. The forest machine must not be used under
the influence of alcohol or drugs. Avoid operating the machine
when tired or ill.
Adjust the driving speed to the prevailing terrain conditions

in order to avoid any strain on your back caused by the
machine vibration or swinging.
Always lower the crane to the resting position, apply the

parking brake, switch off the engine and switch off the main
current when you leave the machine, even temporarily. This
procedure must be followed regardless of the reason for
leaving the cabin.
The machine cabin is intended only for the operator.

Carrying passengers when operating the machine is forbid-
den. If a driver training situation requires the instructor to ride
in the cabin, the machine must be handled with extreme
caution, and all persons must be aware of the fact that the
passenger's safety cannot be guaranteed in case of a dan-
gerous situation.
Removing any protective or safety equipment from the

machine is absolutely forbidden. Do not move close to any
25
moving parts. Always stop and switch off the machine during
servicing and check-ups.
Keep the safety stickers in good condition and replace them

when damaged.
Only use original Ponsse parts when servicing and repairing

the machine to ensure proper operation. Do not change the
machine structure without contacting the manufacturer or
retailer. Changes made in the machine may influence its
reliability, the safety of the operator or other people, the sta-
bility of the machine or the electronic control systems, for
example.
The machine's control systems and their use are described

in the owner's manuals and the markings in the cabin. The
descriptions comply with the arrangement when the machine
was manufactured. However, some control devices may be
changed to particularly suit a specific purpose by program-
ming buttons for new functions, for example. Before starting
work, always ensure that you are familiar with each control
device and how it influences the machine.
1.9.1 Preventing a fire

● Wash the machine regularly.
● Use only incombustible washing solutions.
● Do not use any substances that damage the machine
surfaces while washing it.
● Regularly remove any combustible materials that have
accumulated on the machine, such as sawdust, tree
branches, bark and needles.
● Clean oil leaks and excessive grease from the machine
immediately.
● Keep the oil and air conditioning cooler honeycombs
and guards clean.
● Check the electrical connections and wires (chafing).
Immediately repair any faults that you notice. Do not
replace fuses with ones larger than the originals.
● Keep the fuel equipment in order.
● Have the portable fire extinguishers checked and ser-
viced regularly at a repair shop.
● Do not store flammable goods in the machine.
● Keep the surroundings of the pause heater exhaust pipe
clean of combustible materials.
26
If in spite of all precautions a fire breaks out, proceed as fol-

lows:
● shut down the engine
● activate the extinguishing system with the trigger button,
if the machine is equipped with one (optional equipment)
● exit the cabin
● switch off the main current from the main current switch
● take out the portable fire extinguishers and begin fire
fighting
● prevent the fire from spreading
● call for help if required
Remember the importance of staying calm in emergencies.

Think first, and only act after that.
1.9.2 Driving on a highway

Make sure that the condition of the machine meets the
national road traffic regulations before driving on public roads.
Install the front and rear lights and make sure that they
function.
Tracks or chains cannot be used on public roads. Follow the

traffic laws of the country where the machine is used.
1.9.3 Transporting a machine

When transporting the machine from one work site to another
on a truck platform, check the allowed total height, width,
length and weight of the cargo in advance. Ensure that the
transport vehicle, platform or trailer is sufficient to carry the
machine. Take into account the special requirements of the
route, such as low bridges and other obstacles. Follow the
local statutory regulations.
Fasten the machine tightly onto the platform before transport-

ation. Place blocks in front of and behind the wheels. Use a
strap to fasten the hydraulic steps to the handle located next
to the door.
Set the crane and harvester head into the transportation

position, and ensure that the booms or harvester head cannot
move during transportation.
27
See the base machine's Owner's Manual, section 4,

Fastening the machine during transport.
1.9.4 Driving on ice

Take note of the following before driving on ice:
● Ensure that the load carrying capacity of the ice is suffi-

cient.
● Unfasten the seat belt.
● Open the side window.
● Be prepared to exit the cabin quickly.
● Take into account the legislation in the country where
the machine is being operated and any conditions posed
by your insurance company.
1.9.5 Checking the machine

The driver is responsible for notifying about any damage,
faults, malfunctions and wear and tear that might affect work
safety.
Test all functions of the machine immediately at the start of

your shift. If a buzzer or a warning light gives an alarm, stop
the machine immediately. Discover and fix the cause of the
alarm.
See the base machine's Owner's Manual, section 3.
Ensure that there is an adequate first aid kit and fire extin-
guishing equipment in the machine, and that they are easily
accessible. Familiarise yourself with the contents of the first
aid kit and keep it stocked as required. The operator must
have sufficient first aid skills.
Keep walkways, floors and steps free of oil, ice, dirt and loose
objects.
1.10 Safety at work

When entering the cabin, use the handles and steps on the
machine.
28
Before starting work, close the door and window, and check
the windows/structures protecting the operator.
Always keep the doors shut when operating the machine.

Always wear the seatbelt.
Ensure that there are no persons within the working area.

Do not work if there are people within the safety area.
● Forwarder 20 m (82 ft)
Ensure free visibility within the working area.
If the engine of the machine stalls during operation, the

operating and working brake function until the pressure
accumulators run empty and there is no brake pressure. If
this happens, the parking brake is the only functional brake
in the machine. When working on a steep slope, the machine
can be stopped by pressing the EMERGENCY STOP switch,
which activates the parking brake.
When working on a steep slope, the machine can be stopped

by using the parking and operating brake, or by pressing the
EMERGENCY STOP switch, which activates the parking
brake.
Never walk or stand under a suspended load.
1.10.1 Working on slopes

Always plan the safe execution of each felling site in advance,
taking into account the local legislation and safety regu-
lations.
When working on slopes, there is always the danger of the

machine sliding or falling down. Observe special caution
when working on slopes.
Understand that this machine is not suitable for the steepest

slopes or the most demanding conditions.
The instructions given must be followed in order to avoid any

hazards.
29
The front and rear differential locks must be activated when

working on slopes. This ensures that tractive force is distrib-
uted evenly between all wheels.
Only trained persons who understand the hazards involved

and have sufficient experience in working with forest
machines can work on steep slopes.
Always wear chains or tracks when working on slopes.
Use chains/tracks in front and in the rear when working on

steep slopes.
However, remember that, in demanding and steep slopes,

chains and tracks do not guarantee that the machine stops.
The following features are recommended when working

on slopes:
● Automatic steep slope brake (optional equipment)

● Four-point seatbelt (optional equipment)
● Winch, PONSSE Synchrowinch (optional equipment)
● Tracks designed for working on slopes (optional equip-
ment)
1.10.1.1 Before starting to work on a slope
● Evaluate all hazards (e.g. slope inclination, terrain type,

etc.) associated with the slope.
Examine the site in advance using a map. Then, walk
around the site. This helps to identify any hazards.
● Pay attention to extreme conditions (e.g. thunder-
storms, wind, snow, frost and heat).
● Plan the driving routes beforehand, especially in the
wintertime, when the visibility is poor or under adverse
terrain conditions.
● Practise using the machine / take a feel of the machine
balance in level/easy conditions.
● Make sure that:
- The machine has been maintained in accordance with
the maintenance programme. In particular, make sure
that the machine’s brakes and transmission are in
good working condition.
- The machine’s motor oil and hydraulic oil levels are
correct (also when work is carried out).
30
● Remember that the frame oscillation lock is released

when the machine is driven (unless the machine is
equipped with an active frame stabilisation system
and the system is switched on). Note! This applies
only to the Scorpion model.
1.10.1.2 Working on slopes
● The recommended working method on inclined slopes

is to always drive the machine as straight up and down
the slope as possible. By following the instructions given,
it is possible to minimise the risk of machine sliding or
falling.
Never drive sideways on a steep slope!
● When felling trees from the side of the machine, pay
attention to sudden changes in machine balance.
● Note, however, that the inclination may change quickly
due to a rock, stump or other obstacle.
● Avoid moving the machine when the loader / crane is
loaded or when the boom has been turned to the
machine side.
● When working on slopes, always try to keep the har-
vester head / load as close to the ground as possible.
In this way, the machine cannot tip over quickly.
● Always ensure free visibility towards the driving direction.
● Drive carefully over obstacles. In difficult terrain, try to
balance the machine, for example, by moving the boom
towards the upper slope. Pay attention to the impact of
the boom on the machine's centre of gravity.
● Always apply the slow speed range and avoid
reversing the machine when working on slopes.
● Never change the speed of the machine when it is
on a steep slope or in an otherwise unfavourable
position because this may cause the mechanical
transmission to switch to neutral and cause the machine
to uncontrollably slide down the slope and/or hit an
obstacle and tip over.
● Avoid working on slopes with a maximum load. Pay
attention to the impact of the load's centre of gravity on
working and machine stability.
31
1.10.2 Safety at work, forwarders

Do not load over the log gate. Do not exceed other dimen-
sioning values of the machine either, as overloading
increases the risk of accidents and shortens the service life
of the machine.
Take into account the total height of the crane before driving
in places with a limited underpass height.
Ensure the static stability of the machine.
Lift the load straight up, without any turning movement.
If the machine includes a variable load space, take special

caution when modifying the load space. Never modify the
load space when there are people or obstacles within the
machine danger zone, or when there are logs inside the
load space. Always ensure that there is enough room to
increase/decrease the load space size. Never use the vari-
able load space to straighten up or arrange logs.
If the forwarder is equipped with mechanically or hydraulically

moving log gates/bunks, make sure that they cannot move
while driving. Tie the log gates/bunks firmly using slings
before moving the machine.
If you see lighting or otherwise observe thunder approach-

ing, stop working and move machine booms to their lower
position. Try to move the machine aside away from high
ground – but not to higher ground in the open.
Follow the lifting limit values given on the loading plate and
do not overload the loader.
Never drive the hydraulic cylinders of the loader to their limits

at too high speeds.
Activate the frame oscillation lock of the machine before using

the loader.
Do not use the loader for towing or lifting persons or to make

any installations.
If the optional equipment of the forwarder includes a loader

tilt, note the following:
32
If the loader boom faces the cabin as can be seen in Picture

1, do not tilt the loader pillar against the log gate because it
can damage the hoses.
1.10.3 Safety when working near power lines
Picture 1
Take particular care in the vicinity of power lines, as high

voltages can – under certain circumstances – travel several
feet through the air.
Check the table for the minimum safety distance of the closest
part of the machine – such as the crane boom or the har-
vester head – from a power line.
Check the electrical safety regulations for country-specific

safety distances.
Table (in Finland) (Source: www.tukes.fi)
High voltage High voltage Low voltage

110 kV 6–45 kV 380/220 V
Distance of the approxim- approxim- approxim-
cables from the ately 6 m ately 5 m ately 4.5 m
ground
Nominal voltage Open wires Hanging
underneath to the side wires (m)
(m) (m)
220 / 230 V 2 2 0.5
1–45 kV 2 3 1.5
110 kV 3 5
220 kV 4 5
400 kV 5 5
If an accident does happen in spite of all the precautions,

think carefully about what to do next. If the crane only touches
the cable, you can try to detach the cable by moving the
crane or the machine. If you have to leave the machine, jump
out without touching the ground and the machine at the same
time. Move forward on the ground by hopping on both feet
to a minimum distance of 20 m outside the electric field.
33
1.11 Safety in service and repair jobs
1.11.1 General
Carry out servicing regularly and according to the manufac-
turer’s instructions. If you are unfamiliar with the construction
of the machine, ask the manufacturer for instructions before
beginning service or repairs.
Carry out the service and repair work with consideration and
in a calm manner.
Avoid working alone. Keep a mobile phone near at hand

when doing service work outside the cabin. Set a general
emergency number as a pre-selection number in your phone.
Only use proper tools and approved lifting equipment.

Remove or repair damaged appliances.
Avoid unnecessary idling of the machine while indoors. Take

care to lead exhaust gases to a suction fan.
Take care not to slip when working on top of the machine.

Keep the machine clean. Wear boots with rubber soles.
Keep your feet, hands, head and any loose clothing away
from rotating parts.
Inspect the machine for leaks, chafing and loose parts.

Eliminate the causes and repair even the smallest faults
immediately.
Do not remove any air conditioner hoses, as the refrigerant

is pressurised. The air conditioning system may only be ser-
viced by a person with proper training.
Dispose of waste liquids according to your local environ-

mental regulations. Do not pour them out into the ground or
watercourses.
1.11.2 Actions before service

Prepare carefully for the service or repair work.
● Park the machine on level ground.
34
● Lower the booms and set the harvester head/grapple

firmly on the ground.
● Apply the parking brake. The machine must be immobil-
ised when servicing the brakes.
● Shut down the engine and switch off the power from the
main switch for the duration of the service and repairs,
and always at the end of your shift.
Some repair jobs require that the machine is running. Before
leaving the cabin, switch the crane control switch to the OFF
position and engage the parking brake.
Do not work under the machine or in between the front and

rear frames when the engine is running.
During service or repair, only persons fully familiar with

the controls and devices may stay in the cabin.
● Allow the engine to cool down.
A hot radiator is pressurised. Open the radiator cap slowly
and carefully.
● Make sure that you have the protective equipment, tools,

and spare parts required to complete the service or
repair job.
Tilt the cabin on the support before going underneath it.

Ensure that nobody approaches the cabin while it is in the
tilted position. See the instructions in the base machine's
Owners Manual, section 5.
1.11.3 Hydraulic system
When a machine is started and used for the first time after
hydraulic system servicing during which a significant amount
of air may have accessed the system, special care must be
taken because the machine movements may be different
because of the air in the system. ENSURE that nobody is
close to the machine when such a machine is started.
Never open any hose connections or other hydraulic compon-

ents under pressure. The pressure can remain in the
hydraulic system for quite a long time.
Release the pressure from the hydraulic system before

repairing or servicing. See the base machine's Owners
Manual, section 8.
35
If the pressure accumulator needs to be refilled, leave it to

the authorized workshop or replace the pressure accumulator
with a new one.
When checking for liquid leaks under pressure, use a piece

of paper or cardboard. Never use your bare hands, and wear
gloves at all times.
Take care when draining hot oil from the machine. Hot oil
can cause severe burns.
If the hydraulic pressure needed for steering the machine is

not available because of a fault, contact your local Ponsse
service outlet.
Do not change any pressure settings without the manufac-

turer’s permission.
1.11.4 Cranes
When servicing the swivel device and the booms, always

pay attention to the risk of getting squeezed. The engine
must be stopped and the crane supported so that the move-
ment of the pillar, stand and booms is prevented. Use other
lifting equipment for assistance.
It is not allowed to do any welding to the load bearing sections

of the crane without the permission of an authorised work-
shop. If an authorised workshop has given permission, note
the actions before and after welding (see section 5 of the
base machine's Owner's manual).
1.11.5 Tyres
If a tyre explodes, the flying tyre or rim parts may cause

serious injury or death.
Do not make any changes or repairs to the tyre wheels. The

responsibility for changes made without the permission of
the manufacturer lies with the person making such changes.
Changing a tyre and assembling it on a wheel may only be

done by a tire professional, who has the training, experience
and tools required for the job. Inappropriate assembly may
cause a safety risk.
36
A tyre may not be repaired when the tyre is on the rim

because of an explosion risk. Always ensure the correct tyre
pressure. See the base machine's Owner's Manual, section
8.
1.12 Note when lifting a machine

Check the machine's lifting points from the base machine's
Owner's Manual, section: Lifting and transporting the
machine.
● The hook of the crane and lifting accessory must be

equipped with a latch or some other reliable safety fea-
ture, such as a self-locking hook.
● The machine must not be lifted or moved over people,
or left hanging in the air for no particular reason.
● Always start with the preliminary lift. Stop the lift once
the machine is no longer in contact with the platform to
check the balance and fastening.
● Do not try to stop a swinging machine by hand.
37
1.13 Emergency exits
1 Normal door
2 Opening side window Practise in advance leaving the cabin in case of an emer-
3 Cotter pin gency.
4 Knob
5 Needle cotter pin
1.13.1 Opening the side window from inside

the cabin
● Open the side window (2) by removing the cotter pin (3).
● Push the side window open.
1.13.2 Opening the side window from outside

the cabin
The side window can also be opened from outside the cabin
when the main current is switched on.
● Press down the knob (4) on the right side, the window
will open slightly.
● Remove the needle cotter pins (5) from inside the cabin
window.
● Open the side window.
● Before starting work, always ensure that the emergency
exit locking has been released.
38
1.14 Cabin
The cabin is a safety cabin tested according to standards, in
which a steel frame with polycarbonate windows glued onto
it form a construction protecting the driver.
Do not weld or otherwise change the construction of the cabin

or its structures. If any of the fixed glued windows become
loose (due to a water leak between the cabin frame and
window, for example) or there is a crack in the window or the
window has become opaque, it must be repaired before
continuing to operate or drive the machine.
The gluing must be carried out in accordance with the manu-

facturer’s instructions and by using approved materials/com-
ponents only.
Windows can only be replaced / glued by a properly trained

person.
39
1.15 Welding the machine
1.15.1 Preparations
Carry out the following actions before welding:
Keep a portable fire extinguisher accessible nearby during

welding in case of a fire.
Clean the area to be welded and its surroundings of dirt and

debris.
Remove any paint in the area to be welded before starting

welding. Use goggles and a respirator mask if you need to
sand down paint. If you use paint remover, clean the treated
area with water.
Use appropriate welding equipment. Do not breathe toxic

fumes when welding, and make sure that there is sufficient
ventilation in the working space.
1.15.2 Welding the machine

Picture 1: EU Stage IIIA and IIIB
engines
1 Engine
1
2 ECU unit connector, from
engine to ECU
3 ECU unit connector, from ECU
to cabin unit (VCU)
1. Switch off the engine using the ignition key and remove
the key from the ignition lock.
2. Switch off the power from the Opti computer.
3. Open the engine cover.
4. Switch off the main current from the main current switch.
The service light next to the main current switch will go
out when all the currents have been switched off.
40
5. If the machine contains an EU Stage IIIA or IIIB engine:

Remove the two connectors (2, 3) of the engine control
unit (ECU). See Picture 1.
If the machine contains an EU Stage IV engine: There

is no need to remove the engine control unit connectors.
6. Prepare Opti for welding.

- Detach measuring calipers from the docking station.
- Disconnect the USB cable from the printer.
- Disconnect the antenna cable from the data transfer
modem.
Disconnect the cables from the auxiliary equipment only. Do
not disconnect the cables from the computer.
7. Switch on the welding switch (6, grounding, switch posi-

tion 1). The switch is located in the cabin's electrical
5 centre located under the cover. See section Electrical
system for the exact location of the switch.
8. If the machine has an extinguishing system as optional
equipment: Remove the extinguishing system fuse. See
section Electrical system for the exact location of the
fuse.
4 9. Ensure that the grounding electrode of the welding
equipment is connected to the component to be welded
and that any impurities and paint have been removed
6 from between the electrode and the component.
10. You can start welding now.
1.15.3 Actions after welding
Picture 2 1. Remove the grounding electrode of the welding equip-

4 Fixing screw ment from the component being welded.
5 Welding switch cover 2. Turn off the welding switch (6, switch position 0).
6 Welding switch 3. Reconnect the cables you disconnected earlier and
1 = grounding
attach the measuring calipers back to the docking sta-
0 = OFF
tion.
4. Install the fire extinguishing system fuse back in place.
5. Reattach the two connectors (2, 3) of the engine control
unit (EU Stage IIIA and IIIB engines).
6. Switch on the main current from the main current switch.
7. Close the engine cover.
8. Insert the ignition key in the ignition lock.
9. Test that all functions work normally.
41
10. You can start working now.
The manufacturer assumes no responsibility for any damage

caused by non-compliance with these instructions.
1.16 Starting batteries

Be sure to switch off the main current of the machine (turn
the main current switch to 0 / OFF position) before doing any
checkups or maintenance work on the battery.
If the engine does not start well, check the battery fluid levels.
If even one cell has become emptier than the others or the
colour of the electrolyte has darkened, contact Ponsse's
service representative.
Do not connect a discharged battery to a fully charged one,

as it could explode. Do not recharge a frozen battery, either.
Do not handle batteries near open fire or sparks.
Also, do not smoke near the batteries, as they can emit

explosive gases.
The battery fluid level must be at the level required by the

battery manufacturer before batteries can be charged or the
machine can be started with auxiliary current.
When changing a battery, always first remove the earth cable

connected to the negative (-) terminal. When installing a
battery, connect the earth cable last.
When moving a battery, keep it horizontal.
Avoid situations where metal parts could connect the battery

terminals. Never short-circuit the battery terminals!
Battery acid is highly corrosive and burns clothes, skin, eyes

and mucous membranes. If it comes in contact with eyes, it
causes severe eye damage and loss of vision. If it comes in
contact with skin, it causes severe burns and deep wounds.
Breathing fumes causes respiratory problems and coughing.
First aid instructions:
● Breathing fumes
42
Get to open air. Contact a doctor if you experience any

symptoms.
● Splashes on the skin
Rinse immediately with plenty of water and simultan-
eously take off your contaminated clothes and shoes.
● Splashes into the eyes
Immediately rinse with plenty of water, also under your
eyelids, for a minimum of 15 minutes. Get medical
attention.
● Swallowing
Immediately drink plenty of water. Do not vomit. Get
medical attention.
1.16.1 Battery maintenance and checkups
Failure to service the machine starter batteries in an appro-

priate manner may lead to serious injuries and/or property
damages. If the starter battery electrolyte level drops signific-
antly, the battery may explode under certain circumstances.
Reasons which may cause the electrolyte level to drop faster

than usual include an exceptionally high load in the electrical
system or high surrounding temperature.
Check the electrolyte (battery fluid) level of all batteries in

the machine at least once a week, i.e. every 50 operating
hours.
Note: Turn the engine off, engage the parking brake and
switch off the main current before checking the battery fluid
levels.
When operating in hot conditions and when the electrical

system is exposed to abnormally high loads, it is even more
important to follow the aforementioned battery check inter-
vals!
Add only clean, distilled water into the starter battery cells in
order to fill all starter battery cells to the recommended elec-
trolyte level. If the electrolyte level is too low, immediately
add a sufficient amount of distilled water.
Always familiarise yourself with the battery manufacturer's

maintenance instructions, recommendations and require-
ments.
43
Typically, the electrolyte level should be a little bit (e.g. 10

mm) above the electrode plates positioned vertically in the
starter battery cells, which can be seen from the cell filling
holes looking down on the battery. (Always follow the battery
manufacturer's instructions.)
The proper and safe servicing of some machine models

requires that the starter battery is removed and/or disconnec-
ted from the electrical system.
44
1.17 Hydraulic steps

Hydraulic steps operate parallel with the parking brake. With
the parking brake engaged, the steps will be lowered and
with the parking brake released, the steps will be raised.
Before starting or stopping the engine, make sure that there

are no people within the hydraulic step safety zone.
The hydraulic steps will automatically lower when

● the engine switches off during operation
● the brake circuit pressure drops below 70 bar
The movement path of the steps exceeds the machine’s

maximum width by approx. 0.50–1.00 m, depending on
the machine model.
Ensure that the steps have lowered to the down position

before stepping on them.
Check that the steps are up before driving off.
Beware of steps that are moving up or down. When the

engine is started/switched off and the parking brake is not
engaged, the steps will automatically rise/lower.
Check that the steps have been fastened in the transportation

position for transportation using a cotter pin.
Maximum overhang of the
movement path of the
steps 0.50–1.00 m
45
Note that your machine may be equipped with different types

of steps.
The difference is that steps folded for transportation are

turned in front of the tyre and locked using a cotter pin so
that the steps remain inside the line of tyres, and correspond-
ingly non-folded steps are raised up and locked in the up
position using a cotter pin.
For more information, see section: Lifting and transporting

the machine
Note that folded steps have two different transport posi-

tions. Due to different machine widths, always check
before transportation that the steps are inside the line
of tyres.
Note that, with both types of steps, the machine is operated

and driven normally with the steps raised in the up position.
Folded steps in the trans- Non-folded steps in the

portation position transportation position
46
1.18 Plates
1.18.1 Model plate and CE plate

The following chapters include information on the markings
on the cabin model plate and the machine CE plate. For
specific plate locations, please see chapter 2 Technical
specifications.
If the plates are misplaced or damaged to the extent that

they can no longer be read, the machine operator must
contact the manufacturer or retailer to replace the plates
before resuming work.
1.18.1.1 Cabin model plate
SAFET Y CAB FOR PONSSE

FORESTR Y MACHINE, MEETS:
ROPS: ISO 8082
FOPS: ISO 8083, 11 600 J
Manufactured in Finland by:
OPS: ISO 8084
Ponsse Plc
Ponssentie 22 MAX. ROPS MASS: kg
FI-74200 Vieremä MAX. MACHINE MASS: SEE MANUAL
FINLAND
Tel. +358 20 768 800
ROPS PART NO:
www.ponsse.com CAB SERIAL NO: P30550
The safety cabin of Ponsse forest machines has been tested

in accordance with the following standards and is in compli-
ance with these standards: ROPS ISO 8082, FOPS ISO 8083
(energy level 11 600 J) and OPS ISO 8084.
MAXIMUM ROPS MASS (kg): The total mass of the machine

may not exceed the mass marked in this field.
Cabin frame (ROPS structure) part number.
Cabin serial number.
47
The structure of the machine's safety cabin may not be

changed by welding, drilling or by any other means. When
operating the machine, the ROPS weight included in this
plate may not be exceeded under any circumstances. If you
are unsure of the machine weight, contact the manufacturer.
Always use the seatbelt because the ROPS, FOPS and OPS
structures will not necessarily function as planned without
the seatbelt.
1.18.1.2 CE plate
A CE marking as specified in the Machine Directive
MODEL: Machine model, such as Elk 8W or Beaver
Designation of machinery: The purpose of use / description

of the machine, such as Harvester, Forwarder, Harv./ Forw.
= Dual, Skidder
PIN = Product Identification Number
MANUFACTURING YEAR = Manufacturing year of the

machine
The rated engine power in kilowatts.
TYPICAL WEIGHT = The weight of the machine's most typ-

ical assembly in kilograms, as specified in the Machine Dir-
48
ective. This mass corresponds to a machine in operational

condition with the operator when the regular equipment used
when working is in use, such as the crane, harvester
head/grapple, and also the usual liquids in the wheels in the
case of a harvester. The typical weight of the machine does
not include tracks, chains or unconventional additional
equipment, such as a bulldozer plate, guards available as
optional equipment or own tools and equipment of the
machine operator.
Before starting work, always ensure that the machine's cur-

rent total weight does not exceed the allowed maximum
machine weight (MAX. MACHINE MASS) or the maximum
allowed weight for the cabin's ROPS structure (MAX. ROPS
MASS)! If the machine's total weight exceeds one or both of
these limits, using the machine is not allowed.
49
1.19 Forwarder instructions and warning stickers
1.19.1 Frame stickers

This chapter includes information on the significance and
correct positioning of the forwarder information and warning
stickers. The machine operator must always know what the
stickers mean, which are the dangerous areas and where
the stickers should be placed on the machine.
If a sticker is misplaced or damaged to the extent that it can

no longer be read, the machine operator is obliged to imme-
diately replace it!
The sticker order numbers are included in the text in paren-

theses. The stickers must be placed on the machine in the
places specified below.
14
5 5
10
13 NT 2506
13
13
13
AC COMPRESSOR
2 8
R - 134a
ND-8/ ZXL100 PG
ISO46 LOW VISCO-
SITY PAG CHARGE: kg
SERVICED BY QUALIFIED PERSONELL

ONLY, EQUIPMENT: SAE J2210
NT 2511
3 12
NT 2507
9
NT 2505
NT 2114
1 7 4 4 11 6
1. RISK OF GETTING CRUSHED when tilting machine cabin.

For more instructions on cabin tilting, please see section 5.
(P12936)
50
14
5 5
10
13 NT 2506
13
13
13
AC COMPRESSOR
2 8
R - 134a
ND-8/ ZXL100 PG
ISO46 LOW VISCO-
SITY PAG CHARGE: kg

NT 2511
3 12
NT 2507
9
NT 2505
NT 2114
1 7 4 4 11 6
2. WARNING The air conditioner and its hoses contain

pressurised corrosive fluid. The air conditioner may be ser-
viced by authorised and trained personnel only. (P15276)
AC COMPRESSOR
R - 134a
ND-8/ ZXL100 PG
ISO46 LOW VISCO-
SITY PAG CHARGE: kg

NT 2511 3. Read the Owner's Manual before turning the machine on

using the master switch. (P13020)
4. WARNING High pressure hoses. Read the Owner's Manual

before replacing the hoses. (P12930)
51
14
5 5
10
13 NT 2506
13
13
13
AC COMPRESSOR
2 8
R - 134a
ND-8/ ZXL100 PG
ISO46 LOW VISCO-
SITY PAG CHARGE: kg

NT 2511
3 12
NT 2507
9
NT 2505
NT 2114
1 7 4 4 11 6
5. WARNING Rotating components/equipment. Never open

the machine's engine cover when the engine is running.
(P12974)
NT 2507 6. REMEMBER to attach the underbody shield using a

security chain before closing it. (P12990)
7. WARNING Hydraulically operated steps. Danger of slipping

or getting crushed. Take care when entering or exiting the
cabin. When stopping the machine, make sure that there are
no obstacles/people under the automatic steps. (P12967)
52
14
5 5
10
13 NT 2506
13
13
13
AC COMPRESSOR
2 8
R - 134a
ND-8/ ZXL100 PG
ISO46 LOW VISCO-
SITY PAG CHARGE: kg

NT 2511
3 12
NT 2507
9
NT 2505
NT 2114
1 7 4 4 11 6
NT 2506 8. WARNING Risk of getting crushed when turning the

machine. Before turning the machine, always ensure that
there are no unauthorised persons within the working area.
(P12939)
NT 2505
9. DANGER Rotating cardan shaft. Remember the safety
distance when the machine is on. (P12988)
10. The fuel used in the machine must comply with EN 590.
NT 2115
See the fuel quality requirements in section 7. (P13015)
53
14
5 5
10
13 NT 2506
13
13
13
AC COMPRESSOR
2 8
R - 134a
ND-8/ ZXL100 PG
ISO46 LOW VISCO-
SITY PAG CHARGE: kg

NT 2511
3 12
NT 2507
9
NT 2505
NT 2114
1 7 4 4 11 6
NT 2114
11. WARNING Hot exhaust pipe. May cause severe burns.
Do not touch the exhaust pipe when it is hot. (P12935)
12. Machine towing point. Only the towing point located on

the bumper may be used when towing the machine.
(0037001)
13. Manual extinguisher point. (P29202)
14. WARNING. Danger of getting crushed. This sticker is

only used when the machine includes a hydraulically
operated load space. Before moving the machine load
space, always ensure that there are no unauthorised persons
within the working area. NOTE: The load space cannot be
moved when there are logs inside, or when there is an
obstacle in front of the log gates or the bunks. (P30749)
54
1.20 Cabin stickers
1.20.1 Stickers located in the cabin

The figure below shows the left-side cabin as seen from the
front of the machine and the right-side cabin as seen from
the rear of the machine.
4 7
4 1 5 2 T N
10
6
4 1 5 2 T N
P29170
8 3
P29170
3. Control handle functions. The sticker shows which crane

and grapple movements will occur when using the control
handles. (1281417)
4. First aid kit location and emergency exit (P29185)
5. Extinguishing system instruction sticker (P12927)
55
4 7
4 1 5 2 T N
10
6
4 1 5 2 T N
P29170
8 3
P29170
NT 2514 6. DANGER. Never fill the load space above the log gate.
7. Control handle switches and their functions (P15582)
10. Emergency exit and instructions on opening the window

from the outside. Read section Opening the side window
from outside the cabin of the Owner's Manual.
56
8. A general warning and instruction sticker on the windshield

(P29170), see the figure above. The explanations for the
figures on the sticker can be found in the following list.
1. Read and ensure that you understand the Owner's

Manual before using the machine.
2. The machine's safety cabin complies with the safety
standard requirements when the operator is sitting in
the regular working position and the seatbelt is on. Thus,
no other persons are allowed in the machine cabin
during work.
3. Always wear the seatbelt when in the cabin. If the
machine falls over, hold on to the control handles; do
not jump out.
4. When entering/exiting the cabin, use the machine's own
steps.
5. Obey the country-specific safety distances when working
near electric lines. Read section 1 of the Owner's
Manual.
6. Never operate the machine when there are people within
the safety zone or damage may be caused. The safety
zone of harvesters / dual machines is 90 m (295 ft), the
safety zone of forwarders 20 m (66 ft) and the safety
zone of skidders is 20 m (66 ft).
7. The cabin door and window must be kept closed when
the machine is in operation. Never operate the machine
when the door/window is open (except when driving on
ice, see section 1, DRIVING ON ICE).
8. If there is a crack or other damage on some of the cabin
windows, or if the glass colour has faded or changed,
replace the window before starting work.
9. Ensure that the cabin safety support is properly locked
before working under the cabin. Read section 5 of the
Owner's Manual, which includes information on how the
cabin can be properly tilted.
10. Always turn off the engine before refuelling.
57
11. Check the more detailed cold start instructions in the

Owner's Manual, section 4.
12. No welding on the machine may be performed without
the necessary safety precautions. Before you start
welding the machine, read section 1 of the Owner's
Manual, Actions before welding.
13. Connect the transport support between the front and
rear frames during service work, or lifting or transporting
the machine.
14. Ponsse warning label spare part number. If the label
becomes damaged, immediately replace it with a new
one with the same spare part number.
58
2
Technical specifications

2.1 Locations of plates and the Product Identification
Number .............................................................................. 61
2.2 Technical specifications ....................................................... 62
2.3 Main components ............................................................... 65
2.1 Locations of plates and the Product Identification Number
1 The safety cabin's type plate is located above the front

window inside the cabin.
2 The base machine's type plate and CE marking are
located on the left side of the machine's front frame.
3 The base machine's Product Identification Number is
stamped or carved on the rear end of the machine's front
frame, on the right-hand side of the machine.
4 The loader type plate is situated on the lower part of the
pillar.
61
2.2 Technical specifications

4200 (4450)
2430
3710
3580
600
2850
1660 1300 3450 1300 1120 (1370) 220
8830 - 9080
Weight
Minimum weight .............................. 13 400 kg (29 542 lbs)
Typical weight .................................. 14 000 kg (30 865 lbs)
Dimensions
Length .................................. 8830–9080 mm (348–357 in)
- sliding bunk ....................................... + 610 mm (+ 24 in)
Width ..................................... 2450–2690 mm (96–106 in)
Transportation height (max.) ................. 3710 mm (146 in)
Ground clearance at middle pivot .............. 600 mm (24 in)
Load capacity
Carrying capacity ........................... 10 000 kg (22 046 lbs)
Load space cross-section ..................... 3.8 m² (40.9 sq ft)
Load space length .............. 4200–4450 mm (165–175 in)
- sliding bunk ....................................... + 610 mm (+ 24 in)
The log gate can be moved hydraulically.
Engine
MB OM 904 LA
EUROMOT 3A
Nominal power ......................................... 129 kW (175 hp)
Torque ........................................ 675 Nm / 1200–1600 rpm
Fuel tank volume ................................. 130 l or 29 gal (UK)
62
Transmission
Electronically controlled hydrostatic-mechanical transmission.
Two speed ranges forward and backward. Rear drive release.
Tractive force ........................................ 130 kN (29 225 lbf)
Driving speed ................................ 0–23 km/h (0–14 mph)
Axles
Front and rear with planetary gears and differential gear locks
equipped, gear wheel transmission bogie axles.
Tyres
Front and rear .......................... 600/50-22.5 or 710/40-22.5
Working hydraulics
Separate cooling circuits
Loader pump ......................................... 145 cm³ (8.8 cu in)
Pressure (loader K70+) .................... 23,5 MPa (3 408 PSI)
Hydraulic oil tank volume ..................... 130 l or 29 gal (UK)
Steering
Mini steering wheel / stepless button control
Articulated steering, steering angle ............................ ± 44°
Outer turning radius ...................................... 7,4 m (24.3 ft)
Loader
PONSSE K70+ M/S
Grapple
PONSSE 260/260S .............................. 0,26 m² (2.80 sq ft)
63
Control system
PONSSE OptiControl
Electrical system
Voltage ........................................................................ 24 V
Batteries ..................................................... 2 pcs x 185 Ah
Alternator ....................................................... 2 pcs x 80 A
Working lights: Forwarder Harvester/Dual

- Halogen max. 17 pcs x 70 W 21 pcs x 70 W
- HID (High Intensity Discharge) max. (optional) 15 pcs x 35 W 20 - 23 pcs x 35 W
- LED (optional) 15 pcs x 35 W 20 - 23 pcs x 35 W
Brakes
Operating brake: Hydraulic multi-disc brakes front and rear.
Parking brake: Spring-loaded multi-disc brakes front and
rear.
Working brake: Act on front and rear brakes.
Cabin
Tiltable safety cabin which complies with the ISO 8082
(ROPS), ISO 8083 (Energy level 11 600 J) (FOPS) and ISO
8084 (OPS) requirements. Windows made of hard polycar-
bonate pane. Fully adjustable air sprung seat. Semi-automatic
air conditioning and heating control system.
Please contact the nearest Ponsse sales agent for further

information on standard and optional equipment.
The manufacturer reserves the right to make technical

changes and improvements.
64
2.3 Main components
11
10
9 1 3 5
12
4
8 6 7 8
1 Engine: MB OM 904 LA
2 Directional valve: PARKER K170
3 Drive transmission pump: SAUER 90R100
4 Crane circuit pump: REXROTH A11VO145
5 Circulating pump: 56 cm³ or 3.4 cu in (hydraulic oil
cooling system)
6 Drive transmission motor: SAUER 51V160
7 Transfer box: NAF PO42
8 Front and rear bogie: NAF PO54
9 Engine cooler
10 Air conditioning cooler
11 Hydraulic oil cooler
12 Air compressor
65
3
Controls

3.1 General .............................................................................. 69
3.2 Side panel .......................................................................... 70
3.3 Opti 4G control panel .......................................................... 73
3.4 Alarm lights in cabin ceiling ................................................. 73
3.5 Air conditioner and heater controllers ................................... 74
3.6 Pedals ............................................................................... 74
3.7 Control handles and arm rest switches ................................. 75
3.7.1 Mini handles, forwarder ......................................... 75
3.7.2 Clam bunk (optional equipment) ............................ 80
3.7.3 Winch (optional equipment) ................................... 81
3.8 Alarms ............................................................................... 82
3.8.1 Warning and alert lights for diesel engines .............. 82
3.8.2 Alarm light and strong buzzer sound ...................... 82
3.8.3 Low buzzer sound ................................................ 84
3.9 Machine operator's seat ...................................................... 86
3.9.1 Operating instructions for BE-GE 9000 series ......... 86
3.10 Fire extinguisher system ..................................................... 88
3.10.1 Portable fire extinguishers ..................................... 88
3.10.2 Semiautomatic extinguishing system (optional
equipment) ........................................................... 88
3.10.3 Actions in case of a fire ......................................... 90
3 Controls
3.1 General
The forwarder functions are controlled with the PONSSE
OptiControl system. Through the display unit located in the
side panel, the machine operator can receive information
about the machine operations, make adjustments or calibra-
tions, and locate the cause of any failures. For more detailed
instructions for display functions, see the OptiControl
Instruction Manual.
If the machine is equipped with the PONSSE Opti4G for-

warder information system in the Opti PC, the machine
operator can use the OptiControl system through the Opti
PC. Instructions for system functions can be found in the
Opti4G Instruction Manual.
The functions of the Opti PC display and CPU buttons and

LEDs are described in the Operating and service instructions
section of this book.
Operating instructions for additional equipment can be found

at the end of this book.
69
3 Controls
3.2 Side panel
1 Ignition lock
Ignition lock positions:
0 = engine stop (STOP), ignition key can be removed
from the ignition lock
Note: When the machine is equipped with the
Opti4G information system, ensure that the Opti
PC is shut down before switching off the main
current from the main current switch.
I = current on and automatic pre-glowing
III = start
2 Parking brake
Switch positions:
OFF = brake off, steps up
ON = brake on, steps down (parking brake indicator
light stays active in the switch)
4 Emergency stop push button (engine stop)
● in an emergency, press the button down
● release the button by turning it clockwise
5 Alarm light (red)
6 Engine heater timer (engine heater as optional equip-
ment)
7 Central lubrication system key panel (central lubrication
system as optional equipment)
8 Horn
9 Steering wheel malfunction, indicator light
10 Window safety solenoid, indicator light
11 Diesel engine warning light (red)
12 Diesel engine alert light (yellow)
13 Diesel engine oil lower limit, indicator light
14 Glow, indicator light
70
3 Controls
15 Charge indicator light I (the upper alternator)

16 Charge indicator light II (the lower alternator)
17 Emergency light
18 Turning signal indicator
19 Turning signals
20 Parking lights
Switch positions:
0 = OFF
1 = parking lights and backlight for switches
2 = activate headlights
21 Headlights
Switch positions:
0 = OFF
1 = low beam
2 = high beam (activates the blue backlight for the
switch)
22 Cabin interior lights
Switch positions:
0 = OFF
1 = interior lights with door switch to activate the
lights
2 = interior lights (all on)
23 Working light selector buttons
26 Working lights ON/OFF
29 Loader control switch ON/OFF
30 Loader scale (optional equipment)
31 Log gate direction selection switch (optional)
32 Cigarette lighter (on the casing lid)
34 Dimmer, indicator lights for side panel switches (under
the lid)
35 Dimmer, indicator lights for side panel switches (under
the lid)
71
3 Controls
36 OptiControl display
The OptiControl display power switch (a) may always

be in the On position. The display power is only switched
off during servicing, if required.
Indicators in the display:

● tachometer
● fuel gauge
● engine temperature gauge
OptiControl display ● engine oil pressure gauge
a Display power switch ● hydraulic oil temperature gauge
b USB bus
● trip meter
● odometer
● speed indicator
● voltage meter
● hour meter (loader, diesel and drive transmission)
● outdoor thermometer (if the machine is equipped
with an engine that meets the Euromot 3B emission
limits)
● DEF (Diesel Exhaust Fluid) gauge (if the machine
is equipped with an engine that meets the Euromot
3B emission limits)
The status icons displayed in the instrument cluster are

described in the OptiControl Instruction Manual.
If the machine is equipped with the Opti4G information
system, the indicators can be opened on the Opti PC
display.
72
3 Controls
3.3 Opti 4G control panel
Opti 4G control panel opens/closes when you click the icon

in the lower right corner of the display. You can also
open/close the control panel through the driver confirmation
switch. The control panel functions are explained in the sec-
tion CONTROL PANEL of the Opti 4G Instruction Manual.
3.4 Alarm lights in cabin ceiling

1 Central lubrication (yellow) (optional equipment)
2 Anti-theft alarm (blue) (optional equipment)
Alarm lights in cabin ceiling
73
3 Controls
3.5 Air conditioner and heater

controllers
1 Fan speed adjustment

2 Temperature adjustment
3 Fresh air / inside air circulation ON/OFF
4 Air conditioner operating switch ON/OFF
5 Defrosting switch ON/OFF (ON switches the air condi-
tioning on)
3.6 Pedals
1 Brake pedal (operating brake)
2 Accelerator
3 Loader base tilt (optional equipment)
74
3 Controls
3.7 Control handles and arm rest

switches
3.7.1 Mini handles, forwarder
L Left control handle

R Right control handle
1 Extension out
2 Extension in
(when the bulldozer blade is activated: bulldozer blade
floating)
3 Luffing boom up
down)
4 Luffing boom down
up)
5 Slew loader left
6 Slew loader right
7 Grapple open
75
3 Controls
8 Grapple closed
9 Lifting boom down
10 Lifting boom up
11 Slew rotator counterclockwise
12 Slew rotator clockwise
42 Arm rest adjustment forward/backward
44 Seat release/locking (optional equipment)
45 Mini steering wheel
46 Off-road steering
47 Driving direction selector

● F = forward
● N = neutral
● R = backward
48 Differential lock
● rear wheel lock on
● locks off in the middle position
● front and rear wheel locks on
76
3 Controls
49 Frame oscillation lock

● machine front and rear frame locked
● machine front and rear frame move
relative to each other
50 Driver confirmation
● alarm confirmation
51 Log gate control
● log gate forward/backward
If the machine is equipped with both log gate for-
ward/backward and log gate up/down (optional), the log
gate control operates according to the position of the log
gate direction selection switch (31):
● log gate forward/backward or
● log gate up/down (optional)
52 Windscreen wipers/washer
● windscreen wipers
● OFF
● windscreen wipers and washer
a Windscreen wiper selector buttons
b Windscreen wiper wiping interval adjustment
77
3 Controls
53 Constant rpm switch

● this switch allows you to select the
engine's constant speed set in the
OptiControl/Opti4G system's user
interface
54 Driving program switch
● this switch allows you to select the
settings for driving modes 1, 2 and 3
set in the OptiControl/Opti4G sys-
tem's user interface
55 Driving speed range selector
The settings for the fast and slow range are given in the
OptiControl/Opti4G system's user interface.
● fast range
● slow range
56 Rear drive release
● front wheels are driven
● front and rear wheels are driven
78
3 Controls
57 Bulldozer blade activation switch (bulldozer blade as

optional equipment)
● bulldozer blade is not activated
● bulldozer blade is activated (The left
control handle movements 3 and 4
control the bulldozer blade up/down,
and the left control handle move-
ments 2 control bulldozer blade
floating. See operating instructions
through the Operating and service
instructions section in this book.)
79
3 Controls
3.7.2 Clam bunk (optional equipment)
Left jaw open

Left jaw closed
Jaws open, cables loose
Jaws closed, cables tight
Right jaw closed

Right jaw open
Cables loose
Cables tight
80
3 Controls
3.7.3 Winch (optional equipment)
Cable out
Cable in
Winch release
● When the button is pressed, the winch brake

will be released and the cable will move
freely. When the button is pressed again, the
winch will be locked.
81
3 Controls
3.8 Alarms
If the buzzer or a signal light gives an alarm, stop the machine
immediately and check the cause of the alarm.
3.8.1 Warning and alert lights for diesel

engines
Alarm Description of alarm Alarm correction
Warning light (red) - Turn off the engine immediately
and contact an authorised Ponsse
service.
Alert light (yellow) - Contact an authorised Ponsse
service.
Warning and alert - The warning and alert lights are - Do not start the machine. The
lights are blinking blinking, and the diesel engine's cause may be excessively high oil
automatic stopping function is pressure or coolant temperature.
switched on. - Contact an authorised Ponsse
service.
3.8.2 Alarm light and strong buzzer sound

The alarm light is blinking and an alarm is shown on the dis-
play.
The alarm is acknowledged by pressing the Driver confirma-

tion switch on the left control handle's side panel or the OK
button on the display.

Minimum delivery - Low feed pressure in transmission - Check the feed pressure and, if
pressure - Realarm in 2 minutes, if left active necessary, contact an authorised
Ponsse service.
- Transmission feed pressure
measurement instructions are in
Section 8 of the harvester/forwarder
Owner's Manual.
Brake circuit pres- - Low brake pressure - Adjust the brake pressure.
sure (alarm), lower - Realarm in 2 minutes, if left active - Brake circuit pressure adjustment
limit instructions are in Section 8 of the
harvester/forwarder Owner's
Manual.
82
3 Controls

Hydraulic oil reser- - The hydraulic oil running out - Check the hydraulic oil level, and
voir level, lower limit - Realarm in 30 seconds, if left act- refill hydraulic oil, if required.
ive
Diesel, coolant - The diesel engine coolant running - Check the coolant level, and refill
out coolant, if required.
- Realarm in 5 minutes, if left active
Diesel, air filter - The diesel engine air filter clogged - Check the condition of the air fil-
- No realarm ter. Clean the air filter and replace
it, if required.
- Air filter replacement instructions
are in Section 5 of the harvester/for-
warder Owner's Manual.
Return filter block- - The return filter clogged - Replace the return filter.
age level, alarm - Realarm in 5 minutes, if left active - Filters instructions are in Section
6 of the harvester/forwarder
Owner's Manual.
Cooling circulation - The cooling circulation filter - Replace the cooling circulation fil-
filter blockage clogged ter.
- Realarm in 5 minutes, if left active - Filters instructions are in Section
6 of the harvester/forwarder
Owner's Manual.
Sensor supply - Short-circuit in the sensor feed - Contact an authorised Ponsse
voltage current line service.
- No realarm
Hydraulic oil temper- - The hydraulic oil temperature - Wait until the temperature of the
ature, lower limit below -20 °C hydraulic oil rises before starting
- Realarm in 20 minutes, if left act- the work.
ive
Hydraulic oil temper- - The hydraulic oil temperature - Clean the cooler.
ature, upper limit exceeds +80 °C
- No realarm
Hydraulic oil temper- - The hydraulic oil temperature - Contact an authorised Ponsse
ature exceeds +85 °C service.
- Realarm in 5 minutes, if left active
Steering wheel alarm - Contact an authorised Ponsse
service.
Diesel error mode - Realarm in 30 seconds, if left act- - Contact an authorised Ponsse
ive service.
DEF amount – - DEF additive is running out - Refill DEF additive.
Lower limit - Realarm in 15 minutes, if left act-
ive
83
3 Controls
3.8.3 Low buzzer sound

An alarm is displayed on the display.
The alarm is acknowledged by pressing the Driver confirma-

tion switch on the left control handle's side panel or the OK
button on the display.

Fuel quantity, lower limit - The fuel running out - Refuel.
- Realarm in 15 minutes, if left
active
Parking brake pressure - Parking brake on, driving dir- - Check the parking brake
ection selected pressure.
- No realarm - Release the parking brake.
- Release the front/rear gas
pedal.
- Turn the driving direction
selector to the middle position
and back.
Driving prohibited: steps - The alarm goes off if driving - Release the parking brake.
with the steps down and a - Release the front/rear gas
driving direction is selected. pedal.
- The alarm goes off if the - Turn the driving direction
steps are up but the driving selector to the middle position
direction selector has not been and back.
turned to the middle position
and back.
- No realarm
Driver sensor - Machine take off and activa- - If the driver sits down on the
tion of the harvester head is seat within 10 seconds after
prevented if there is no driver the alarm, the alarm will be
on the driver's seat. reset automatically.
- Realarm in 5 seconds, if left - After 10 seconds, reset the
active alarm with the Driver confirma-
tion switch.
Frame lock switch - The frame oscillation lock not - Switch on the frame oscilla-
on tion lock.
- No realarm
Bulldozer blade activation - The bulldozer blade in use - When the bulldozer blade is
switch - No realarm no longer being used, switch
off the bulldozer activation
switch.
84
3 Controls

Differential gear pressure - Switching pressure in the dif- - Contact an authorised
switch ferential gear even though the Ponsse service.
differential gear lock switch is
not on
- No realarm
Differential lock, rear - The rear wheel lock on and - When the driving surface has
the working brake off plenty of grip, switch the differ-
ential lock to the middle posi-
tion.
Differential lock, both - The front and rear wheel - When the driving surface has
locks are on and the working plenty of grip, switch the differ-
brake is off. ential lock to the middle posi-
tion.
DEF amount – Lower limit - DEF additive is running out - Refill DEF additive.
- Realarm in 60 minutes, if left
active
85
3 Controls
3.9 Machine operator's seat

The machine is equipped with one operator seat, described
later, which is also the only working position in the machine.
The machine can only be controlled from the machine oper-
ator's seat.
3.9.1 Operating instructions for BE-GE 9000

series
86
3 Controls
1 Height adjustment of the seat – model 9100

To elevate the seat, turn the hand wheel clockwise.
Weight adjustment is automatic.
2 Quick lowering – model 9100

For ease of entry and exit, pull the wheel outwards to
lower the seat rapidly. Push the wheel inwards to return
the seat to normal position.
3 Adjustment of the seat cushion tilting
Infinite tilting of the seat cushion.
4 Adjustment of the backrest tilting
Infinite tilting of the backrest.
5 Lumbar support adjustment
Infinite adjustment of lumbar support.
6 Adjustment of the seat forward and backward
Turn the clamp to the right, adjust the seat forward /
backward.
7 Height limiter with a locking function
Positions:
N Full range suspension (the lever to the right).
Normal position.
2 Limited range suspension (lever in medium posi-
tion).
To be applied in those cases where the driver is
frequently entering and leaving the seat.
3 Locked suspension (lever to the left).
Position 3 is the delivery position and must from a
safety point of view only be applied in an emergency
situation.
8 Electrical heating of the seat

Thermostatically-controlled, on the right side of the seat.
9 Headrest
Vertically adjustable
10 Seat belt
2-point design
11 Seat turning release
(As an optional equipment also available an air brake
stand in which the release in the armrest.)
87
3 Controls
3.10 Fire extinguisher system
3.10.1 Portable fire extinguishers

There are two portable fire extinguishers in the machine. One
is located on the cabin door, inside the cabin, and the other
can be found outside the machine.
Have the portable fire extinguishers checked and serviced

regularly at a repair shop. Find out the check/service intervals
from your insurance company in order to follow the insurance
conditions.
3.10.2 Semiautomatic extinguishing system

(optional equipment)
Also a semiautomatic fire extinguisher system is available
for PONSSE forest machines. When driving the machine and
the alarm device gives an alarm, the driver must release the
system at their discretion. When the machine is parked and
the main current is switched off from the main current switch,
the system is released automatically.
88
3 Controls
The alarm panel is located at the back of the cabin, on the right.
1 Manual release
The extinguishing system is released by pressing the button.
2 Fire alarm
The red indicator light turns on once a fire has been detected.
3 Release circuit fault
The yellow indicator light turns on if there is a fault in the release
circuit.
4 Detector circuit fault
The yellow indication light turns on if there is a fault in the detector
circuit.
5 Manual mode
The yellow indicator light is lighted when the forest machine's main
current is switched on. The extinguishing system must be released
manually.
6 Power in the extinguishing system
The green indicator light is lighted when the extinguishing system
is in a normal stand-by mode.
7 Test and reset button
The extinguishing system is tested during normal operations by
pressing the button. The button also resets the system after releas-
ing.
In case of system malfunctions, contact an authorised PONSSE service.
89
3 Controls
3.10.3 Actions in case of a fire

In case of an alarm, proceed as follows:
● Switch off the engine.
● Activate the extinguishing system (optional equipment).
● Exit the cabin.
● Switch off the main current from the main current switch.
● Take out the portable fire extinguishers and begin fire
fighting.
The machine has designated openings marked with stickers

(see picture) for extinguishing the fire with the portable fire
extinguisher.
● Prevent the fire from spreading.

● Call for help if required.
90
4
Driving instructions

4.1 Machine introduction ........................................................... 93
4.2 Before starting the engine ................................................... 94
4.3 Starting the engine .............................................................. 96
4.4 Driving the machine ............................................................ 97
4.5 Driving on a public road ...................................................... 99
4.6 Driving and loading with constant speed ............................. 101
4.7 Automatic parking brake .................................................... 103
4.8 Loader control .................................................................. 104
4.9 Stopping the engine .......................................................... 105
4.9.1 Normal engine stop ............................................. 105
4.9.2 Emergency stop .................................................. 106
4.10 Auxiliary starting current .................................................... 107
4.10.1 Note during auxiliary starting and charging ........... 107
source ................................................................ 107
4.10.3 Auxiliary charging with another machine ............... 107
4.10.4 Auxiliary starting with another machine ................. 108
4.11 Towing ............................................................................. 109
4.12 Getting stuck and driving into water .................................... 109
4.13 Machine falling over .......................................................... 109
transportation ................................................................... 110
4.14.1 Moving the machine by driving ............................. 110
page) ................................................................. 111
4.14.3 Fastening the machine for transportation (picture
on previous page) ............................................... 111
4.1 Machine introduction

When using the forest machine for the first time, check that
● the machine delivery and equipment level is as agreed

upon
● the machine does not have any transportation or other
damage
● all of the machine's protective and safety equipment is
in place and operational
● the middle pivot lock is not on (see 4.14)
Make sure that extinguishers and other equipment are in

place and operational.
Make sure that you have obtained sufficient training for using
the machine and have thoroughly read the instructions for
the machine. As the machine owner, you are obligated to
ensure that each machine operator meets the requirements
above.
93
4.2 Before starting the engine

When the machine is equipped with an engine that meets
the Euromot 3B emission limits, familiarise yourself with the
separate Selective Catalytic Reduction, SCR instructions
supplied with the machine.
Familiarise yourself with the PONSSE OptiControl system's

Instruction Manual. If the machine is equipped with the
PONSSE Opti4G forwarder information system, read its
Instruction Manual.
Before starting the engine, check that the machine does not
have any external damage (hoses, welded structures, etc.).
Check that the machine's daily or required maintenance has
been performed according to the instructions given (oil and
liquid levels, etc.).
Ensure that there are no persons within the machine's safety

area.
Insert the key in the main current switch and switch on the
main current by turning the key approx. 90° clockwise.
Open the cabin door with one of the keys in the bunch.
Fasten your seat belt immediately after sitting in the operator's

seat.
Insert the ignition key in the ignition lock.

Main current switch
Before starting the engine, switch

● parking brake (2) on (switch in ON position, steps down)
● driving direction selector (47) to neutral position
● frame oscillation lock (49) on
94
Make sure that all other switches are OFF.
Starting the engine requires that

● the parking brake switch is on
● emergency stop push buttons (one in the cabin's side
panel and the other outside the machine below the
cabing door) are in the upper position.
95
4.3 Starting the engine
0 = engine stop (STOP) 11 Diesel engine warning light

I = current on and automatic 12 Diesel engine alert light
pre-glowing 13 Diesel engine oil lower limit,
III = start indicator light
14 Glow, indicator light
Turn the ignition key clockwise to position I (ignition current

on). Wait until the indicator lights (11, 12, 13, 14) go off.
Turn the ignition key to position III; the engine starts. Release
the ignition key. Do not run the starter motor continuously for
more than 30 seconds.
Do not use the accelerator pedal when starting the engine.
A fuel operated extra heater is recommended in temperatures

below 0°C (32°F). Preheating facilitates engine startup and
increases the service life of both the engine and its auxiliary
equipment.
Do not let the engine speed exceed 1200 rpm before the
hydraulic oil warms up; higher running speed of the engine
may damage the hydraulic system.
Before driving or working, wait a few seconds until the brake

system has charged up and all gauges and indicator lights
permit you to start work.
If you started the engine while the driving direction selector

(47) was not in the neutral position, you must first return the
driving direction selector to the neutral position (accelerator
up) before you can move the machine.
96
4.4 Driving the machine

Stop the machine when
● switching the rear drive on/off (56)
● switching the fast range (55) on/off.
First, drive the machine slowly backwards. After this, you
can drive forwards.
2 Parking brake switch

29 Loader control switch
Verify free movement range of the steps.
Switch off the parking brake (2). Wait until the steps are
raised.
Select the driving direction with the driving direction selector

(47).
Steer the machine with the off-road steering lever (46) or the
mini steering wheel (45). The mini steering wheel can only
be used when the seat is turned towards the engine.
When no-one has sut in the driver's seat in 10 seconds, the

45 Mini steering wheel machine will sound an alarm. When you wish to move the
46 Off-road steering machine, sit down to the driver's seat and reset the alarm
47 Driving direction selector
through the driver confirmation switch (50).
50 Driver confirmation
56 Rear drive release Do not drive if the buzzer is sounding!
The machine starts to move when you press the accelerator.
When you release the accelerator, the machine stops. At the

same time, the working brake and frame oscillation lock are
switched on.
When parking the machine, switch on the parking brake (2).

The steps are lowered.
97
Turn off the engine by turning the ignition key to the STOP
position.
When getting out of the machine, remember to switch off the

main current from the main current switch.
When the seat is turned towards the load space and the
loader control switch (29) is on, the loader movements are
functional. Do not move the control handles unless you know
how to control the loader.
98
4.5 Driving on a public road

Before driving on public roads, make sure the condition of
the machine meets the national road traffic regulations and
the machine has appropriate road traffic equipment.
Tracks/chains may not be used on wheels when driving on

public roads.
Before driving on public roads:

● Set the loader into the transportation position. See Sec-
tion 4.14.
● Install and adjust the rear view mirrors.
2 2
1 1
Fastening rear view mirrors

1 Attach the mirror arm to the bracket using screws.
2 Screw the bracket to the grip handle on the right side of the
machine and to the cabin door on the left side.
● Install contour lights and turning signals, and a triangle

warning of a slow moving vehicle.
Installing contour lights and turning signals to the front

machine frame:
1 Attach contour lights and turning signals to the front machine
frame using cotter pins.
2 Insert the front lights plug into the socket in the left bumper
casing.
99
4 4
Installing contour lights and turning signals, a triangle warning

of a slow moving vehicle to the rear frame extension:
3 Screw the counterparts of the arms for contour lights and
turning signals into place in the rear frame extension.
4 Push the arms for the lights to the counterparts in the rear
frame extension.
5 Insert the rear lights plug into the socket in the rear frame
extension.
● Test that the contour lights and turning signals work.

● Remove the plexiglass covers from the headlights when
driving on public roads.
1 Bumper casing
2 Plexiglass cover for headlights
3 Seal
● Turn off the working lights and switch on the headlights.

● Take into account the national road traffic regulations of
the country where the machine is being operated.
When driving long highway stretches in temperatures above

20°C (68°F), make sure that the quality of the hydraulic oil
meets the recommendations given by Ponsse (see section
Oils and liquids in this manual).
Always use an approved (for example, EN 471 High-visibility

warning clothing) safety/reflector vest or clothing whenever
you have to move around the machine in road areas or other
such areas where high visibility is essential.
100
4.6 Driving and loading with constant

speed
Before starting work, always ensure that the locking of the
opening side window (emergency exit) has been released.
2 Parking brake switch

29 Loader control switch
Start the engine.
The OptiControl display power is only switched off during

servicing, if required. If the OptiControl display is switched
off, switch it on.
If the machine is equipped with the Opti4G information sys-

tem, switch on the Opti PC.
Verify free movement range of the steps.

OptiControl display
a Display power switch Switch off the parking brake (2). The steps are raised.
b USB bus
Select the slow range (55).
Switch on the loader control switch (29).
The constant speed is set specifically for each driver, driving

mode and driving speed range through the OptiControl or
Opti4G system's user interface. See more detailed instruc-
tions in the OptiControl or Opti4G Instruction Manual.
46 Off-road steering
47 Driving direction selector You can select the constant speed set in the user interface
53 Constant rpm switch for driving mode (modes 1, 2, 3) and driving speed range
54 Driving program switch
(slow/fast) selections using the driving program switch (54)
and driving speed range selector (55). You can turn on the
constant speed using the constant speed switch (53).
101
Select the driving direction with the driving direction selector

(47).
Steer the machine with the off-road steering lever (46).
Do not drive if the buzzer is sounding!
The machine starts to move when you press the accelerator.
When you release the accelerator, the machine stops. At the

same time, the working brake and frame oscillation lock are
switched on. You can start working with the loader.
If the loader does not function when you switch on the loader
control switch (29), check that the off-road steering lever (46)
and loader control handles (L and R) are in the middle posi-
tion, and switch on the loader control switch again
(OptiControl system gives the message: Release the
handles).
When parking the machine, switch on the parking brake (2).

The steps are lowered.
Position the loader so that it cannot move after the engine

has been shut down.
Switch off the loader control switch (29).
Always shut down the engine when you leave the operator's
seat and/or the cabin.
If the engine shuts off while operating, the parking brake is

switched on automatically (even if the parking brake switch
(2) is in the OFF position). Before restarting switch on the
parking brake switch. The engine can only be started
when the parking brake switch is in the ON position. The
working brake and the frame oscillation lock must not be on
during starting.
102
4.7 Automatic parking brake

The parking brake is switched on automatically if
● the engine shuts off while operating
● brake circuit pressure drops below 70 bar.
At the same time the hydraulic steps are lowered.
103
4.8 Loader control

1 Extension out
2 Extension in
3 Luffing boom up
4 Luffing boom down
5 Slew loader left
6 Slew loader right
7 Grapple open
8 Grapple closed
9 Lifting boom down
10 Lifting boom up
11 Slew rotator counterclockwise
12 Slew rotator clockwise
104
4.9 Stopping the engine

Before stopping the engine, make sure that there is nobody
within the hydraulic step movement range.
4.9.1 Normal engine stop

1. Turn the driving direction selector (47) to neutral position.
2. Switch on the parking brake (2). The steps are lowered.
3. Position the loader so that it cannot move after the
engine has been stopped.
4. Switch off the loader control switch (29).
5. Let the engine be idle for approx. 30 seconds so that
the turbocharger temperature levels out.
6. Turn the ignition key to the STOP position (the ignition
key can be removed from the ignition lock). If the parking
brake has not been turned on, the steps are automatic-
ally lowered.
7. Switch off the Opti PC (if the machine is equipped with
the Opti4G information system).
The side window, which can be opened from outside the

cabin (emergency exit), will become locked when the main
current is switched off. Always remove the main current
switch key when leaving the machine.
105
4.9.2 Emergency stop

The engine stops by pressing the emergency stop push but-
ton (4). The parking brake is activated automatically (the
parking brake switch (2) remains in the OFF position), the
steps are lowered. The hydraulic operations stop. The power
and electric functions remain active.
The engine cannot be started when the emergency stop

button is down. Release the button by turning it clockwise.
Emergency stop push button in the
cabin's switch panel Before restarting the engine, switch on the parking brake
switch.
Emergency stop push button outside

the machine below the cabin door
Always check the functioning of the emergency stop push

button before starting your shift.
106
4.10 Auxiliary starting current
4.10.1 Note during auxiliary starting and

charging
If auxiliary current is needed, be careful with the short circuit-

ing and sparking of the batteries. Explosion hazard!
Primarily use auxiliary charging as indicated in 4.10.2 or

4.10.3.
When the machine is equipped with an extinguishing system,

note that the extinguishing system does not work if any of
the battery cables are disconnected or the extinguishing
system fuse has been removed.
For auxiliary starting, use starting cables that are as short as

possible and have enough capacity (minimum cross-sectional
area 50 mm² (0.08 sq in)).

source
If a separate power source (e.g. a rapid charger) is used for
charging the batteries:
2. Disconnect the negative (-) cable of the machine from
the battery.
3. Connect the auxiliary power source and charge the bat-
teries.
4. Disconnect the auxiliary cables.
5. Connect the negative (-) cable of the machine to the
battery.
Main current is switched off from the 7. Start the engine.
main current switch
4.10.3 Auxiliary charging with another machine

1. Switch off the main current from the main current switch
in the machine being charged.
2. Disconnect the negative (-) cable from the battery being
charged.
107
3. Connect the auxiliary cables (see 4.10.4) and start the

assisting machine.
Let the engine of the assisting machine run until the
batteries have been charged to a sufficient level.
4. Switch off the assisting machine's engine.
5. Disconnect the auxiliary cables.
6. Connect the negative (-) cable of the machine to the
battery.
8. Start the engine.
4.10.4 Auxiliary starting with another machine

1. Switch off the assisting machine's engine.
2. Switch off the main current from the main current switch
(if any) in the assisting machine.
3. Also switch off the main current from the main current
switch in the machine to be started.
4. If the machine is equipped with an extinguishing system,
remove the extinguishing system fuse.
See chapter Fuses in the bumper casing in section
Electrical system for the exact location of the fuse.
5. First, connect the positive (+) auxiliary starting cable to
the positive (+) terminal in the battery of the assisting
machine.
6. Connect the other end of the positive (+) auxiliary starting
cable to the positive (+) terminal in the battery of the
machine to be started.
7. Connect the negative (-) auxiliary starting cable to the
negative (-) terminal in the battery of the assisting
machine.
8. Connect the other end of the negative (-) auxiliary start-
ing cable to the welded frame structure of the machine
to be started, outside the battery case.
This is done to minimise the explosion hazard.
9. Switch on the main current from the main current switch

in the machine to be started.
10. Start the machine's engine.
11. Disconnect the cables in the reverse order, first the
negative (-) cable from the machine to be started.
12. Fit the extinguishing system fuse back into place.
108
4.11 Towing
If you have to tow the machine, contact an authorised
PONSSE service.
4.12 Getting stuck and driving into

water
When the machine has got stuck or it has been driven into
water, and there is reason to believe that water has entered
the oil through a seal or a breather, the system must be
checked and the oil replaced, if necessary. During an oil
change, the filters must be replaced.
Perform the above mentioned check again after driving for

a while.
4.13 Machine falling over

If the machine falls over, contact an authorised PONSSE
service immediately. Do not start the engine if the machine
has fallen over.
109

transportation
PONSSE Gazelle
= Centre of gravity
4.14.1 Moving the machine by driving
When the machine is moved by driving or transported on a

transportation platform, note that the topmost loader point is
the highest point during transportation.
Always check the transport height against bridge height lim-

itations. Make sure that the machine transportation meets
the local road traffic regulations.

the machine has appropriate road traffic equipment (see
section 4.5 Driving on a public road).
110

page)
1. Set the loader firmly in its place.
2. Lock the middle pivot (1).
3. Use a cable to fasten the steps to the fixed footstep next
to them.
Take special caution when stepping down from the machine

while the steps are up.
4. Tie lifting slings (2) around the front and rear axles. The
slings must be supported so that they do not press on
the cabin.
4.14.3 Fastening the machine for

transportation (picture on previous
page)
1. Attach the fastening cables/chains/slings, etc. (3)
crosswise from the front and rear of the machine and
the middle pivot.
2. Place wedges (4) in front of and behind the tyres.
111
5
Operating and service instructions

5.1 Read before service or repair work ..................................... 117
5.2 Eco-friendly use and service of the forest machine .............. 118
5.3 Tilting the cabin for service and repairs ............................... 119
5.3.1 Read before starting the job ................................. 119
5.3.2 Releasing the cabin's lock ................................... 120
5.3.3 Tilting the cabin .................................................. 120
5.3.4 Lowering the cabin to a lower position .................. 121
5.3.5 Locking the cabin in a lower position .................... 121
5.4 Electrical tilting of the cabin (optional equipment) ................ 122
5.4.1 Tilting the cabin .................................................. 122
5.4.2 Lowering the cabin to a lower position .................. 122
5.5 Adjustments to middle pivot and frame oscillation lock
(Wisent, Gazelle) .............................................................. 123
5.5.1 Tightening of middle pivot horizontal bearing ........ 123
5.5.2 Frame oscillation lock adjustment ........................ 124
5.6 Oil change ........................................................................ 125
5.6.1 Clean oil to be recovered ..................................... 125
5.6.2 Bogie casings and planetary gears, Gazelle ......... 126
5.6.3 Planetary gears, front and rear bogie ................... 127
5.6.4 Bogie housings, front and rear bogie .................... 128
5.6.5 Differential gear, front bogie ................................. 129
5.6.6 Differential gear, rear bogie ................................. 130
5.6.7 Differential gear, front axle (6w) ........................... 131
5.6.8 Planetary gears, front axle (6w) ........................... 132
5.6.9 Lubricating the bogie pivot ................................... 133
5.6.10 Transfer box ....................................................... 134
5.6.11 Changing the engine oil and filter ......................... 135
5.6.12 Changing the air filter .......................................... 136
5.7 Fuel system ...................................................................... 136

5.7.1 Fuel and hydraulic oil refilling ............................... 136
5.7.1.1 Refilling without the refuelling/refilling pump .......... 136
5.7.1.2 Refilling using the refuelling/refilling pump ............ 137
5.7.2 Fuel refuelling pump (optional equipment) ............ 138
5.7.3 Changing the fuel filters ....................................... 139
5.7.3.1 Fuel pre-filter ...................................................... 139
5.7.3.2 Fuel filter ............................................................ 139
5.7.3.3 Water separator filter ........................................... 140
5.7.4 Bleeding the fuel system ..................................... 141
5.8 Engine control unit (ECU) .................................................. 142
5.9 Poly V-ribbed belt ............................................................. 143
5.10 Bleeding the hydraulic tank's filter casing ............................ 144
5.11 Fine filter system (optional equipment) ............................... 145
5.11.1 Bleed-off filter ..................................................... 145
5.11.2 Dehumidifying air filter ......................................... 145
5.12 Oil sampling in the hydraulic system ................................... 146
5.13 Differential gear lock in bogie axle ...................................... 146
5.14 Differential gear lock in front axle ....................................... 147
5.15 Brake system ................................................................... 147
5.15.1 Operating brake .................................................. 147
5.15.2 Parking brake ..................................................... 147
5.15.3 Working brake .................................................... 148
5.15.4 Releasing the parking brakes manually ................ 149
5.15.5 Setting the parking brakes to be in a driving condi-
tion .................................................................... 150
5.16 Bleeding the brakes .......................................................... 151
5.16.1 Bleeding the working/operating brake (marked in
blue) .................................................................. 152
5.16.2 Bleeding the parking brake (marked in red) .......... 152
5.16.3 Bleeding the brake pedal ..................................... 153
5.17 Washing the machine ........................................................ 153
5.18 Tracks .............................................................................. 154
5.18.1 Snow compaction in tracks .................................. 154
5.18.2 Track tension ...................................................... 155
5.19 Heating and air conditioning equipment .............................. 155
5.19.1 Functioning of air conditioner ............................... 155
5.19.2 Operation of air conditioner ................................. 155
5.19.3 Adjustment ......................................................... 156
5.19.4 Service and checking of air conditioner ................ 157
5.19.5 Cleaning the cooler cell every 50 hrs .................... 158
5.19.6 Fresh air/recirculation filter change every 300
hrs ..................................................................... 158
5.19.7 Scheduled maintenance of the conditioner every
two years ........................................................... 159
5.20 Cabin windows ................................................................. 159
5.20.1 Window fastening ............................................... 159
5.20.2 Window cleaning ................................................ 160
5.20.2.1 Washing windows ............................................... 160
5.20.2.2 Stain removal ..................................................... 161
5.21 PONSSE Opti6 computer .................................................. 162

5.21.1 Computer start/shutdown .................................... 162
5.21.2 Adjusting the display backlight brightness ............. 163
5.21.3 LED functions ..................................................... 163
5.21.3.1 Functioning of Opti6 in low temperatures .............. 164
5.21.3.2 Functioning of Opti6 in high temperatures ............. 164
5.21.3.3 Opti6 operating voltage ....................................... 164
5.21.4 Setting the Opti6 computer ready for welding ........ 164
5.21.5 Opti6 computer's auxiliary equipment ................... 165
5.21.6 Opti6 computer's ports ........................................ 165
5.22 Log gate move .................................................................. 166
5.22.1 Log gate forward/backward ................................. 166
5.22.2 Log gate up/down (optional) ................................ 166
5.23 Bulldozer blade functions (optional equipment) ................... 167
5.24 Variable load space VLA (optional Buffalo, Elk and
Elephant) ......................................................................... 168
5.24.1 Hydraulic load space widening ............................. 168
5.24.2 Mechanical load space widening .......................... 169
5.1 Read before service or repair work

Appropriate operation of a forest machine and its regular
service, and repairs when appropriate, are important factors
as far as its operating costs are concerned. Therefore it is
worthwhile to emphasize the significance and necessity of
regular services. The service work carried out on the
machine, will be returned in multiples as the machine will
retain its resale value, as better operating dependability and
as improved efficiency.
Before service work make yourself familiar with the section

1 Safety instructions.
Always when connecting or removing connectors to/from

OptiControl units, first switch off electricity from the units
(ignition lock to 0 position).
For the duration of the service and repair works turn off Opti,
turn the ignition key to position 0 and switch off the main
117
5.2 Eco-friendly use and service of the

forest machine
Attempt to reduce your machine's environmental load
throughout its service life by following particular care when
handling liquids, such as fuels and lubricants, during servicing
and the machine's removal from use in order to avoid or
minimise their access to the environment.
Any leaks observed during the service life of the machine

must be identified and repaired as soon as possible – not
only to preserve the machine's operational safety and condi-
tion – but also to minimise its impact on the environment.
When removing the machine from use, any waste produced

must always be processed according to the local legislation
and official instructions, preferring recycling whenever pos-
sible.
Pay attention to any environmental hazards caused by the

replacement or servicing of machine components and sys-
tems, or their removal from use. Before commencing work,
make sure that any substances and chemicals hazardous to
the environment, such as the AC refrigerant, have been
appropriately recovered from the system; thus avoiding their
access or entry into the environment.
118
5.3 Tilting the cabin for service and

repairs
5.3.1 Read before starting the job
Tilt the cabin only when the machine is on level ground. Make
sure that there is nobody too close to the cabin when tilting
it.
It is strictly forbidden to go underneath the cabin if the safety

support is not locked.
Make sure that there is nobody too close to the cabin when
lowering it.
Make sure that there is nothing to hinder the lowering of the

cabin. Observe the hoses and electrical wires.
119
Tilt the cabin with the lift pump that can be found in front of
the machine under the engine cover. When tilting the cabin,
use the tools intended for the job: the cabin tool and the
safety support tool. These tools can be found in the machine's
toolbox.
1 Cabin tool
2 Safety support tool
5.3.2 Releasing the cabin's lock
1. Loosen the locking screw (3), lift up the locking plate (4)
and tighten the locking screw (3).
2. Push the cabin tool (1) into the pin hole (5).
3. Turn the pin by 90°.
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 for the other pin.
5.3.3 Tilting the cabin

1. Turn the lift pump valve (7) to the lifting position as
instructed in the sticker.
2. Push the cabin tool into the lift pump hole (8) and pump
the cabin to the desired angle.
3. Turn the lift pump valve (7) to the lowering position and
pump the cabin so that it is supported by the safety
support (6).
The released cabin's lock is presen-
ted in the picture.
3 Locking screw
4 Locking plate
5 Pin
6 Safety support
Due to the design of the cabin tilting hydraulics (the cabin's

tilting cylinder permits free movement of the cabin on rubber
pads while it is in the normal working position), the cabin is
lowered quicker than usual towards the end of the lowering
movement.
Special care must be taken during the final stages of the

lowering movement to make sure that no unnecessary
objects, persons, extremities or other body parts are placed
between the lowering cabin and the machine frame.
CRUSHING HAZARD!
120
5.3.4 Lowering the cabin to a lower position

1. Turn the lift pump valve (7) to the lifting position.
2. Push the cabin tool (1) into the lift pump hole (8) and
pump the cabin up a little until the safety support (6) is
released.
3. Turn the lift pump valve (7) to the lowering position.
4. Release the safety support (6) by keeping the safety
support tool (2) down and, at the same time pumping
the cabin down.
7 Lift the pump valve down/up

8 Lift pump hole
5.3.5 Locking the cabin in a lower position

1. Push the cabin tool (1) into the pin (5) hole.
2. Turn the shaft by 90°.
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 for the other pin.
4. Loosen the locking screws (3), lower the locking plates
2 Safety support tool
6 Safety support (4) down and tighten the locking screws (3) for both pins.
1 Cabin tool
121
5.4 Electrical tilting of the cabin

During electrical tilting of the cabin, the cabin lock is released
and the cabin locked in the lower position in accordance with
instructions given in sections 5.3.2 and 5.3.5.
5.4.1 Tilting the cabin

1. Turn the lift pump valve (7) to the lifting position as
instructed in the sticker.
2. Tilt the cabin by pressing the electrical switch.
3. Turn the lift pump valve (7) to the lowering position and
press the electrical switch to lower the cabin so that it is
supported by the safety support.
Electrical switch for cabin tilting 5.4.2 Lowering the cabin to a lower position
1. Turn the lift pump valve (7) to the lifting position.
2. Press the electrical switch to raise the cabin slightly until
the safety support (6) is released.
3. Turn the lift pump valve (7) to the lowering position.
4. Release the safety support (6) by keeping the safety
support tool (2) down and, at the same time, lowering
the cabin by pressing the electrical switch.
Due to the design of the cabin tilting hydraulics (the cabin's

tilting cylinder permits free movement of the cabin on rubber
pads while it is in the normal working position), the cabin is
lowered quicker than usual towards the end of the lowering
movement.
Special care must be taken during the final stages of the

lowering movement to make sure that no unnecessary
objects, persons, extremities or other body parts are placed
between the lowering cabin and the machine frame.
CRUSHING HAZARD!
122
5.5 Adjustments to middle pivot and

frame oscillation lock (Wisent,
Gazelle)
5.5.1 Tightening of middle pivot horizontal

bearing
1. Drive the machine onto a level surface, so that the
machine's middle pivot is free of tension. Lower the
harvester head/grapple firmly to the ground.
2. Apply the machine's parking brake.
3. Ensure that there are no persons inside the machine's
danger zone.
4. Switch off the machine's engine.
5. Open the last underbody shield of the machine's front
frame.
6. Open the locking for the middle pivot tightening screw
(4).
7. Tightening is performed according to the image with the
help of the tightening tool (2) and wrench extension (1).
8. The nut is tightened to the extent that it is not possible
1 Extension of middle pivot tight-
to see clearance between the front frame and middle
ening wrench
2 Middle pivot tightening tool pivot.
3 Middle pivot tightening nut 9. Lock the nut in place according to the image (4).
4 Locking of tightening nut 10. Close the underbody shield.
Tightening of the first middle pivot is performed after running

the machine for first 200 hours. After this the tightening
interval is 600 hours.
123
5.5.2 Frame oscillation lock adjustment
Finding the right centre of gravity is important; if the grapple

is on the ground, the tightening of frame oscillation lock may
not succeed perfectly.
1. Before tightening the frame oscillation adjustment,

tighten the middle pivot's horizontal bearing according
to the instructions above.
2. Move the crane into a position so that the centre of
gravity is as close to the middle pivot as pos-
sible.Leave the harvester head/grapple slightly above
the ground.
3. Apply the machine's parking brake.
4. Ensure that there are no persons inside the machine's
danger zone.
5. Switch off the machine's engine.
6. Open the pin housing bolts for the frame oscillation lock
on top of the middle pivot (1).
8. Apply the frame oscillation lock. This will pressurize the
frame oscillation lock's pistons (4).
9. Push the frame oscillation lock's pin (2) until it touches
the smaller notched plate (3).
10. Pull the frame oscillation lock's pin 5 mm (2) back
towards the housing.
11. Tighten the housing bolts (1) enough to prevent the pin
from moving.
12. When following these instructions correctly, the frame
oscillation lock will have been adjusted correctly.
1 Fastening bolts for the pin

housing of the frame oscillation
lock
2 Frame oscillation lock's pin
3 Small notched plate
4 Frame oscillation lock's piston
124
5.6 Oil change

Change the oil according to the scheduled maintenance table
in section 6. Oil qualities and quantities are given in section
7.
Before oil change the bogie must not be moved at least for
½ hour so that the impurities have time to settle down to the
bottom of the oil sump.
When changing oil to the bogie casings and planetary gears,

the bogie and axle must be in horizontal position.
The clean oil to be collected can be reused.
If the machine falls over, contact an authorised PONSSE

service immediately. Do not start the engine if the machine
has fallen over.
5.6.1 Clean oil to be recovered

The clean oil to be recovered can be reused according to the
following instructions:
● The bogie must be in a horizontal position.

● Before the oil change, the bogie must not be moved for
at least half an hour so that any impurities have time to
settle at the bottom of the oil sump.
● Change the oil while it is still warm.
● Remove the dirt around the oil drain hole/plug.
● Drain the oil through the topmost oil drain hole of the
bogie housing.
- See the oil change instructions for the bogie hous-
ings.
● Drain the oil into a clean container.
● Drain the residual oil into a separate container.
We recommend changing the oil in connection with every

second oil change.
125
5.6.2 Bogie casings and planetary gears,

Gazelle
1 Oil level in bogie casing and in
planetary gears
2 Differential gear oil drain
3 Planetary gear oil drain
4 Bleed hole for bogie casing and
planetary gear oil drain or oil fill
to planetary gears
5 Inspection hole for bogie casing
and planetary gear oil level
6 Oil drain hole from bogie casing
7 Drain hole for the bogie casing
residual oil
8 Bleed hole for oil drain or fill
hole for planetary gear and
bogie casing
1. Change the oil while it is still warm.

2. Clean the dirt from around the plugs (3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8)
before opening.
3. Turn the planetary gear to position A as shown in the
picture.
4. Open the bogie casing bleed screw 8 as well as the
planetary gear bleed plugs (4).
5. Open the oil drain plugs (6) and drain the oil into a clean
container.
6. Open the oil drain plugs (3) and drain the dirty residual
oil from the planetary gears into a separate container -
position A in the picture.
7. Open the residual oil drain plugs (7) and drain the dirty
residual oil from the bogie casing into a separate con-
tainer.
8. Clean the metallic particles from the plugs equipped with
a magnetic tip (3, 4, 7, 8).
9. Mount the plugs (3, 6 and 7).
10. Turn the planetary gear to position B as shown in the
picture.
11. Fill the bogie casing with oil via the hole (8). If you want
to speed up the procedure, you can first fill the planetary
gears through the hole (4).
12. The oil level must be at the lower edge of the inspection
hole (5).
13. Mount the plugs (4, 8).
126
Tightening torques for plugs

3, 4 = 45 Nm
5, 6, 7, 8 = 70 Nm
5.6.3 Planetary gears, front and rear bogie

Position A Oil draining from planet-
ary gear 3 4
2 Planetary gear oil drain hole
3 Bleeding hole of the planetary
gear A B
Position B Oil filling to planetary 2 5
gear
4 Oil fill hole for the planetary
gear 1. Change the oil when it is still warm.
5 Oil level in the planetary gear 2. Turn the planetary gear to oil drain position A.
3. Clean any dirt off from the surroundings of the plugs (2,
3) before opening them.
4. Open the fill plug of the planetary gear (3), so that air
can enter the housing.
5. Open the oil drain plug (2) and drain the remaining dirty
oil into a separate container.
6. Turn the planetary gear to position B.
7. Fill the planetary gear through the fill hole (4) to the lower
edge of the inspection holes (5) with new oil.
8. Clean the plugs with a magnetic tip (4, 5) and refit them.

2, 3, 4, 5 = 45 Nm
127
5.6.4 Bogie housings, front and rear bogie

1 Oil level in bogie housing 1 4 4 1
4 Oil fill and inspection hole for
bogie housing oil
5 Oil drain hole from bogie hous-
ing
6 Drain hole for the bogie housing
residual oil 5 5
6 6
1. Change the oil when it is still warm.

2. Clean any dirt from the surroundings of the plugs (4, 5,
6) before opening.
3. Open the fill plugs of the bogie housing (4), so that air
can enter the housing.
4. Open the oil drain plugs (5) and drain the oil into a clean
container. The oil can possibly be reused.
5. Open the residual oil drain plugs (6) and drain the
residual oil into a separate container.
6. Clean the plugs with a magnetic tip (6) and refit them.
7. Refit the draining plugs (5).
8. Fill the oil space with new oil through the fill hole (4).
9. Oil quantity is sufficient when the oil level has reached
the hole (4).
10. Refit the plugs (4).

4, 5, 6 = 70 Nm
128
5.6.5 Differential gear, front bogie

2. Clean any dirt from around the plugs (1 and 6) and the
dipstick (3).
3. Open the plugs (1 and 6) and drain the remaining dirty
4 5 4 oil into a container.
4. Clean the plug (1) magnet from metal particles and refit
3 6 it.
5. Fill the oil space with new oil through the fill hose (6).
5 Remove the dipstick before use so that air is drained
from the housing.
6. Check the level of the oil's surface from the dipstick (3).
1 The oil level is sufficient when it is at the upper dipstick
limit (7).
Differential gear oil change, front
bogie 7. Refit the plug (6).
1 Oil drain hole in the differential
gear Tightening torques for plugs
3 Dipstick (Picture 1) 1 = 45 Nm, 6 = 70 Nm
4 Grease nipples in pivot bear-
ings
5 Breather 3
6 Oil fill hose in the differential
gear (Picture 2)
7
Picture 1. Dipstick
7 Upper dipstick limit
Picture 2. Differential gear oil fill, front bogie
129
5.6.6 Differential gear, rear bogie

2. Clean the dirt around the plugs (1 and 6).
3. Open the plugs (1 and 6) and drain the remaining dirty
oil into a container.
4 5 4 4. Clean the plug (1) magnet from metal particles and refit
it.
3 6 5. Fill the oil space through the filling hole (6) to the lower
edge of the hole.
5 6. Check the level of the oil's surface from the dipstick (3).
The oil level is sufficient when it is at the upper dipstick
limit (7).
7. Refit the plug (6).
1
Differential gear oil change, rear Tightening torques for plugs
bogie 1 = 45 Nm, 2 = 70 Nm
1 Oil drain hole in the differential
gear (located in the underbody
protection plate)
3
3 Dipstick (Picture 1)
4 Grease nipples in pivot bear-
ings
5 Breather
6 Oil fill hole in the differential
gear
Picture 1. The dipstick is located under the detachable cover on the rear
7 frame
7 Upper dipstick limit
130
5.6.7 Differential gear, front axle (6w)

2 1. Change the oil when it is still warm.
2. Clean any dirt from around the plugs (1, 2) and the dip-
stick (3).
3 3. Open the plugs (1 and 2) and drain the remaining dirty
4 oil into a container.
4. Clean the plug (1) magnets from metal particles and refit
1 1
them.
5. Fill the oil space with new oil through the fill hose (2).
1 Oil drain Remove the dipstick before use so that air is drained
2 Oil filling (Picture 1) from the housing.
3 Dipstick 6. Check the level of the oil's surface from the dipstick (3).
4 Oil level for differential gear and
7. Refit the plug (2).
axle bracket
1, 2 = 90 Nm
2
Picture 1. Differential gear oil fill, front axle
131
5.6.8 Planetary gears, front axle (6w)

B-B2 B-B1 2 1. Change the oil when it is still warm.
3 4 2. Clean the dirt around the plugs (1, 2).
3. Drain the old oil by turning the planetary gear to position
B-B1 as shown in picture. Remove the plugs (1, 2). First
1 the upper plug (2).
4. Turn the planetary gear to position B-B2 as shown in
B-B1 planetary gear oil drain posi-
picture.
tion
B-B2 planetary gear oil fill and 5. Fill the oil space with new oil through the fill hole (3) until
inspection position the oil level reaches the lower edge of the inspection
hole (4).
6. Refit the plugs (1, 2).

1, 2 = 55 Nm
132
5.6.9 Lubricating the bogie pivot
Before starting the lubrication of bogie pivot bearing seals:

Drive the machine onto a level and even surface, turn off the
engine and ensure that the machine cannot move in any
case.
2
1 Grease nipple
2 Screw
1. Carefully clean away any dirt around the grease nipples

(1) and screw (2) protective plugs.
2. Remove the 4 protective plugs from the pivot.
3. Open only one of the two screws (2). See picture.
4. Press grease with a grease gun through both grease
nipples (1) until grease comes out of the overflow chan-
nel of the opened screw (2).
5. Tighten the opened screw (2).
6. Open the screw (2) on the other side of the pivot bearing
and repeat steps 3 to 5.
7. Attach the protective plugs on the grease nipples (1) and
screws (2).
Remember to grease both pivot bearing seals on both sides

of the bogie axle.
133
5.6.10 Transfer box
4 1. Change the oil when it is still warm.

2. Clean the dirt around the plugs (1, 2, 3) and the dipstick
5 (5).
3. Open the plugs (1, 2, 3) and drain the old oil.
4. Clean the plug with magnetic tip (1) from any metallic
3 particles.
5. Close the plugs (1 and 3).
6. Fill the oil space with new oil through the fill hose (2)
1 until the oil level reaches the upper mark of the dipstick.
1 Oil drain hole 7. Check the level of oil surface from the dipstick (5).
2 Oil fill hose (Picture 1) 8. Refit the plug (2).
3 Oil drain hole (for removal of
spilt oil) Tightening torques for plugs
4 Breather
1, 2, 3 = 53 Nm
5 Dipstick (Picture 2)
2
Picture 1. Oil fill hose, transfer box
Picture 2. Dipstick
134
5.6.11 Changing the engine oil and filter

the Euromot 3B emission limits, familiarise yourself with the
separate Selective Catalytic Reduction, SCR instructions
supplied with the machine.

2. Open the oil filter cover (3), lift the cover slightly and wait
until the filter housing is empty.
3. Remove the filter cartridge (7) and the cover (3). Ensure
that no impurities can enter the filter housing.
4. Place a suitable container under the draining hole plug
of the oil sump. Open the plug carefully and let the oil
drain out of the engine.
5. Replace and lubricate the filter cover rubber seal (6).
6. Install a new oil cartridge to the cover and ensure it is
properly installed.
7. Screw the cover onto the filter housing and tighten.
Tightening torque is 25 Nm.
8. Fit a new seal and refit the draining hole plug back to its
1 Fuel pre-filter
proper place (oil sump). Tighten. Tightening torque is
2 Fuel filter
3 Oil filter (oil filter cover) 80 Nm.
4 Dipstick 9. Add oil through the oil filler neck (5) until the engine oil
5 Oil filling level has reached the max mark on the dipstick (4).
10. Start the engine and let it run idle. Monitor the oil pres-
sure gauge.
11. Let the engine run idle until the oil pressure gauge shows
a reading. If the oil pressure gauge does not show any
pressure within 10 seconds, switch the engine off and
find out the reason.
12. Check the filter (3) and the oil draining hole in the oil
sump for leaks.
6 Seal 13. Switch off the engine. Recheck the oil level after
7 Filter cartridge approximately five minutes. Add oil, if needed, to the
max mark of the dipstick.
135
5.6.12 Changing the air filter

1. Open the cover (1).
2. Pull the main cartridge out (2) from the housing.
3. Pull the safety cartridge (3) away. Replace it with a new
one and install it.
4. Change the main cartridge (2) and install it.
5. Close the cover (1).
1 Cover 5.7 Fuel system

2 Main cartridge
3 Safety cartridge
5.7.1 Fuel and hydraulic oil refilling

Refilling points for fuel and hydraulic oil are located by their
specific tanks.
When refilling hydraulic oil in cold conditions, the use of the

hydraulic system vacuum pump improves the oil flow, making
refilling quicker.
5.7.1.1 Refilling without the refuelling/refilling pump
Refilling fuel
1. Turn open the fuel tank plug.

2. Place the refilling nozzle into the refilling hole and start
refilling.
3. Refilling stops automatically when the tank is full if the
refilling nozzle is equipped with an automatic refilling
stoppage function.
4. Close the fuel tank plug.
Refilling hydraulic oil
1. Open the hydraulic oil tank's protective cover.

2. Connect the hydraulic oil hose to the quick release
coupling located on top of the hydraulic tank return filter
cover. Please note: Do not open the cover.
3. Check the oil level through the sight gauge when refilling.
Refill until the oil level reaches the top of the sight gauge.
4. Remove the hose and clean the quick release coupling.
136
5.7.1.2 Refilling using the refuelling/refilling pump
Refilling fuel
1. Connect the refilling hose to the vacuum pump's quick

release coupling. Clean the strainer next to the quick
release coupling regularly (see Section 5.7.2).
2. Start the fuel feed by pressing the electric switch's
START button located on the side of the refuelling pump.
3. The pump stops refilling automatically when the tank is
full. If required, the refuelling pump can be stopped by
pressing the electric switch's STOP button.
4. Remove the hose and clean the refilling pump's quick
release coupling.
Fuel may flow out of the plug before the upper limit sensor
stops the refilling if the machine is not level when refilling or
if a highly-foaming fuel is used.
Refilling hydraulic oil
1. Connect the hydraulic oil refilling hose to the refilling

pump's quick release coupling.
2. Start the hydraulic oil feed by pressing the electric
switch's START button located on the side of the refilling
pump.
3. The pump stops refilling automatically when the oil level
has reached the sight gauge's upper limit.
4. Check the hydraulic oil level through the sight gauge
when refilling. If required, the refuelling pump can be
stopped by pressing the electric switch's STOP button.
5. Remove the hose and clean the refilling pump's quick
release coupling.
Pay attention to the cylinder position (crane/loader in partic-

ular). Refill when the cylinders are inside (the cylinder piston
has reached its limit and the cylinder shaft is barely visible).
137
5.7.2 Fuel refuelling pump (optional

equipment)
The strainer in the refuelling pump quick coupling prevents
dirt from entering the refuelling pump. Regular cleaning of
the refuelling pump's strainer affects the operation of the
pump.
1. Open the cover (1) of the refuelling pump strainer.

2. Pull out the strainer (2) and remove the dirt for example
by means of pressurised air. When cleaning the quick
coupling, make sure that direction leading away from
the strainer is protected from dirt.
3. Set the strainer (2) in place and close the cover (1).
1 Cover
2 Refuelling pump strainer
When refuelling in dirty conditions, the refuelling pump

strainer must be cleaned more often.
138
5.7.3 Changing the fuel filters
5.7.3.1 Fuel pre-filter
Service comprises cleaning or changing

1. Clean the surroundings of the pre-filter and protect the
nearby hoses and pipes.
2. Open the filter cover (1). Clean the cover and the filter
cartridge (2). If the filter cartridge is dirty or damaged,
replace it with a new one.
3. Check the seal (4) and replace if needed.
4. Place the filter cartridge (2) on the filter cover (1) and
place the cover on the filter housing (3). Tighten the
cover. Tightening torque is 25 Nm (0.7 lbf-ft).
1 Cover
2 Filter cartridge
3 Filter housing 5.7.3.2 Fuel filter
4 Seal
When servicing the fuel filter, you can cut off the fuel supply
with the fuel shut-off tap (13, see figure in Section 5.7.3.3)
in the water separator. The draining valve (5) and the draining
hose (6) are located on the right hand side of the engine.
The service is carried out via the underbody shield.
Draining valve open
1. Open the underbody shield.
2. Place a container under the draining hose.
3. Open the fuel line draining valve.
4. Open the filter cover (7) and lift it slightly.
5. Let the fuel drain into the vessel. This prevents possible
dirt on the edges of the filter entering into the filter
Draining valve closed housing (11).
a Return hose from the engine
b To the fuel tank
5 Draining valve
6 Draining hose
139
Service comprises filter cartridge change:

1. Open the cover (7). Clean the cover and the sediment
bowl (8).
2. Change and lubricate the O-ring (9).
3. Change the filter cartridge (10).
4. Refit the sediment bowl, the filter cartridge and the seal.
5. Leave the cover (7) a few turns open.
6. Fill the filter housing with fuel by pumping the water
7 Cap separator's bleed pump until fuel starts to seep between
8 Sediment bowl
the threads.
9 O-ring
10 Filter cartridge 7. Tighten the cover. Tightening torque is 25 Nm (0.7 lbf-
11 Filter housing ft).
Note! Remember to close the draining valve (5) and open

the fuel shut-off tap (13) when the service is finished.
When the filters have been changed, bleed the system by

using the pump in the water separator. Press the bleed pump
push button (12) until the button becomes stiff.
5.7.3.3 Water separator filter
The water separator filter (14) is changed at the same time

as the fuel filter. If water collects in the water separator metal
bowl (15), drain the bowl via the water draining tap (16).
12 Bleeding pump push button

13 Fuel shut-off tap
14 Water separator filter
15 Bowl
16 Water draining tap
140
5.7.4 Bleeding the fuel system
Do not bleed the fuel system when the engine is hot. Beware
of high-pressure liquid leaks when working close to the
engine.
DO NOT USE THE STARTER MOTOR TO BLEED THE

FUEL SYSTEM. This can damage the starter motor.
Usually, the fuel system bleeds itself automatically. Neverthe-

less, execute the bleeding procedure if:
1. You have run out of fuel while still working.
2. Injection pipes have been disconnected.
3. They haven't been filled with fuel when changing the fil-
ters. Check the instructions on filling the fuel filter in
Section 5 Fuel filter.
4. There has been a leak in the fuel pipes.
12 Bleeding pump push button

13 Fuel shut-off tap
14 Water separator filter
15 Bowl
16 Water draining tap
Bleeding the fuel system:

1. Lift the machine's cabin up.
2. Remove the engine cover on top of the motor's injection
pipes as shown in Picture 2.
3. Loosen all injection pipe nuts as shown in Picture 3.
4. Bleed the system by pumping the water separator's
bleeding pump push button (12) until only fuel comes
out of the injection pipes.
5. Close the injection pipe nuts you opened earlier.
6. Bleeding is now complete.
Picture 2. Removing the engine 7. Start the engine.
cover 8. If the engine does not start, contact an authorised
PONSSE service.
Do not try to start the engine for more than 30 seconds.

Exceeding 30 seconds can damage the starter motor.
141
Picture 3. Loosening the injection pipe nuts
5.8 Engine control unit (ECU)

Engine control unit (ECU) connectors (2 and 3) must not be
removed when the main current is switched ON.
1 Engine
2 Engine control unit (ECU) con-
nector from the engine to the
ECU 1
3 Engine control unit (ECU) con-
nector from the ECU to the VCU
142
5.9 Poly V-ribbed belt

1 Alternator
2 Guide roller
3 Water pump
4 Crankshaft
5 Tightening roller
6 Air conditioning compressor
Checking the condition of the poly V-ribbed belt:
● Check the condition of the poly V-ribbed belt regularly.

● Replace the belt if it is in a poor condition. The belt may
operate poorly if it is incorrectly installed, worn, torn,
frayed or dirty.
● Before replacing the poly V-ribbed belt, contact an
authorised PONSSE service for more detailed replace-
ment instructions.
The engine may overheat if the poly V-ribbed belt operates

incorrectly. In that case, the belt does not rotate the cooling
pump or alternator.
A poly V-ribbed belt in a poor condition may be torn, and the

entire belt or parts of it may come off the engine and cause
damage to those in the vicinity.
143
5.10 Bleeding the hydraulic tank's filter

casing
The filter casing should always be bled after replacing the
return filter and in situations where the hydraulic tank has
fully drained of oil. Bleeding has a significant effect on the
operation of hydraulic system components.
1. Open the hydraulic oil tank's protective cover. Make sure

that the hydraulic tank contains the required amount of
oil.
2. Start the engine and let it run idle.
3. Connect a hose suitable for bleeding (delivered with the
machine) to the bleeding valve (1). Make sure that the
bleeding valve is closed.
4. Open the bleeding valve.
5. Move a loader/crane function, e.g. extension out/in, and
drain oil into a vessel until no air comes out of the
1 Filter casing bleeding valve bleeding valve and the oil is clear.
6. Close the valve, remove the bleeding hose and close
the hydraulic oil tank's protective cover.
144
5.11 Fine filter system (optional equipment)
5.11.1 Bleed-off filter

Replacing the filter element:
2 3 1. Make sure that the filter is not pressurised (pressure =
0 bar/PSI).
2. Open the filter housing (1) cover (2) by rotating it.
1 3. Remove the filter cartridge (3).
4. Place a new cartridge into the filter housing with the end
with green silicone first.
5. Replace the cover's o-ring and turn the cover back in its
place.
6. Tighten the cover by hand.
4 ● Replace the filter cartridge every six months or every

1,200 operating hours, or when the differential pressure
RMF bleed-off filter gauge (4) suggests that replacing the cartridge is
1 Filter housing necessary. Replacing the cartridge will soon be neces-
2 Cover sary when the differential pressure gauge approaches
3 Filter cartridge 5.5 bar (79.8 PSI), i.e. the yellow zone. Replace the
4 Differential pressure gauge
cartridge when the pressure increases to 6.2 bar (89.9
PSI, the red zone) under the regular operating temperat-
ure.
● Higher differential pressure is normal during start-up
(when the hydraulic fluid is cold).
If the filter cartridge has not been replaced for a long time,
the cartridge may soften and partially disintegrate. This will
decrease the differential pressure over the cartridge.
5.11.2 Dehumidifying air filter

When the filter absorbs humidity, the colour of the gel gran-
ules changes.
● Replace the filter every 1,200 operating hours or when

the gel granules are orange.
Replace Active
RMF air filter
145
5.12 Oil sampling in the hydraulic

system
An oil sample can be taken from the machine's hydraulic
system, if required. The sampling point is located in the
equipment rack and is furnished with an orange Sample drain
plate.
The condition of hydraulic oil and the hydraulic system can

be evaluated by taking oil samples regularly and analysing
them thoroughly. The oil analysis improves the conditions
Oil sampling point for preventive machine maintenance.
Contact an authorized PONSSE service.
5.13 Differential gear lock in bogie axle

Due to the straight cut teeth of the lock clutch, the clutch on
and off coupling must only be done when the machine is
standing still. If the buzzer sound of the differential lock on
coupling is not given immediately, move the machine a little
so that the teeth will engage. If there is tension between the
axle, it might be that the lock will not open when uncoupling.
By turning the machine a little the tension is released and
the lock is opened. If there are faults in buzzer, the differential
lock must not be used before the faults have been inspected
and repaired.
The lock is meant to be used only in situations where the

other side is slipping, when the other tire meets for example
ice, and it is not possible to get out of the situation otherwise.
When the differential lock is on, the machine must not be

turned.
Using the differential lock in normal drive and especially when

turning over-stresses the axles.
Differential locks are not automatic, the driver will need to

appraise the usage situations.
Warranty does not cover damages caused by differential

locks used incorrectly.
146
5.14 Differential gear lock in front axle

There is a differential lock also in the front axle which can be
coupled on together with the differential lock in rear bogie,
or it can be released separately.
Warranty does not cover damages caused by differential

locks used incorrectly.
5.15 Brake system

The system contains an operating brake, a parking brake
and a working brake. Each of the brakes is controlled
hydraulically.
If the system oil pressure falls below 9 MPa (1305 PSI), the
system will sound an alarm buzzer. In this case the fault must
be repaired immediately. The machine has an automatic
charging system of the brake circuit. Charging pressure is
approx. 12–16 MPa (1740–2320 PSI).
System contains three pressure accumulators for the operat-

ing brakes. Integrated pressure lowering valve regulates the
operating brake cylinder pressures.
Checking of the brake cylinder and its adjustment is best left

for authorised PONSSE service to do. When acting incorrectly
you risk your life.
5.15.1 Operating brake

There are hydraulic multi-disc brakes in the bogie axles, front
and rear. The operating brake is used from the cabin using
the brake pedals. There are two pedals.
5.15.2 Parking brake

Spring-loaded multi-plate brakes immersed in oil are located
at the front and rear. They are released hydraulically. The
parking brake is used from the cabin with the parking brake
switch. The parking brake is switched on when the current
is disconnected from the machine or the pressure is lowered
below 1.8 MPa (261 PSI). When driving, the current is ON
147
in the parking brake valve, thus the hydraulic pressure keeps

the brake released.
If the engine shuts off while working, switch on the parking

brake before starting.
5.15.3 Working brake

Working brake uses the hydraulic pressure of the brake
system.
It affects both the front and rear wheels, the drive gear is
released at the same time when the brake is switched on.
Pressing the gas pedal releases the brake, and on the other
hand, releasing the gas pedal switches the brake on.
148
5.15.4 Releasing the parking brakes manually
1
3
4
3
4
2
1 Protective cover 3 Screw

2 Spring washer 4 Nut
1 4 2 3 1. Ensure that the machine remains stationary.

2. Front frame: Open the underbody protection plate from
underneath the bogie.
Rear frame, harvesters: Open the underbody protection
plate from underneath the bogie.
Rear frame, forwarders: Open the service hatch on top
of the bogie.
3. Open the protective cover (1). Note the parts inside the
cover (Picture 1).
4. Set the spring washer (2) into place.
Picture 1. Parts inside the cover
5. Turn the screw (3) into place using an Allen key.
6. Turn the nut (4) into place.
7. Hold the screw (3) in place with an Allen key and tighten
the nut (4) using a combination spanner until it bottoms.
8. Attach the protective cover (1). Tighten it to max. 30 Nm.
9. Attach the underbody protection plate / service hatch.
Combination spanner 19 mm, Allen key 6 mm.
The machine now has no brakes.
149
5.15.5 Setting the parking brakes to be in a

driving condition
4
1
3 2
4
1 Protective cover 3 Screw

2 Spring washer 4 Nut
1 4 2 3 1. Ensure that the machine remains stationary.

2. Front frame: Open the underbody protection plate from
underneath the bogie.
Rear frame, harvesters: Open the underbody protection
plate from underneath the bogie.
Rear frame, forwarders: Open the service hatch on top
of the bogie.
3. Open the protective cover (1).
4. Hold the screw (3) in place with an Allen key and open
the nut (4) using a combination spanner.
Picture 1. Parts inside the cover
5. Remove the spring washer (2) and the screw (3).
6. Place the spring washer (2), screw (3) and nut (4) inside
the cover as shown in Picture 1.
7. Attach the protective cover (1). Tighten it to max.30 Nm.
8. Attach the underbody protection plate / service hatch.
Combination spanner 19 mm, Allen key 6 mm.
150
5.16 Bleeding the brakes

If air has entered the brake system, the braking efficiency is
weak since the air will cause springing in the brakelines. Then
bleeding of the brakes must be carried out. For bleeding there
are bleed screws in the brake cylinders of the front and rear
axles.
Use safety goggles during brake bleeding as there is pressure

in the brake lines.
Do not open the bleed screws more than has been instructed
in the instruction.
Apply the parking brake when you are bleeding the working
brakes.
Apply the working brake brake when you are bleeding the
parking brakes.
Only use a hose intended for bleeding, such as a hose with

a valve. An open hose is not suitable for bleeding because
the pressure at the measurement point may be as high as
60 bar.
Bleeding hoses with valves are available at the Ponsse ser-

vice part shop.
151
5.16.1 Bleeding the working/operating brake

(marked in blue)
1. Open the underbody protection plate below the engine
from the front of the front bogie/front axle.
2. Remove the measurement point's (1) protective plug.
3. Connect a hose suitable for bleeding to the measurement
point. Make sure that the hose valve is closed.
4. Apply the parking brake.
6. Open the bleeding hose valve slowly and bleed about
2 dl of oil into a vessel.
7. Close the valve and switch off the engine.
8. Disconnect the hose and attach the measurement point's
protective plug.
9. Open the service hatch on top of the rear bogie. Perform
the aforementioned actions for the rear bogie's measure-
ment points.
10. Refit the protective plug, and fasten the underbody shield
and the service hatch.
Picture: service hatch of the rear
bogie
1 Measurement point for the
working brake (in blue) 5.16.2 Bleeding the parking brake (marked in
2 Measurement point for the red)
parking brake (in red)
1. Open the underbody protection plate below the engine
from the front of the front bogie/front axle.
2. Remove the measurement point's (2) protective plug.
3. Connect a hose suitable for bleeding to the measurement
point. Make sure that the hose valve is closed.
5. Release the parking brake.
6. Open the bleeding hose valve slowly and bleed about
2 dl of oil into a vessel.
7. Close the valve and switch off the engine.
8. Disconnect the hose and attach the measurement point's
protective plug.
9. Open the service hatch on top of the rear bogie. Perform
the aforementioned actions for the rear bogie's measure-
ment points.
10. Refit the protective plug, and fasten the underbody shield
and the service hatch.
152
5.16.3 Bleeding the brake pedal

1. Tilt the cabin to the service position.
2. Remove the bleed screw's (3) protective plug.
3. Place a suitable protective hose on the bleed screw (3)
so that pressurized oil does not spill on you.
6. Open the bleed screw (3) by approximately ¼ of a turn.
1 Accelerator 7. When no more air comes out from the bleed screw, close
2 Brake pedal (operating brake) the screw and shut off the engine.
3 Bleed screw on the brake pedal
cylinder
8. Remove the electrical connector of the working brake's

directional valve (5).
5
9. Open the bleed screw (3) by approximately ¼ of a turn.
10. Ensure that the parking brake is applied.
12. Press the brake pedal (2) several times until no more
air comes out of the bleed screw.
13. Close the bleed screw (3).
14. Fasten the electrical connector of the working brake's
directional valve (5).
15. Switch off the engine.
5.17 Washing the machine

Hydraulic block 3
First, remove any larger debris by hand. Only wash surfaces
5 Electrical connector for the that are dirty. Do not use any substances that damage the
working brake's directional machine surfaces while washing it.
valve
Pay attention to the following instructions when using a
pressure washer or another washer which produces a
powerful water/steam jet:
● Do not direct the jet directly at electrical devices or con-

nectors, modules, dipsticks, cable connectors or joints.
- Connectors do not prevent water from passing
inside the machine. Inside connectors, water may
cause corrosion and electrical failures.
● Do not direct the pressure washer jet directly at or too
close to the engine parts. Keep a distance of at least 70
cm between the pressure washer nozzle and engine
parts.
153
Also note when washing the machine around stickers using

a pressure washer:
● The maximum water temperature is 50 °C.
● The maximum pressure is 120 bar.
● Maintain a distance of at least 100 cm between the
nozzle and sticker.
● Direct the jet straight at or at a maximum angle of 45 °
to the surface of the sticker.
If the machine has an extinguishing system as optional

equipment:
● Remove the extinguishing system fuse. (Heat sensors
trigger at a temperature of 120 °C.) See section Electrical
system for the exact location of the fuse.
Avoid electrical devices and connectors, modules, dipsticks,

cable connectors and joints. Do not direct the pressure
washer jet directly at or too close to the engine catalyst.
Do not climb on top of the machine when washing. Risk of

slipping.
5.18 Tracks
5.18.1 Snow compaction in tracks

During the winter period, there is a possibility of snow com-
paction inside the track cross-sections. This may create ten-
sion in the tracks and consequently cause serious mechanical
damage to the drive bogie. This phenomenon is most likely
to occur when the temperature is increases, resulting in wet
and sticky snow conditions, followed by cold temperature, or
in heavy snow accumulation (1 meter (3.3ft) or more). The
use of a brand new track with a coat of paint or unpolished
surface will strongly increase the risk of occurrence of this
phenomenon. In winter use unpainted tracks.
We recommend that the tracks are used for a period of 300

to 500 hours before snow accumulation to polish the inside
cross-sections. This will reduce the chance of snow compac-
tion.
In heavy snow conditions, we recommend that tracks with a

narrow cross-section are used.
154
5.18.2 Track tension

Use a track type suitable for the wheel model and size.
There must be a sufficient clearance between the tracks and

the machine, and the tracks must be tightened properly.
Follow the track manufacturer's instructions when tightening

the tracks.
Incorrectly tightened tracks may cause damage to the

machine.
Make sure that no-one is too close to the tracks when tight-
ening them.
5.19 Heating and air conditioning

equipment
5.19.1 Functioning of air conditioner

Refrigerant circulates in the system under pressure. Circula-
tion starts from the compressor which presses the vaporized
refrigerant to the evaporator. Air which flows through the
evaporator binds the heat from the refrigerant, which then
changes into fluid. Refrigerant then continues to the fluid
reservoir where it is dried and cleaned. From here the refri-
gerant continues to the expansion valve, which regulates the
amount of refrigerant going to the vaporization honeycomb.
After the expansion valve low pressure follows. In the
vaporization honeycomb the refrigerant will be vaporized and
then it absorbs heat from the warm air flowing through the
honeycomb and consequently the cabin temperature will be
lowered. The compressor sucks warm air from the honey-
comb and presses it thereafter through the evaporator for
recirculation.
5.19.2 Operation of air conditioner

Cabin inside temperature is controlled by the adjuster. The
adjustment range is 18–28°C (64–82°F). To achieve the
temperature selected, the regulating system either controls
the water valve (heating) or, when the air conditioning is
155
switched on, the air conditioning compressor. The system is

so called semi-automatic, as the driver has to switch the air
conditioning on and off.
When the diesel fired auxiliary heater is started, the water

valve will be opened fully, independent of the heating adjuster
position.
The defroster function switches on simultaneously the heating

and cooling as well as the maximum blower speed. Then the
system removes humidity from the cabin effectively.
The escape air hatch is above the rear side window, on the
left hand side of the cabin.
5.19.3 Adjustment
In warm weather
1. Select internal circulation (5).
2. Switch on the air conditioning (1).
3. Adjust the temperature (4).
In moist weather or when there is water vapour on the

1 Air conditioner operating switch windscreen
ON/OFF 1. Switch on defrosting (2).
2 Defrosting switch ON/OFF
2. Select fresh air (5).
3 Fan speed adjustment
4 Temperature adjustment 3. When water vapour has disappeared, switch off
5 Fresh air/inside air circulation defrosting (2) and adjust the temperature (4) to such a
ON/OFF position where air conditioning is switched on and off at
Internal circulation regular intervals. This prevents the freezing of the
Fresh air vaporization honeycomb.
4. Switch off the air conditioning (1).
In the winter during cold weather

1. Select fresh air (5).
2. Adjust the temperature (4).
Maximum efficiency is obtained in about one hour from

switching the air conditioner on.
In winter the air conditioner can be used simultaneously with

the heater for defrosting. In the internal circulation function
the unit circulates the cabin air and takes only the required
amount of air from outside. In the fresh air position most of
the air comes from outside through the filter. Do not direct
cooled air directly on your body.
156
Do not cover the indoor air circulation of the air conditioner.
Operate the air conditioner also in winter at least once a week

for about 5 minutes. In this way the compressor will stay
lubricated and the moving parts stay clean and will not
become oxidized. The use may only take place when both
the engine and the cabin are warm.
5.19.4 Service and checking of air conditioner
The scheduled maintenance and repairs of the air conditioner

may be carried out only by an authorised PONSSE service.
The system has been filled with R-134a refrigerant; any other
types of refrigerants may not be used.
The air conditioner contains pressurized refrigerant. Do not

remove the unit hoses. Outflowing gas can be harmful.
Leaked fluid has a low temperature. It will vaporize quickly.
Warming up the liquid container will cause rising of the gas

pressure and a risk of explosion. In case of a fire, cool the
liquid container with water or use the portable fire extin-
guisher.
Gas is colourless and spreads at ground level.
Gas will suffocate without any warning symptoms.
Refrigerant dissolves, when burning, into poisonous gases.
Spilling fluid on the skin will cause frost bite and serious injury
to the eyes.
The system must not be used if there is suspicion of refriger-

ant leak or other technical fault. Use can cause compressor
damage.
If any oil sprays or flows on the oil compressor belt pulley,

the clutch may slip or even be damaged.
Service the unit weekly from spring until autumn and always
when the unit is used for removing humidity for longer peri-
ods.
157
Keep the evaporator clean. A clean evaporator operates

efficiently and the air in the cabin stays pleasantly cool. The
evaporator is situated in front of the radiator.
Ensure that the refrigerant hoses do not make contact with

sharp edges or hot surfaces.
If the hoses must be removed or the air conditioner needs

to be serviced, contact an authorised PONSSE service.
Never remove hose clamps, except in an emergency situ-

ation, as the system is pressurized and incorrect handling
can lead to personal injuries. When opening hose clamps,
refrigerant and oil will flow out of the system and the com-
pressor is in danger of becoming damaged. Also, dampness
will enter the system, which will damage the components.
5.19.5 Cleaning the cooler cell every 50 hrs

Clean the cooler cell lamellas with a soft brush. In addition,
the lamellas can be cleaned using pressurized air by blowing
air against the flow direction gently enough not to fold the
lamellas. Clean any possible dust from the compressor
magnetic clutch.
When working in dusty conditions, the gap for cleaning the

cooler cell is tighter.
5.19.6 Fresh air/recirculation filter change

every 300 hrs
Check and, if necessary, change or clean the fresh air filter
that can be found under the side pontoon. Clean carefully by
blowing pressurized air against the flow direction.
Check and, if necessary, change or clean the recirculation

filter that can be found inside the cabin. Clean the same way
as the fresh air filter.
158
5.19.7 Scheduled maintenance of the

conditioner every two years
5. The scheduled maintenance of the air conditioner may be

carried out only by an authorised PONSSE service.
The service is important because:

- Some refrigerant leaks all the time out of the system,
e.g. through hoses.
- Too small an amount of refrigerant does not cool the
cabin enough and it does not circulate the lubricant in
the system.
- Moisture condensates in the system and causes, for
example, rust.
The service includes, for example

● Removing refrigerant from the system
● Changing the dryer
● Refilling the refrigerant and oil
● Checking the amount of refrigerant
● Checking refrigerant leaks
● Checking air conditioner functioning
5.20 Cabin windows

Check all windows and their fastenings every day and
immediately after there is any strong impact directed to them.
5.20.1 Window fastening

The majority of the cabin frame rigidity rests on windows and,
consequently, on the adhesive bonding. A poorly fitted or
cracked window cannot withstand the load exerted on it if
the machine should turn over, for example. This is why it is
very important to monitor the condition of the windows and
the adhesive bonding. The window has to be replaced and/or
the adhesive bonding reapplied if any cracks appear on the
window or if the adhesive bonding has been detached (e.g.
visible water infiltration). The adhesive bonding cannot be
replaced with, for example, rubber seals and mouldings.
If the window is damaged or the adhesive bonding is

detached, contact an authorised PONSSE service.
159
5.20.2 Window cleaning

All cabin windows are made of a hard polycarbonate sheet.
For washing polycarbonate windows, we recommend that
only a window washing liquid which is furnished with the
PONSSE label, and has been tested and verified to be
compatible and functional with PONSSE machines is used.
Washing agents incompatible with polycarbonate windows

may cause cracks on the window and, therefore, reduce
cabin safety.
Never use
● toluene, benzene, petrol, acetone, thinner, turpentine or
carbon tetrachloride
● abrasive or highly alkaline washing agents
● a brush, steel wool or other abrasive materials
● a rubber spatula, razor blade or other sharp objects.
We do not recommend the use of a steam washer.
Do not use a pressure washer at a short distance. The use

of additives should be avoided when using a pressure
washer.
Do not clean or wash the windows when exposed directly to

the sun or at high temperatures.
The warranty does not compensate for any damage resulting

from the use of products that damage polycarbonate win-
dows.
5.20.2.1 Washing windows
1. Rinse the window thoroughly using lukewarm water.

2. Wash the window gently using a piece of soft cloth, a
sponge made of cellulose or chamois and a window
washing agent mixed with lukewarm water (PONSSE
window washing agent recommended). Do not chafe or
use a brush or rubber spatula.
3. Rinse the window thoroughly using lukewarm water.
4. Dry the window using a piece of moist and soft cloth, a
sponge made of cellulose or chamois in order to remove
all water from the window.
160
Take care not to slip when working on top of the machine.

Wear boots with rubber soles.
5.20.2.2 Stain removal
Remove any colour, grease, oil, resin, etc. stains immediately

using a soft rag and an approved solvent. Wash the window
after stain removal according to the instructions above.
Solvents approved for use at room temperature include: butyl

glycol, heptane, hexane, petroleum ether.
161
5.21 PONSSE Opti6 computer
Opti6 computer
In PONSSE Opti6, the PC is integrated inside the display

unit. The Opti6 computer contains a touch screen.
5.21.1 Computer start/shutdown

The Opti6 computer's Start/Shutdown button is located at
the bottom display panel.
● Start the computer by pressing the Start/Shutdown but-

ton for 0.5 seconds.
● Shut down the computer by pressing the Start/Shutdown
button for 3 seconds.
● The shutdown logic is active once the operating system
has been started. Separate company-specific programs
must be closed manually.
Remember to save all unsaved files before you shut

down the computer.
Always shut down the Opti6 computer using the Start/Shut-

down button before you switch off the forest machine's main
162
5.21.2 Adjusting the display backlight

brightness
Automatic backlight adjustment:
● The computer adjusts backlight brightness automatically

according to illuminance. The sensor is located at the
bottom display panel next to the green LED.
● The rate of adjustment is approx. 30 seconds from 20%
to 100%.
Manual backlight adjustment:
● Select between the automatic/manual function by

pressing the Start/Shutdown button once.
● Backlight brightness can be adjusted on the following
scale: automatic -> 100% -> 80% -> 60% -> 40% -> 20%
-> 0% -> automatic, etc.
In the 0% mode, the touch screen is disabled and can be

cleaned.
5.21.3 LED functions

The Opti6 computer's LED is located at the bottom display
panel.
LED functions
LED Function
LED continuously on. Opti6 is running.
LED blinks. Opti6 is in heating mode.
LED blinks twice – Inner temperature is more than 85 ºC.
break – blinks twice, The computer is in the cooling mode.
etc. Opti6 does not start.
LED blinks 3 times – Operating voltage is under 10.5 V.
break – blinks 3 times, Opti6 does not start.
etc.
LED blinks 4 times – Internal fault, an error found during the
break – blinks 4 times, program check. Opti6 does not start.
etc.
If necessary, contact an authorized PONSSE service.
163
5.21.3.1 Functioning of Opti6 in low temperatures
The Opti6 computer contains automatic heating.
● The LED blinks when the computer is in the heating

mode.
● The maximum heating time is 10 minutes, allowing the
computer to be started quickly. The computer's start-up
temperature is 0 ºC. The heating is not on when Opti6
is running.
● The fuel heater starts the computer's pre-heating.
5.21.3.2 Functioning of Opti6 in high temperatures
● The LED indicates overheating by blinking twice.

● The computer does not start if its inner temperature
exceeds 85 ºC upon start-up.
● The computer shuts down in a controlled way if its inner
temperature is more than 85 ºC for 20 seconds.
5.21.3.3 Opti6 operating voltage
● The LED indicates a voltage error by blinking 3 times.

● The computer's operating voltage range is 12 V – 24 V.
● The computer monitors the operating voltage continu-
ously and shuts down in a controlled way if the operating
voltage is less than 10.5 V for 20 seconds.
5.21.4 Setting the Opti6 computer ready for

welding
See the Safety instructions section for other measures to be

performed before and after welding.
1. Detach measuring calipers from the docking station.

2. Disconnect the USB cable from the printer.
3. Disconnect the antenna cable from the data transfer
modem.
Disconnect the cables from the auxiliary equipment only. Do

not disconnect the cables from the computer.
164
5.21.5 Opti6 computer's auxiliary equipment

● Data transfer modem
● Printer
● Mouse
● Keyboard
● Measuring callipers
Data transfer modem
● USB port (on the right side of the display)
● Reversing camera
● GPS antenna
GPS antenna
5.21.6 Opti6 computer's ports
1 2 3 6 8 9 11 13 15
4 5 7 10 12 14
1 Ethernet 10M/100Mbit/s
2 CAN 1 & 2
3 Video / Audio / I/O
4 Flash card slot
5 Power + WakeUp1-input
6 USB-A, USB 2.0
7 USB-A, USB 2.0
8 Handset RJ-11, Audio/Mic
9 USB-A, USB 2.0 (for a USB keyboard)
10 USB-A, USB 2.0
11 Primary SIM card slot
12 Secondary SIM card slot
13 Antenna port, WLAN/Bluetooth equipment
14 GPRS/EDGE/UMTS antenna
15 GPS antenna
165
5.22 Log gate move

Observe special caution when moving the log gate. Never
move the log gate when there are people or obstacles within
the machine danger zone, or when there are logs inside the
load space.
Align the logs against the log gate by using the loader, not
by moving the log gate.
5.22.1 Log gate forward/backward

Move the log gate when the load space is empty.
51 Log gate control switch:

● Log gate forward/backward
51
5.22.2 Log gate up/down (optional)
If the machine is equipped with both log gate forward/back-
ward and log gate up/down (optional), the log gate control
operates according to the position of the log gate direction
selection switch (31).
31 Log gate direction selection switch (optional)
51 Log gate control switch:

● Log gate forward/backward or
● Log gate up/down (optional)
31
Move the log gate when the load space is empty.
166
5.23 Bulldozer blade functions (optional

equipment)
Bulldozer blade functions include up/down control and float-
ing.
In both functions, the loader control switch (29) and bulldozer

blade activation switch (57) must be on. In this way, the luffing
boom and extension will be disabled.
The left control handle movements (3) and (4) control the
bulldozer blade up/down, and the movement (2) control
29 bulldozer blade floating.
29 Loader control switch ON/OFF
Setting the bulldozer blade to floating and releasing the
floating function:
2
1. Make sure that the loader control switch (29) and bull-
L R
dozer blade activation switch (57) are on.
2. Control the bulldozer blade down using the control
handle movement (3) and, at the same time, keep the
bulldozer blade floating function (2) pressed. When
floating is activated, a symbol indicating floating will be
displayed on the computer screen.
57 3. Keep the bulldozer blade floating function (2) pressed
throughout floating.
4. Release the bulldozer blade floating function (2) to dis-
L Left control handle able the floating control.
57 Bulldozer blade activation

switch
Bulldozer blade is not activated
Bulldozer blade is activated
When the bulldozer blade is
activated:
2 Bulldozer blade floating
3 Bulldozer blade down
4 Bulldozer blade up
167
5.24 Variable load space VLA (optional

Buffalo, Elk and Elephant)
Take special care when modifying the load space. Never
modify the load space when there are people or obstacles
within the machine danger zone, or when there are logs
inside the load space.
The load space must be in the narrow position without any

load or when driving pulp wood. The load space can be
widened when driving energy wood, or if the load's centre of
gravity is to be kept as low as possible.
Always use extreme positions in the load space, i.e., fully

narrow or fully wide.
Use the scale to monitor the weight of the load. Do not drive
if there is any overload. See more detailed instructions on
loading in a separate LoadOptimizer manual.
If the load space's pipe bunk hoses need to be handled, pay

attention to the hose's correct path (Picture 1).
Picture 1. Installing a hose when the

pipe bunk's lift/drop function has 5.24.1 Hydraulic load space widening
been selected.
To widen the load space use the buttons in the right control
handle (R):
Pipe bunks up
Pipe bunks down
Load space wide
Load space narrow
Keep the Load space wide button pressed so long that

all bunks have completed their movement. Glides are locked
using a single lock valve, i.e., there is no lock between the
bunks.
The hydraulics of the variable load space do not contain any

compressive feature.
168
5.24.2 Mechanical load space widening
Take special care when modifying the load space.
Never use the loader to widen the bunks as this may damage
the bunk safety bar. A damaged safety bar can cause the
bunk to fall.
1
2
1. Remove the bunk locking screw and nut.

2. Widen the bunk to the desired position. Never use the
loader to widen the bunks.
3. Screw the locking screw and nut back in place.
4. Repeat steps 1-3 for each bunk.
169
6
Scheduled maintenance

6.1 Normal scheduled maintenance ......................................... 173
6.2 Warranty services ............................................................. 176
6.3 Tightening torques for common steel screws ...................... 180
6.4 Greasing points ................................................................ 182
6.5 Greasing points, clam bunk (optional) ................................ 183
6.6 Filters ............................................................................... 184
6.1 Normal scheduled maintenance

See also the Owner's Manuals for loader and harvester head
(PONSSE Dual machines).
(*) see references at the end of the table)
VI = Visual inspection A = Adjustment C = Cleaning

I = Inspection T = Tightening R = Replacement
Maintenance interval (h)
Item
10 50 300 600 1200 2400
1 ENGINE (See also engine specific Service Manual)
1.1 Check for oil and liquid leaks, repair if required VI
1.2 Fastenings VI
1.3 Engine oil VI R *)
1.4 Oil filter R *)
1.5 *) Air filter C
1.6 Water separator C R
1.7 Coolant VI R *)
1.8 Condition of V-ribbed belt VI
1.9 Valves A
1.10 Engine fuel filter R
1.11 Fastenings and connections of air to air tubes I, T
2 FRONT AXLES (Buffalo 6W, BuffaloDual 6W,
Elephant 6W, Elk 6W, Wisent 6W)
2.1 Differential gear oil I R
2.2 Planetary gear oils I R
2.3 Possible leaks VI
2.4 Front axle underbody protection I, T
2.5 Fastening bolts I, T
3 BOGIES
3.1 Differential gear oil I R
3.2 Planetary gear oils I R
3.3 Bogie casing oils I R
3.4 Possible leaks VI
3.5 Front and rear bogie underbody protection I, T
4 TRANSFER BOX
4.1 Oil I R
5 COOLING SYSTEM
5.1 Radiator protection screen C
5.2 Radiator cleaning C
5.3 Coolant frost protection degree I
173

Item
10 50 300 600 1200 2400
6 HYDRAULIC OIL AND FILTERS
6.1 Hydraulic oil VI R
6.2 Hydraulic oil return filter R
6.3 Drive-line charge pressure filter R
6.4 *) Pre-control pressure filter for the directional valve R
6.5 Hydraulic system breather R
6.6 Evaporation circulation pressure filter (not in: Elk, R
Gazelle, Wisent, Wisent Dual)
6.7 Hydraulic system leaks VI
6.8 *) RMF fine filter system (optional equipment):
- Bleed-off filter R
- Dehumidifying air filter R
7 FASTENINGS
7.1 Cardan shaft fastening bolts I, T
7.2 Frame lock casing fastening (not in: BuffaloDual, I, T
Elephant)
7.3 Frame lock cylinder block fastening (not in: Buf- I, T
faloDual, Elephant)
7.4 Frame lock pin fastening (not in: Elephant) I, T
7.5 Brackets fastening of frame lock cylinder (Elephant) I, T
7.6 Drive transmission pump fastening I, T
7.7 Drive transmission motor fastening I, T
7.8 Fastening of operating hydraulic pumps I, T
7.9 Fastening of underbody protections I, T
8 MIDDLE PIVOT
8.1 Vertical bearing I, T
8.2 Horizontal bearing (Gazelle, Wisent) I, T
8.3 Horizontal bearing bolts (Buffalo, BuffaloDual, Buf- I, T
faloKing, Elephant, Elk, WisentDual)
9 HEATING AND COOLING SYSTEM
9.1 Filters I, C R
9.2 Function I
9.3 Cooler cell C
10 WHEELS
10.1 Fastening nuts I, T
10.2 Tire pressures I
11 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
11.1 Condition of main fuses VI
11.2 Functioning of indicator and warning lights I
11.3 Batteries (liquids) I
11.4 Charging voltage I
174

Item
10 50 300 600 1200 2400
12 PRESSURES
12.1 Drive hydraulics pressures I
12.2 Operating hydraulics pressures - pump I
- valve K170
12.3 Differential lock pressure I
12.4 Frame lock pressure (not in: BuffaloDual, Elephant) I
13 BRAKES
13.1 Brake circuit pressure I
13.2 Loading brake pressure adjustment/functioning I
13.3 Brakes charging pressure I
13.4 Parking brake pressure I
13.5 Working brake pressure I
13.6 * Parking brake bleeding (B = bleeding)
)
B
13.7 * Working brake bleeding (B = bleeding)
)
B
14 OTHERS TO BE NOTED
14.1 Washing the whole machine C
14.2 Fuel tank C
14.3 Hose connections VI
14.4 Condition of stickers VI
14.5 Checking portable fire extinguisher See fire extinguisher system in
Owner's Manual, section 3.
14.6 Greasing according to the Owner’s Manual
1.3 *) Oil quality Max. interval Max. time

MB 228.3 600 h 12 months
MB 228.5 800 h 12 months
Examples of recommendations by different oil companies,

see section Oils and liquids.
1.4 *) Change the oil filter in connection with oil change.
1.5 *) Air filter main cartridge is changed when the blockage

sensor alerts or at least once a year. The safety cartridge is
changed in connection with the replacement of every fifth
main cartridge, however at least every two years. Note! When
the main cartridge is changed due to breakage, the safety
cartridge must be changed at the same time. See instructions
for changing in section Operating and service instructions.
175
1.7 *) Coolant quality class Max. interval Max. time

325/6.0 or 325/6.2 2400 h 3 years
325/6.3 4800 h 5 years
6.4 *) Pre-control valves must be air-vented while changing

the filter. See section Adjustment instructions.
6.8 *) For filter change, see section Operating and service

instructions.
13.6, 13.7 *) Brake bleeding: see section Operating and ser-

vice instructions.
6.2 Warranty services

200 and 1200 hour services are the manufacturer's warranty
services which are carried out by Ponsse Plc or by a Ponsse
authorised service workshop. 50 hour service must be carried
out by the customer and it is a precondition for the warranty
to be valid.
See also the Owner's Manuals for loader/crane and harvester

head (harvesters, PONSSE Dual machines).

Owner’s Service interval (h)
Item Manual 50 200 1200
section
1 ENGINE (See also the engine-specific Service 5
Manual)
1.1 Check for oil and liquid leaks, repair if required VI VI VI
1.2 Fastenings VI VI VI
1.3 Air filter C
1.4 Engine oil and oil filter R *)
1.5 Engine fuel filter R
1.6 Water separator VI R
1.7 Coolant level VI VI VI
1.8 Condition of V-ribbed belt VI VI VI
1.9 Valves A
1.10 Air tightness of exhaust piping VI VI VI
1.11 Suction pipe fastenings and connections I, T I, T I, T
between air filter and turbocharger
1.12 Fastenings and connections of air to air tubes I, T I, T I, T
176

section
2 FRONT AXLES (Bear 6w, Beaver, Ergo 6w, 5, 7
Buffalo 6w, BuffaloDual 6w, Elephant 6w,
Elk 6w, Wisent 6w)
2.1 Differential gear oil I R R
2.2 Planetary gear oils I R R
2.3 Possible leaks VI VI VI
2.4 Front axle underbody protection plate VI I, T I, T
2.5 Fastening bolts I, T I, T I, T
2.6 Cylinder U-bolts' fastening (Beaver, Ergo) I, T I, T
3 BOGIES 5, 7
3.1 Differential gear oil I R R
3.2 Planetary gear oils I R R
3.3 Bogie casing oils I R R
3.5 Front and rear bogie underbody protection VI I, T I, T
plate
3.6 Fastening bolts I, T I, T I, T
4 TRANSFER BOX 5, 7
4.1 Oil I R R
4.2 Fastening bolts VI I, T I, T
5 PUMP GEAR BOX (Bear, Ergo) 5, 7
5.1 Oil R R
5.2 Fastening bolts VI I, T I, T
6 COOLING SYSTEM 7
6.2 Radiator cleaning C C C
7 HYDRAULIC OIL AND FILTERS 7
7.1 Hydraulic oil I I R
7.2 Hydraulic oil return filter 1 pcs (2 pcs in Bear, R R
Ergo)
7.3 Drive transmission feed pressure filter R R
7.4 Pre-control pressure filter for the directional R R
valve
7.5 Breathers R
7.6 Evaporation circulation pressure filter (not in: R R
Elk, Gazelle, Wisent, WisentDual)
7.7 Active suspension pressure filter (Bear, Ergo) R R
7.8 *) RMF fine filter system (optional equipment):
- Bleed-off filter I R
- Dehumidifying air filter R
177

section
8 FASTENINGS
8.1 Cardan shaft fastening bolts I, T I, T I, T
8.2 Frame oscillation lock casing fastening (not in: VI I, T I, T
Bear, Beaver, BuffaloDual, Elephant, Ergo,
Fox)
8.3 Frame oscillation lock cylinder block fastening VI I, T
(not in: Bear, Beaver, BuffaloDual, Elephant,
Ergo, Fox)
8.4 Frame oscillation lock pin fastening (not in: VI I, T I, T
Bear, Beaver, Elephant, Ergo, Fox)
8.5 Frame oscillation lock cylinder bracket fasten- VI I, T I, T
ing (Bear, Elephant, Ergo, Fox)
8.6 Drive transmission pump fastening VI I, T I, T
8.7 Drive transmission motor fastening VI I, T I, T
8.8 Fastening of operating hydraulic pumps VI I, T I, T
8.9 Fastening of underbody protection plates I, T
9 MIDDLE PIVOT
9.1 Vertical bearing VI I, T I, T
9.2 Horizontal bearing (Gazelle, Wisent) VI VI VI
9.3 Horizontal bearing bolts (Bear, Buffalo, Buf- VI I, T I, T
faloDual, BuffaloKing, Elephant, Elk, Ergo,
WisentDual, Fox)
10 HEATING AND COOLING SYSTEM 5
10.1 Fresh air filter I, R
10.2 Air conditioner recirculation air filter I, R
11 WHEELS
11.1 Fastening nuts I, T I, T I, T
11.2 Tyre pressures VI I I
12 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM 9
12.1 Condition of main fuses VI
12.2 Batteries (liquids) I
12.3 Charging voltage I
13 PRESSURES 8
13.1 Drive transmission pressures I I
13.2 Parking brake, range changer and rear drive I I
release pressure
13.3 Loader (forwarders) and crane (Bear, Ergo) I I
pump pressures
178

section
13.4 Harvester pump pressures (Bear, Ergo) I I
13.5 Crane and harvester pump pressures (Beaver, I I
Fox)
13.6 Differential lock pressure I I
13.7 Frame oscillation lock pressure (not in: Bear, I I
Beaver, BuffaloDual, Elephant, Ergo, Fox)
13.8 Pre-control pressure for the directional valve I I
14 BRAKES 5, 8
14.1 Brake circuit pressure I I
14.2 Brake charging pressure I I
14.3 Parking brake pressure I I
14.4 Working brake pressure I I
14.5 Crane brake pressure (Bear, Beaver, Ergo, I I
Fox)
14.6 *) Parking brake bleeding (B = bleeding) B
14.7 * Working brake bleeding (B = bleeding)
)
B
15 OTHERS TO BE NOTED
15.1 Check that the instruction and warning stickers I
are undamaged and in their correct places.
Replace damaged stickers as required.
15.2 Greasing according to the Owner’s Manual 6 Carry out 50 and 300 hour
greasing in connection
with 200 hour service, see
Owner’s Manual section 6,
greasing points.
1.4 *) See engine oil change interval in section 6.1.
7.8 *) For filter change, see section Operating and service

instructions.
14.6, 14.7 *) Brake bleeding: see section Operating and ser-

vice instructions.
179
6.3 Tightening torques for common

steel screws
The values in the table apply when using a torque wrench.
When tightening mechanically, the tightening torque is
approximately 0.93 x the table value.
Base machine Thread Hardness Nm

Frame oscillation lock plate M16 12.9 325
Frame oscillation lock pin M20 8.8 430
Slide plate for the frame oscillation lock M16 10.9 325
Piston set for the frame oscillation lock M10 12.9 80
Middle pivot, bearing M20 10.9 550
Middle pivot, bearing M22 10.9 650
Middle pivot vertical pin (upper) M24 10.9 800
U-bolts for front axles M20 10.9 500
U-bolts for front axles M20 D 10.9 300
Front bogie/Front axle/Rear bogie horizontal stud bolts: M22x1.5 10.9 650
M24x2 10.9 800
M27x3 10.9 1200
Front bogie/Front axle/Rear bogie vertical stud bolts: M24 10.9 840
M27 10.9 1250
M30 10.9 1700
Bogie/axle underbody protection plate M20 12.9 550
Rear frame extension Gazelle, Wisent M22 10.9 700
Rear frame extension Buffalo, Elephant, Elk M24 12.9 900
Tyres M22x1.5 550*)
Bunks M20 8.8 430
Tightening screws for tapered pins: M8 12.9 35
M12 12.9 120
M14 12.9 190
M20 10.9 490
M24 10.9 900
M30 10.9 1500
KM17 8.8 500
*) Tar as lubricant
D = Dacromet coating
Transmission Thread Hardness Nm

Drive motor fastening screws M20 12.9 550
Engine brackets M16 8.8 200
Distribution box brackets M14 10.9 250
180
Transmission Thread Hardness Nm

Distribution box brackets M16 10.9 300
Pump switch M10 12.9 80
Pump fastening flange M10 12.9 80
Hydraulic valves M5 10.9 8
Radiator water hose M8 8.8 24
Suction hoses M6 8.8 10
Loader/Crane Thread Hardness Nm

Fastening screws for the harvester crane's slewing ring M20 10.9 560
Fastening screws for the harvester crane's slewing ring M20 12.9 610
Loader base for the frame M24 10.9 900
Slewing pipes (K90) M12 12.9 130
Slewing pipes (K70) M16 12.9 325
Pillar cylinder fastener (C2,C4) M16 12.9 325
Boom end fastening M16 12.9 325
Slewing motor fastening to the base M16 12.9 325
Slewing gear fastening to the base M20 12.9 610
Tightening screws for conical sleeve pins M8 12.9 35
Harvester head Thread Hardness Nm

Rotator fastening M16 12.9 300
Fastening of feed rollers MCR05 M14x1.25 8.8 140
Fastening of feed rollers H10, MCR10 M18x1.5 8.8 300
Feed motor fastening H5 M12 12.9 150
Feed motor fastening H6, H7, H7euca, H8, H10 M16 12.9 250
Tilt frame tighteness H6 KM9 8.8 100
Tilt frame tightness H7, H7euca, H8 M30x1.5 12.9 250*)
Tilt frame tighteness H10 KM13 8.8 150
*) To be tightened to the torque listed, after which loosened

so that the tilt frame moves.
181
6.4 Greasing points
8 7
5
3 4 13
13 13
9
12 6 4 11 6
10 10
1 2 11 11
No. Item Nipples/ Greasing interval (h)

pcs 50 300 1000
1 Bulldozer blade cylinder swivel bearings 4 ●
2 Bulldozer blade glide bearings 2 ●
3*) Frame lock 2 ●
4*) Middle pivot vertical bearing 2 ●
5*) **) Middle pivot horizontal bearing 2 ●
6*) Steering cylinder swivel bearing 4 ●
7 ‘Sit right’ stand ●
8 Door and window hinges 4 ●
9 Grease nipples of hydraulic steps 5 ●
10**) Front/rear bogie swing bearing 8 ●
11**) Cardan shaft cross bearing 5 ●
12 Cardan shaft sliding sleeve 1 ●
13*) **) Cardan shaft support bearing 3 ●
*) In machines equipped with an automatic central lubrication

system, the greasing of these points is done by the system.
**) Roller bearing, do not use grease containing molybdenum

sulphide (see quality conditions for lubricant greases in sec-
tion Oils and liquids).
For crane greasing, see crane Owner's Manual.
182
6.5 Greasing points, clam bunk (optional)
2 2
3
1
Burger clam bunk Ponsse clam bunk (Elk, Buffalo)
No. Item Nipples Greasing interval (h)

pcs 25 50 300 1000
1 Clam bunk's slew bearing 4 ●
2 Slide bearings for the clam bunk's joint pin 8 ●
3 Clam bunk's grease nipples 10 ●
183
6.6 Filters
6 2 9
5 7 3 1 4
No. Filter Quantity pcs

1 Hydraulic oil return filter 1
- exchange cartridge
2 Pre-control pressure filter for valve table 1
- exchange cartridge
3 Drive-line charge pressure filter 1
4 Hydraulic oil tank breather 1
5 Engine oil filter 1
6 Engine fuel filter 1+1
7 Engine air filter 1+1
RMF fine filter system (optional equipment):
8 - Bleed-off filter 1
9 - Dehumidifying air filter 1
For filter change, see section Operating and service instruc-

tions.
184
7
Oils and liquids

7.1 Service and cleanness of hydraulics is the provision for reli-
ability ............................................................................... 187
7.2 Viscosity of hydraulic oil .................................................... 189
7.3 Hydraulic oil ..................................................................... 190
7.3.1 First tank of hydraulic oil ...................................... 190
7.3.2 Oil change instructions when utilising the flushing
method ............................................................... 190
7.3.3 Pre-heating hydraulic oils in cold weather ............. 191
7.4 Engine oil requirements ..................................................... 192
7.5 Liquid and oil features, quantities and quality grades ........... 193
7.6 Examples of recommendations by different oil
companies ........................................................................ 194
7.7 Quality conditions for lubricant greases .............................. 196
7.7.1 Viscosity requirement .......................................... 196
7.7.2 Manual greasing ................................................. 196
7.7.3 Central lubrication system ................................... 196
7.7.3.1 NLGI grades of greases used in central lubrication
systems ............................................................. 197
7 Oils and liquids
7.1 Service and cleanness of

hydraulics is the provision for
reliability
Maintenance of a forest machine, i.e. service and repair, is
an important factor as far as its use and operating costs are
concerned. Servicing is important and necessary. Service
work carried out on a forest machine pays itself back many
times as good second hand value, greater reliability and
improved efficiency.
Hydraulics play an important role in forest machine functions.

It is important that special attention is paid to it. Studies have
revealed that more than half of forest machine hydraulic faults
are caused by impurities in the hydraulic oil. Faults appear
as unpredicted faults or as long term wear of different com-
ponents. It is thus extremely important to observe absolute
cleanness in service and repair jobs. Time and money spent
on repairs can be saved by performing services carefully.
Do not trust only your own eyes when judging cleanness!
With bare eyes one can see a particle of size 40 µm (1 µm

= 1 micrometre = 1 thousand of a millimetre; 1 millimetre
equals to 0.04 in). It is impossible to see a particle of size 10
µm. As a comparison note that the thickness of a hair is 70
µm. Size of dangerous particles is smaller than 25 µm, i.e.
you cannot see them. So the situation is quite serious if you
can see impurities in the system with your own bare eyes.
The most wear causing particles are of size which enable

them to squeeze in just and just between the sliding surfaces.
In valves and hydraulic pumps clearances are, for example,
between 10 – 40 µm. Therefore the nominal filtering capability
of the system filter is 10 µm. The efficiency of a filter depends
on many factors, such as the condition and age of the filter.
Dirty filter lets through also big dirt particles. That is why it is
important that the filter is changed regularly and even more
often if the system has been repaired during the change
interval.
In order to guarantee the durability and reliability of hydraulic

system components, pay attention to the following:
● Change the hydraulic system's filters regularly.

● Change the hydraulic oil regularly.
187
7 Oils and liquids
● if the system must be opened, e.g. due to repairs, be

especially careful and take care of cleanness. Before
opening anything, make sure to clean also the surround-
ings of the point to be opened.
● Protect the ends of hose connections with clean plugs
when opening the connections.
● When fabricating a new hose in the workshop, it must
be cleaned by blowing pressurised air through it and
then plugged. The plugs may be removed only just
before the assembly.
● It is recommended that the hydraulic tank is cleaned at
least once a year. Contact an authorised PONSSE ser-
vice for further information.
● When replacing a filter, check the condition of the seals
before assembly.
Note: Harvesters
Make sure that the stump treatment equipment hose and the
overflow hose of the harvester head are connected correctly
if the hoses are disconnected during sevice work. If the hoses
are connected incorrectly, the stump treatment substance
may access the hydraulic system. In this case, the hydraulic
system of the machine may be severely damaged.
188
7 Oils and liquids
7.2 Viscosity of hydraulic oil
1 Hydraulic system can be started. Oil is circulated on idle

speeds without load. Only when oil temperature has
reached the following area, the system may be loaded.
2 System can be loaded with partial flow volume (cavitation
danger).
3 Can be loaded by 100%.
4 Ideal operating range.
5 Highest recommended operating temperature range. Oil
is now so thin that it will cause efficiency losses due to
1 mm²/s = 1 cSt
great internal leakages. Danger of abnormal wear is now
great. Selecting of a thicker grade oil is now recommend-
able.
Operating temperature ranges mentioned before are indicat-

ive. Construction of the pump and suction piping may justify
higher limits within low temperature range. Technical values
given by different oil companies vary from each other.
To be used in a PONSSE forest machine

● In temperatures below +20 °C (68 °F): oil belonging to
viscosity class (cSt) 22...46.
● In temperatures above +20 °C (68 °F): oil belonging to
viscosity class (cSt) 46...68.
189
7 Oils and liquids
7.3 Hydraulic oil
7.3.1 First tank of hydraulic oil

Only the following hydraulic oils are used in machines
delivered by Ponsse Plc as the first tank of hydraulic oils:
Mineral oils:
Neste Hydrauli 22 Super
PONSSE Logger's Hydraulic Oil 32 Super
PONSSE Logger's Hydraulic Oil 46 Super
Neste Hydrauli 68 Super
Bio oils (synthetic ester):

PONSSE Logger's Bio Hydraulic Oil 46
Neste Biohydrauli SE 68
The aforementioned practice is due to the cleanness of the

oil and to aspects related to the handling of oil. Barrel oils
are no longer used in hydraulics. Currently, oil pumped filtered
from tanks is only used so that the oil cleanness level meets
the highest requirements set.
Mixing of different oils is not allowed.
Use the flushing method whenever changing to a different

hydraulic oil. The flushing method achieves a sufficiently low
residual oil content.
When flushing, be careful with mineral oils, as it has been

noted that these tend to form sedimentation with bio oils.
7.3.2 Oil change instructions when utilising

the flushing method
1. Wash the machine carefully in order to prevent impurities
from entering the system.
2. Drain the hydraulic system as empty as possible while
the oil is warm.
3. Drain the largest hoses and cylinders of oil.
4. Add the new oil into the system up to the minimum level,
so that operating the machine functions is possible.
190
7 Oils and liquids
5. Carry out the system flushing by operating all move-

ments a few times to their limits, thus ensuring that the
residual oil will mix with the flushing oil.
6. Repeat points 2, 4 and 5.
7. Replace all hydraulic filters.
8. Fill the system up with new oil.
With the above described system the component suppliers'

required maximum 2% of remainder oil is reached in the
hydraulic system.
When using hoses or seals procured as spare parts, make

sure that they are suitable to be used with bio oils.
With bio oils, always use fibre glass cartridges in filters.
7.3.3 Pre-heating hydraulic oils in cold

weather
Warm the hydraulic oil before starting work. When hydraulic
oil is approx. +20 °C (68 °F), move the crane/loader functions
cautiously. In addition, in harvester models: Then switch
the current on from the harvester head switch and rotate the
harvester head feed rollers backwards and use sawing and
harvester head close-open movements before starting to
work.
191
7 Oils and liquids
7.4 Engine oil requirements
10W
20W - 20
30
40
50
0W - 30, 0W - 40
5W - 30, 5W - 40
10W - 30, 10W - 40, 10W - 50
15W - 30, 15W - 40, 15W - 50
20W - 40, 20W - 50
°F - 22 -4 + 14 + 32 + 50 + 68 + 86 °F
°C - 30 - 20 - 10 0 + 10 + 20 + 30 °C
Single-grade oils
Multigrade oils
Select the engine oil's SAE grade (viscosity) according to the

ambient temperature.
Engine oil viscosity Ambient temperature

20W-40, 20W-50 -5 °C – +30 °C or higher
15W-30, 15W-40, 15W-50 -15 °C – +30 °C or higher
10W-30, 10W-40, 10W-50 -20 °C – +30 °C or higher
5W-30, 5W-40 -25 °C – +30 °C or higher
0W-30, 0W-40 -25 °C – +30 °C or higher
50 +20 °C – +30 °C or higher
40 +20 °C – +30 °C or higher
30 +5 °C – +30 °C
20W-20 -5 °C – +15 °C
10W -20 °C – 0 °C
In Mercedes-Benz engines, SAE 5W-30 engine oil is

recommended when the ambient temperature falls below -
20 °C (-4 °F).
For further information, please contact an authorised

PONSSE service.
192
7 Oils and liquids
7.5 Liquid and oil features, quantities and quality grades

The table indicates oil quantities for bogies and axles in connection with oil changes.
Item Feature Quantity Quality

approximately,
l (gal UK)
1. Radiator Ethylene glycol + water 12 + 12 (2.6 + *)
Propylene glycol + 2.6)
specially cleaned water
2. Engine see MB Service book max. 16 (3.5) **)
3. Washing liquid container Water + window wash- 5 (1.1) ***)
ing liquid
4. Air conditioner compressor oil ZXL 100PG 0.08 (0.02) ****) ISO VG 46
5. Batteries Specially cleaned water
6. Front/rear bogie planetary gears SAE 80W-90 8 x 3 (0.7) GL 4
7. Front/rear bogie differential SAE 80W-90 2 x 11 (2.4) GL 5 / LS
gears
8. Front/rear bogie housings SAE 80W-90 2 x 29 (6.4) GL 4
9. Front/rear bogie pivot bearings Grease 8 x *****) NLGI-2 / KP 2
10. Transfer box SAE 80W-90 4.5 (1.0) GL 4
11. Hydraulic container Hydraulic SHS 22-68 130 (28.6) ISO-VG 22-68
(SMR 22-68)
12. Fuel tank Diesel oil DIN EN 590, 130 (28.6)
see MB Service book
13. Central lubrication system Grease 4 kg (8.8 lbs) NLGI 000-1 in
cold conditions
NLGI 0-2 in
warm condi-
tions
*) In Mercedes-Benz engines classification 325.0, 325.2 or

325.3 radiator liquids are used and they are mixed with water
at a ratio of 50% to 50%.
**) Recommendation MB 228.5 (MB 228.3) see MB Service

book. Max. 16 litres (3.5 gal UK), includes filter.
***) The window washing liquid container is located under

the right hand side casing of the machine's cabin.
****) Do not mix different manufacturers' oils. Measure the

oil quantity inside the old compressor when replacing the
compressor. Remove the oil from the new compressor and
fill it through the suction side connector with the same
quantity that was removed from the old compressor.
193
7 Oils and liquids
*****) Self-lubricated bearing; the bearings are greased every

2000 hours or at least once a year. Check the more detailed
instructions in the Owner's Manual, section Operating and
service instructions.
7.6 Examples of recommendations by different oil companies

Item Oil company
Neste Shell
1. Bogie Hypoidi MP 80W-90 GL5 Spirax EP 80W-90, GL 4
Axle Hypoidi LS 80W-90 GL 5 Spirax AX 80W-90, GL 5
Transfer box HSG 80-90
Spirax A 90 LS GL 5
(Gazelle)
2. Engine *) Turbo Super 5W-30 Rimula Ultra 5W-30
Turbo Super 10W-40 10W-40 (MB 228.5)
(MB 228.5)
Turbo Le 15W-40 Rimula Super 15W-40
(MB 228.3) (MB 228.3)
3. Hydraulics mineral oil Hydrauli 22, 32, 46, 68 Tellus S2 V 32, 46, 68
Super
bio oil Neste Biohydrauli SE 46, 68 Naturelle HF-E 46
4. Pump gear box (Ergo, Bear) Hypoidi S 75W-140 Hypoidi Oil HD 75W-140
5. Lubrication grease Molygrease Retinax HDX 2
6. Radiator **) Neste XLC ClycoShell
Neste Biojäähdytinneste
(Bio Antifreeze)
7. Windscreen washer Neste screen washer liquid Shell screen washer liquid
*) In Mercedes-Benz engines, SAE 5W-30 engine oil is

recommended when the ambient temparature falls below -
20 °C (-4 °F).
**) At the factory, a durable antifreeze agent Neste XLC or

Neste Biojäähdytinneste (Bio Antifreeze) is used as a radiator
liquid. Check the type of the original radiator liquid from the
sticker on the expansion tank. In order to maintain its cooling
and anti-corrosive quality, the radiator liquid has to be
changed as indicated in the maintenance instructions (every
4800 hours) and the frost durability of the liquid must be
checked every 600 hours. If the radiator liquid is changed to
another type of approved liquid, check the recommended
time for change because different types of radiator liquids
must be changed at different intervals.
194
7 Oils and liquids
When the radiator liquid is changed, remember that liquids

of different brands cannot be mixed. If the brand used is
changed, the cooling system must be flushed with water
before adding new liquid into the system. If the brand is
changed to Biojäähdytinneste (Bio Antifreeze), the system
must first be flushed with specially purified water.
Liquids that can be used include Aral Antifreeze Extra, Avia

Antifreeze APN, BP Isocool, CaltexCX Antifreeze Coolant,
Castrol Anti-Freeze MB, GlycoShell, GlycoShell N, Mobil
Frostschutz 911 Plus, Neste XLC, Neste Biojäähdytinneste
(Bio Antifreeze), Panolin Anti-Frost MT-325, Total Frostfrei,
Total Multiprotect and Valvoline Anti-Freeze Extra.
For further information, please contact an authorised

PONSSE service.
195
7 Oils and liquids
7.7 Quality conditions for lubricant

greases
7.7.1 Viscosity requirement

Viscosity requirement for the basic oil of the grease.
Manual greas- Central lubrication

ing system
Basic oil viscosity (cSt >150 >115
or mm²/s / 40°C)
7.7.2 Manual greasing

Grease Greasing point
PONSSE Logger’s Pro Roller bearings
Grease NLGI 2
PONSSE Logger’s Grease Shackle pins, slide bearings
NLGI 0, NLGI 2 and saw chain
PONSSE Logger’s Universal Roller bearings, cardan joints
Grease NLGI 2 and daily greasing points.
In forest machine use, the roller bearings refer, for example,

to cardan shaft bearings, middle joint horizontal bearings,
bogie pivot bearings, crane pivot bearings and in the har-
vester head, the bearings for the length measurement wheel
and saw.
7.7.3 Central lubrication system

Examples of recommendations given by different oil compan-
ies for central lubrication.
Oil company Central lubrication system

SHELL Centra W EP 00
NESTE Center Grease EP 00
Mobil Mobilith SHC 007
196
7 Oils and liquids
7.7.3.1 NLGI grades of greases used in central

lubrication systems
PONSSE forest machines contain an automatic lubrication

system which allows the use of stiffer central lubricants.
Greases are divided into NLGI grades from 000 to 6. The

higher the number of the grade, the stiffer the lubricant.
The effect of temperature changes in choosing the grease

for central lubrication systems:
Table Central lubrication system
NLGI grade (stiff- Conditions Temperat-

ness) of the grease ure
1....2 Warm conditions Over +0°C
(summer)
0....1 Cold conditions Under 0°C
(winter)
Table Two-channel progressive lubrication system
NLGI grade (stiff- Temperature

ness) of the grease
1 -15°C or colder
2 -15°C or warmer
In extreme winter conditions, NLGI 00 grease can be used.

In warm conditions, NLGI 00 grease may cause malfunctions
in the system.
Mixing different grades of greases is not recommended. It

may make it more difficult to pump the grease.
When changing the grade of the grease: fully use the old
grease, fill the container with new grease, bleed the pumping
unit and make sure that the new grease comes out through
the bleeding screw.
See the pumping unit's bleeding instructions from the separ-

ate manual delivered with the machine.
197
8
Adjustment instructions

8.1 Read before starting the job ............................................... 201
8.2 Loader pump Rexroth A11VO145 ...................................... 201
8.2.1 Checking the stand by pressure ........................... 201
8.2.2 Adjustment of stand by pressure .......................... 202
8.2.3 Adjustment of the maximum pressure .................. 202
8.2.4 Stand by and maximum pressure values .............. 203
8.3 K170 valve ....................................................................... 203
8.3.2 Pressure adjustment of a valve ............................ 204
8.3.3 MR adjustment value table .................................. 205
8.4 Blocks .............................................................................. 206
8.4.2 Blocks, measuring points and adjustment
screws ............................................................... 206
8.4.3 Brake circuit pressure adjustment ........................ 207
8.4.4 Frame lock pressure adjustment .......................... 207
8.4.5 Differential lock pressure adjustment .................... 208
8.4.6 Working brake pressure adjustment ..................... 208
8.5 Drive transmission ............................................................ 209
8.5.2 Measuring points ................................................ 209
8.5.3 Drive transmission feed pressure measure-
ment .................................................................. 209
8.6 Adjustment values ............................................................ 210
8.7 Tyre pressures .................................................................. 211
8.7.1 Impact of temperature on tyre pressure ................ 211
8.1 Read before starting the job

When adjusting pressures special care and caution must be
taken.
Do not adjust if you are not sure of your competence.
Product warranty will become void if pressures are adjusted

inconsistent with the standard values.
8.2 Loader pump Rexroth A11VO145
8.2.1 Checking the stand by pressure
LS 3 1. Tilt the cabin and support it by the safety support.

2. Attach pressure gauges (0–40 MPa) to measuring point
1
MP1 in the equipment frame and the LS measuring point
2
at the loader pump.
4. Select neutral position by the driving direction selector.
5. Start the engine and let it run at 1500 rpm.
6. Check the pressure difference between the measuring
points. The default value is 2.5 MPa (362.6 PSI). The
1 = adjustment screw of stand by allowed range is 2.5 – 2.7 MPa (362.6 - 391.6 PSI).
pressure 7. If the pressure difference between the measuring points
2 = adjustment screw for max-
is not within the allowed range, contact an authorised
imum pressure
3 = adjustment screw of power; PONSSE service.
the power may only be adjusted 1 MPa = 10 bar
by an authorised PONSSE
Service
LS = LS measuring point
The stand by pressure difference must absolutely be checked

with two gauges simultaneously.
201
8.2.2 Adjustment of stand by pressure
LS 3 1. Tilt the cabin and support it by the safety support.

2. Attach pressure gauges (0–40 MPa) to measuring point
1
MP1 in the equipment frame and the LS measuring point
2
at the loader pump.
6. Open the locking nut of the adjustment screw (1).
7. Adjust the pressure using the adjustment screw (1) until
1 = adjustment screw of stand by the pressure difference between the measuring points
pressure is 2.5 MPa (362.6 PSI).
2 = adjustment screw for max-
The allowed range is 2.5 – 2.7 MPa (362.6 - 391.6 PSI).
imum pressure
3 = adjustment screw of power; 8. Tighten the locking nut of the adjustment screw.
the power may only be adjusted 9. Switch off the engine.
by an authorised PONSSE 10. Remove the pressure gauges and lower the cabin down.
Service
LS = LS measuring point
8.2.3 Adjustment of the maximum pressure
1. Tilt the cabin and support it by the safety support.
2. Fit the pressure gauge to measuring point MP1.
6. Switch on the loader control switch.
7. An assistant should maintain the loader's Boom out
movement on.
8. Open the locking nut of the adjustment screw (2).
9. Adjust the pressure by the adjustment screw (2) to the
value given in Table 8.2.4 Stand by and maximum
pressure values.
10. Tighten the locking nut of the adjustment screw.
11. Check the pressure!
13. Remove the pressure gauge and lower the cabin down.
Ensure that your assistant knows the machine fully and

masters operating the machine completely. For further
instructions, contact an authorised PONSSE service.
202
8.2.4 Stand by and maximum pressure values

Table 1 MPa = 10 bar =145 PSI
Loader Stand by Max pressure

pressure MPa (PSI)
MPa (PSI)
PONSSE K70+ 2.5 (362.6) 23.5 (3408)
PONSSE K90/K90+ 2.5 (362.6) 23.5 (3408)
8.3 K170 valve
Do not adjust the valve if you are not sure of your compet-
ence.
Make sure that the loader to be operated has an uninhibited

movement path, note the danger zone.

masters operating the machine completely.
Do not control the movements mechanically by the pilot

valves.
Use safety goggles when making the adjustment.
203
8.3.2 Pressure adjustment of a valve

MRA Adjustment screw
MRB Adjustment screw
PL Measuring point
PX Measuring point
LS Signal pressure for the crane B A
pump
MRA
A Pressure port A
B Pressure port B
MRB
LS
PX
PL
1. Check and adjust, if necessary, the stand by and max

pressures of the pumps.
2. Fit the pressure gauge to PL measuring point.
3. The assistant should now drive the movement to be
adjusted to its limit and maintain the movement.
4. Adjust the pressure of the movement in question by the
MR adjustment screw (see pressure values 8.3.3 MR
adjustment value table). Add 1 MPa to the gauge read-
ing. Gauge reading + 1 MPa = table value.
5. Lock the MR screw.
6. Check the pressure and repeat step 4 and 5, if needed.
7. Pressure ports A are adjusted by the MRA screw, and
pressure ports B by the MRB screw.
8. Adjust all the MR screws of the valve.
204
8.3.3 MR adjustment value table
Gauge readings do not show directly the pressure values

effective in the cylinders. Add 1 MPa to the reading of gauge
located in PL line.
1 MPa = 10 bar
Function Port PONSSE K70+

PONSSE PONSSE
Wisent Gazelle
MPa (PSI) MPa (PSI)
Crane swivel A/B 19.5 (2828) 19.5 (2828)
Steering A/B 19 (2755) 17.5 (2538)
Bulldozer blade A/B 17 (2465) 17 (2465)
205
8.4 Blocks
Do not adjust if you are not sure of your competence.

masters operating the machine completely.
8.4.2 Blocks, measuring points and

adjustment screws
1 Hydraulic block 1
2 Hydraulic block 2
3 Hydraulic block 3
4 Parking brake/steps
5 Speed range gear
6 Rear drive
7 Reserve position
8 Loader stand tilt (optional
equipment. Elk, Wisent)
9 Pressure regulating valve of
brake circuit
10 Log gate movement front/back
11 Frame lock
12 Differential lock
13 Working brake
MP Pressure measuring point
14, 15, 16, 17 Pressure adjustment
screw
206
8.4.3 Brake circuit pressure adjustment

2. Fit the pressure gauge to the measuring point MP4.
3. Apply parking brake.
7. An assistant should maintain the loader movement
extension in on.
8. Open the locking nut of adjustment screw no. 14 and
adjust the pressure to the value of table 8.6.
Block 2 9. Tighten the locking nut of adjustment screw no. 14.
8.4.4 Frame lock pressure adjustment

2. Fit the pressure gauge to measuring point MP3.
7. An assistant should maintain the loader movement
extension in on.
9. Tighten the locking nut of adjustment screw no. 15.
Block 3
207
8.4.5 Differential lock pressure adjustment

Block 3
8.4.6 Working brake pressure adjustment

Block 3
208
8.5 Drive transmission
Drive transmission may only be adjusted by authorised

PONSSE service.
Ponsse Plc warranty will become void if drive transmission

pressures are adjusted without permission.
8.5.2 Measuring points

A = Drive transmission pump
B = Drive transmission motor
1 Feed pressure measuring point
2 Pressure limiter measuring
point
3 Drive transmission pressure
adjustment measuring point,
forward
4 Drive transmission pressure
adjustment measuring point,
backward
8.5.3 Drive transmission feed pressure

measurement
Drive transmission feed pressure measurement can be used
to check the operational preconditions for drive transmission
hydraulics. The pressure maintained by the feed pump con-
trols the operation of the drive transmission. If the feed
pressure decreases considerably, the drive transmission
system will not produce the force required for the movement
of the machine.

2. Fit the pressure gauge to measuring point (1).
4. Select neutral position by the drive direction selector.
6. The pressure must be 2.8 - 3.0 MPa (406.1 - 435.1 PSI).
209
8.6 Adjustment values

PONSSE PONSSE Note:
Wisent Gazelle
1. Drive transmission MPa 1MPa = 10 bar
(PSI)
Maximum pressure 42.5 (6164) – MPa Wisent 8w
8w
Maximum pressure 40 (5801) – MPa Wisent 6w
6w
Max pressure – 38 (5511) MPa Gazelle
Feed pressure 2.8 (406.1) 2.8 (406.1) MPa
Pressure cutter 33 (4786) 31 (4496) MPa
2. Loader pump
Rexroth 145 Stand by pressure 2.5 (362.6) 2.5 (362.6) MPa
Max pressure 23.5 (3408) 23.5 (3408) MPa K70+ loader
3. Frame oscillation lock 17.5 (2538) 17.5 (2538) MPa
4. Differential lock 3 (435.1) 3 (435.1) MPa
5. Loading/working brake 6.5 (942.7) 6.5 (942.7) MPa
6. Brake circuit 19 (2756) 19 (2756) MPa
7. Parking brake See drive transmission feed

pressure
8. Operating brake (pedal force) 8 (1160) 8 (1160) MPa Not adjustable
9. Electrical system (charging voltage) 28 28 V +3/-0 V
210
8.7 Tyre pressures

For the recommended tyre pressures, refer to the table
appended to the book.
● Too low pressure leads to side wall damage and rim

chaffing and it can cause the tyre to swing around the
rim.
● When driving with too low pressure the tyre can be
broken in a single incident. Too high a pressure in rela-
tion to the load will not cause this to happen.
● Using sufficient tyre pressure is especially important in
the following cases:
- when using tracks
- when carrying heavy loads
- when the circumstances are demanding, i.e. when
driving on rocky terrain.
Never exceed the maximum tyre pressure given by the tyre

manufacturer. If you are uncertain about the maximum
allowed tyre pressure, contact an authorised PONSSE ser-
vice, the tyre manufacturer directly, or a tyre retailer author-
ised by the manufacturer.
8.7.1 Impact of temperature on tyre pressure

● Adjust the tyre pressure based on the operating environ-
ment temperature.
● Please note that temperature influences the tyre pres-
sure by around 10 kPa (= 0.1 bar = 1.45 PSI) per 10 °C
(50 °F).
● The tyre pressures are adjusted at the factory at 20 °C.
● An example of how the temperature influences the tyre
pressure: The inside temperature of your hall is +20 °C
(68 °F) and the outside temperature is –10 °C (14 °F).
When you adjust the pressure indoors, you must
increase the recommended pressure by 30 kPa (= 0.3
bar = 4.35 PSI) to maintain the correct pressure level
outdoors.
Don't forget to decrease the tyre pressure when the outdoor

temperature increases.
211
9
Electrical system

9.1 General ............................................................................ 215
9.2 Cabin electrical centre ....................................................... 216
9.2.1 Electrical centre location and components ............ 216
9.2.2 Electrical centre fuses ......................................... 218
9.2.3 Relay functions ................................................... 220
9.3 Seat relay and fuses ......................................................... 221
9.4 Electrical centre on frame .................................................. 222
9.4.1 Relay and fuse functions ..................................... 222
9.5 Main current switch ........................................................... 223
9.6 Batteries .......................................................................... 224
9.6.1 Starting batteries ................................................ 224
9.6.2 Cabin battery 12 V .............................................. 225
9.7 Grounding the electrical system ......................................... 226
9.8 Sensors ........................................................................... 227
9.8.1 Engine sensors ................................................... 227
9.8.2 Other sensors in the machine .............................. 228
9 Electrical system
9.1 General
There are two electrical centres in the machine. One is loc-
ated in the cabin, the other in the battery casing in the right
hand side bumper.
Any changes made in the electrical system will affect the

functioning of the whole machine. The manufacturer assumes
no responsibility for damage caused by changes made in
the original electrical system that have not been approved
by Ponsse Plc.
Never switch off the main current from the main current switch
when the engine is running as it may damage the electronics
and charging circuit. See Section 4, Engine shutdown.
Switch off the engine and always switch off the main current
from the main current switch before
● handling electronics
● removing drive electronics
● removing the computer display
● disconnecting battery cables.
215
9 Electrical system
9.2 Cabin electrical centre
9.2.1 Electrical centre location and

components
The cabin electrical centre is located underneath the cover
(Picture 1) in the fastening plate (Pictures 2 and 3).
The cabin electrical centre is fastened using slide bars. During

maintenance and repairs, the cabin electrical centre can be
lifted from its position in order to access the components on
both sides of the plate.
The voltage points (4) and the main current relay (5) are
Picture 1 located on the cabin floor under the electrical centre.
Picture 2
1 Relays
2 Fuses
3 Voltage reducer
4 Voltage points (2 pcs)
5 Main current relay
6 Diode group
7 Welding switch
8 Engine control system dia-
gnostics connector
216
9 Electrical system
Picture 3
1 Engine control unit (VCU)
2 Engine control CAN connection
3 Voltage reducer 24 V – 12 V
(optional equipment, position in
the picture)
4 Anti-theft alarm relays (optional
equipment, position in the pic-
ture)
217
9 Electrical system
9.2.2 Electrical centre fuses

The fuse marking starting with the letter ‘F’ in the table below
corresponds with that of the wiring diagram function list.
(*) see references at the end of the table)
Fuse Size (A) Function

F1 15 Ignition lock
F2 10 Cabin interior lights
Current supply of working light switches
F3 10 Engine control unit (VCU)
F4 10 Engine diagnostics connector
F5 7.5 Additional display
F6 7.5 Control panel backlights, parking lights
F7 3 Concentrator (Hub)
F8 15 Loader/crane control unit (OptiControl
Unit)
F9 Fuel valve, extinguishing system
F10 7.5 Active suspension (Ergo 6w, Bear 6w,
Buffalo ADS)
F11 15 Seat module
F12 15 Transmission
F13 5 Warning and indicator lights
F14 7.5 Buzzer
F15 10 Headlights
Fuses in the cabin's electrical centre F16 7.5 Brake lights
F17 (10) Reserve (SCR module *))
F18 10 Steering wheel
F19 3 Harvester circuit pressure transmitter
(harvester)
Gear position sensor
Loader/crane limit sensors
Clogging sensor for cooling circulation
F20 3 Crane limit sensors
F21 7.5 Sensors, coolant lower limit
Air filter degree of blockage
Sensor, position of steps
F22 10 Seat direction sensor and seat heater
F23 10 Anti-theft alarm (optional equipment) (12
V)
F24 3 Phone (12 V)
F25 5 Radio/CD (12 V)
F26 10 Printer (12 V)
F27 10 Radio / Opti memory (12 V)
218
9 Electrical system
Fuse Size (A) Function

F28 1 Phone (12 V)
F35 1 Phone (optional equipment) (12 V)
F37 7.5 Opti (main fuse)
F38 1 Opti (preheating)
F39 IO expansion (optional equipment for
forwarders)
F42 1 Antenna amplifier (optional equipment
for phone) (12 V)
F50 7.5 Brake pressure charging
F51 7.5 Emergency stop
F52 7.5 Brake pressure charging sensor
F53 15 Harvester head module
F54 20 Air conditioner
F55 7.5 Turning signal
F56 15 12 V system
F57 15 Windscreen wiper control
F58 15 Side window wipers (optional equipment)
F61 10 Central lubrication system (optional
equipment)
F63 5 Emergency exit
F86 10 Extinguishing system (optional equip-
ment)
F108 15 Cabin approach light (optional equip-
ment)
F140 15 Bogie up/down (optional equipment)
F150 7.5 Voltage reducer (optional equipment)
F151 Reserve position (12 V)
F153 5 12 V system (optional equipment)
F157 5 12 V system (optional equipment)
*) If the machine is equipped with an engine that meets the

Euromot 3B emission limits.
219
9 Electrical system
9.2.3 Relay functions

The relay marking starting with the letter ‘K’ in the table below
corresponds with that of the wiring diagram function list.
Relay Size Function

K50 24 V / 20 A Brake pressure charging
K51A 24 V / 20 A Engine shut-off (ignition key in 0 position)
K51B 24 V / 20 A Starter motor prevented
K52 24 V / 20 A Brake pressure charging prevented
K53 24 V / 20 A Harvester head module
K54 24 V / 20 A Air conditioner
K55 Turning signals
K56 24 V / 20 A 12 V system
K57 24 V / 20 A Windscreen wiper, front window
K58 24 V / 20 A Windscreen wiper, rear window
K59 24 V / 20 A Windscreen washer, front window
K60 24 V / 20 A Automatic parking brake system
K61 24 V / 20 A Central lubrication system (optional equipment)
K62 24 V / 20 A Extinguishing system (optional equipment)
K63 24 V / 20 A Emergency exit
K64 24 V / 20 A Side window wiper, left
K65 24 V / 20 A Side window wiper, right
K66 24 V / 20 A Windscreen washer, rear window
220
9 Electrical system
9.3 Seat relay and fuses

A relay and a group of three fuses are placed under a black
plastic casing (1) attached to the back of the seat. The plastic
casing can be removed by opening the bolts (2 pcs) on both
sides of the casing.
K67 Windscreen washer control relay 24 V / 20 A
F724 Electrical seat heating

F725 Seat stabiliser (Sit Right, optional equipment)
F726 Windscreen washers
221
9 Electrical system
9.4 Electrical centre on frame

The frame's electrical centre is located in the machine's right
side bumper. The main fuses are located in the engine room.
9.4.1 Relay and fuse functions
Frame electrical centre
Relay Fuse Function

FMG Alternators 225 A (6-cylinder engine)
FMG Alternators 200 A (4-cylinder engine)
FM3 Glow 100 A
FM2 Frame centre 125 A
FM1 Cabin fuse 50 A
K71 F71 Working light, right
Main fuses in the engine room K72 F72 Working light, left
1 Alternators K73 F73 Working light, backward
2 Glow K74 F74 Working light, tree top
3 Frame electrical centre K75 F75 Working light, forward
4 Cabin fuse
K76 F76 Working light, crane
K77 F77 Working light, crane
K78 F78 Reserve position
F81 Vacuum pump
F82 24 V connector (repair light)
F83 Refuelling pump
F84 Main current switch indicator light +
Reserve position
222
9 Electrical system
Relay Fuse Function

F85 Fuel filter heating
F86 Extinguishing system (optional equip-
ment)
K87 F87 Additional hydraulic cooling
K88 F88 Cabin tilt
F90 Main current relay
F91 Extinguishing system (optional equip-
ment)
F92 Heater
F93 Heater clock
(and SCR readiness *))
F94 Air conditioning
*) If the machine is equipped with an engine that meets the

Euromot 3B emission limits.
9.5 Main current switch

The main current switch is located below the cabin door. The
main current switch controls the battery cut-out relay which
is located near the batteries.
The main current from the battery is divided through the

battery cut-out relay on the engine circuit (starter motor,
alternators and engine control unit), on the cabin main fuse
(FM1 50 A), and on the main fuse of the frame electrical
1 Main current switch
2 Emergency stop button centre (FM2 125 A).
3 Current take-off plug
From the battery, before the main current switch and battery
cut-out relay, 'continuous' current is divided through their own
fuses to various auxiliary systems, such as the extinguishing
system, air conditioner, additional fuel-operated heater
(Webasto) and SCR module.
An emergency stop button and current take-off plug are loc-

ated next to the main current switch.
Battery cut-out relay
223
9 Electrical system
9.6 Batteries
9.6.1 Starting batteries

There is a 24 V (negative earth) electrical system in the
machine. There are two 12 V batteries connected in series,
capacity 180/185 Ah. The batteries are located in the battery
casing in the machine's right side bumper.
The machine is equipped with two charging alternators con-

Starting batteries
nected in series:
● 2 pcs 24 V 80 A (4-cylinder engine)
● 2 pcs 24 V 100 A (6-cylinder engine)
When disconnecting battery cables, always disconnect the

earthing cable first. When connecting battery cables, always
connect the earthing cable last.
Do not switch the battery connecting poles. Incorrect connec-

tion can destroy the charging alternator and damage the
whole electrical system of the machine.
When charging the batteries with auxiliary current or in case

of auxiliary starting with another machine, follow the separate
instructions described in the Auxiliary starting current chapter
in the Driving instructions section of this manual.
224
9 Electrical system
9.6.2 Cabin battery 12 V
2 Cabin battery
3 Main fuse
The battery is located inside the right side casing (1) of the
cabin.
The main battery fuse (3) is located in the positive terminal

wire of the cabin battery.
225
9 Electrical system
9.7 Grounding the electrical system

The cabin's grounding points are located under the lid (2)
shown in the picture. The grounding point can be found by
the following method. Open the locking screws (1) on the
casing lid, remove the lid (2). The grounding point is located
on the cabin's vertical column. When checking the machine
grounding, make sure that the bolts are tightly fastened,
clean, and free of corrosion.
Grounding points
1 Casing lid locking screw
2 Casing lid
3 Grounding points
226
9 Electrical system
9.8 Sensors
9.8.1 Engine sensors
1 Oil temperature sensor

2 Oil pressure sensor
3 Fuel temperature sensor
4 Coolant temperature sensor
5 Boost pressure sensor and boost pressure temperature sensor
6 Camshaft angle sensor
7 Crankshaft angle sensor
8 Oil level sensor
9 Air pressure sensor in the engine control unit (ECU)

the Euromot 3B emission limits, refer to the separate
instructions titled Selective Catalytic Reduction, SCR in
Section Components for the sensors of the exhaust gas
purification system.
227
9 Electrical system
9.8.2 Other sensors in the machine

● Hydraulic oil temperature sensor, on the side of the
hydraulic oil container
● Return filter sensor for the degree of blockage, on filter
frame
● Hydraulic oil level alarm, on the upper part of the
hydraulic oil container (if the oil level drops too low, gives
an alarm through the buzzer)
● Hydraulic motor rpm sensor, in drive motor
● Gear position sensor, in drive motor
● Coolant lower limit sensor, on the lower part of the
expansion tank
● Air filter sensor for the degree of blockage, in the air pipe
of the air filter
● Drive transmission feed pressure lower limit pressure
switch, on the filter stem of the drive pump
● Air conditioner sensor
● Temperature sensor
● Fuel refuelling pump upper limit sensor (optional equip-
ment), on fuel tank cover
● Fuel gauge sensor, also in the same sensor fuel low limit
alarm. On fuel tank cover.
● Hydraulic steps sensor (warns if the steps are not fully
in the up position), next to the joint of hydraulic steps
● Parking brake pressure switch, in the valve block under
the cabin
● Brake pressure lower limit pressure switch, in the valve
block under the cabin
● Automatic parking brake pressure switch, in the valve
block under the cabin
● Harvester circuit pressure switch, in the valve block
under the cabin
● Sensor for the blockage of cooling circulation filter, on
the front frame
● Brake light sensor, bottom of the cabin
● Loader/crane control limits switches, in the loader/crane
● Seat direction limit switch, in the seat
● Operator identification limit switch, in the seat
● Loader/crane stability sensor, in the loader/crane base
● Brake charging pressure switch, in the valve block under
the cabin (forwarders).
228
Warranty conditions
Table of Contents
Warranty conditions .................................................................... 231
Warranty conditions
Warranty conditions
The following warranty conditions may contain differences from the warranty conditions of
different resellers.
Ponsse Plc provides the following warranty for its PONSSE products:
1. A new forest machine receives two (2) scheduled maintenance performed free of charge
in accordance with the warranty service programme. Note: Scheduled maintenance on
harvester heads / cranes / loaders is substituted with a free delivery service performed
during installation. This maintenance procedure is a condition for the continuation of the
warranty.
The warranty does not include filters, oils and other accessories replaced during main-
tenance. The customer must make an appointment for servicing in good time.
2. The operator of a new machine will be instructed in its operation and maintenance
according to the agreement.
3. The warranty periods are as follows:
- Engine: 3,000 hours.
- Forwarder, harvester, harvester head, crane, loader and Opti information system
equipment: 12 months or 2,000 hours of use, whichever comes first.
The warranty period begins on the date of delivery. The warranty is not in effect if the
product is sold to a new owner during the warranty period, unless otherwise agreed.
4. The warranty includes: raw material and manufacturing faults, replacement of faulty parts
with properly refurbished or new parts at Ponsse’s discretion, and labour involved in
repairing a fault or replacing a part.
5. The warranty does not cover:
- normally wearing parts, such as seals, hoses, connectors, chains, slide pads, cables
and sensors, except for the diameter sensor
- accessories such as lamps, filters, oils and fluids, etc.
- damage caused by incorrect operation or installation
- damage caused by structural changes made without the manufacturer's authorisation
- damage caused by a failure to adhere to the maintenance instructions
- damage caused by accidents
- loss of income or other indirect costs caused by downtime
- labour costs of the customer or its representative
- freight and travel expenses
6. The warranty will be valid only if:
- the scheduled maintenance has been performed by Ponsse or an authorised Ponsse
service outlet in accordance with the warranty service programme
- the customer contacts a Ponsse reseller or an authorised Ponsse service outlet
immediately when a fault appears
- repairs are made by a service employee authorised by Ponsse
- the customer submits a report on how the fault appeared
- the customer returns the damaged part(s) to a Ponsse reseller for inspection without
delay. The part(s) must be returned within two (2) weeks after the delivery of the
231
Warranty conditions
replacement part(s). A report form must be filled out and returned with the part(s).
Otherwise, the replacement part(s) will be subject to a charge.
7. Ponsse Plc does not approve any actions that change the engine control system or its
parameters with regard to engine power, torque or any other feature. If any changes in
the original control device made by replacing a component, software changes, or intro-
ducing separate additional control devices from any manufacturer in order to change the
engine's features are observed, the warranty will become fully void.
8. Making structural changes or replacing original parts, or using parts other than those
used by the manufacturer, is forbidden without the approval of Ponsse Plc.
9. The warranty for the new or repaired parts installed during the warranty period ends
when the original warranty period ends.
10. Parts replaced under warranty become Ponsse’s property as soon as the warranty con-
ditions have been approved.
11. Other repairs and service will be invoiced according to our price list in effect at the time.
12. The warranty decision is delivered to the customer in writing or, alternatively, in a digital
format.
232
APPENDICES
Table of Contents
Electric diagrams - optional equipment

Electric diagram - base machine
Hydraulic diagram
Hydraulic diagrams - Optional equipment
Tyre pressure
Webasto Thermo 90 S
2012 Ponsse Control II
Sit Right 2005 - Seat leveller for tilt compensation forward/backward
Sit Right 2005 - automatic sideways leveling
Be-Ge 3000
Airvent 9000
Clam bunk and winch control - Optional equipment
Lifting the front bogie
Defa DVS90 - Optional equipment
233
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
level sensor
level sensor
level sensor
level sensor
Right upper
Right lower
Left upper
Left lower
B
B A B A
X209 X210
B110 B111 B112 B113
C
bu bn bu bn bu bn bu bn
D bk bk bk bk - + - +
B114 P B115 P
9 8 7 12 11 10 3 2 1 6 5 4
X205
E S S
C C
X209 X210
G
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
X207 X208
I
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
J
X211
K XM3 17 16 19 18 1 10 2 8 4 5 XM3
Epec 2020
module +24V GND +5V ID
Drawn by Date Appr. Viim.

PONSSE Oyj VS0090D ELECTRIC DIAGRAM 1 / 12 Rev.
Ponssentie 22
PLa 2011-05-11 HYV
74200 VIEREMÄ
OPTIONS KL2010 ALS VS0090D
FINLAND
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
Hydraulic stake
Hydraulic stake
Hydraulic stake
Hydraulic stake
right cylinder
right cylinder
A
left cylinder
left cylider
Timber gate
Timber gate
Timber gate
Timber gate
Load space
Load space
Load space
Load space
right side
right side
left side
left side
Rear bunk
Rear bunk
Rear bunk
Rear bunk
ALS WS1
ALS WK1
ALS WS2
ALS WK2
ALS WS3
ALS WK3
ALS WS4
ALS WK4
ALS WS5
ALS WK5
ALS WS6
ALS WK6
ALS WS7
ALS WK7
ALS WS8
ALS WK8
B
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
X206
C
Y150 Y151 Y152 Y153 Y154 Y155 Y156 Y157 Y158 Y159 Y160 Y161 Y162 Y163 Y164 Y165
E 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
G
X211 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29
XM3 11 12 13 1 2 8 9 15 16 11 XM2 12 13 18 19 1 2 7 8 15 16 12 XM1
K
Epec 2020
module
L

Ponssentie 22
PLa 2011-05-20 HYV
74200 VIEREMÄ
OPTIONS KL2010 ALS VS0090D
FINLAND
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
battery z61
z62
A 10A 30K
z67
+
F61 z58
+
f9 7.5A F86 10A -
86
DAFO CP102
B 15C K62 -
85
30 86
12 11
K61
C X10
87a87 85
31C CP1021 z64
z65
4 5 6 2 1 9
9 1
D X102
31C
H100
X100
XY102 1
E
BK
BU
2 VIN- VIN+ A+ A-
Y102
BN
F J3B103
1 2 X111 4 3 2 1
X117
J2B103
X115 A
BK
G 2
+DAFO 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
E1021
CU102 X116
4
+ - E F
1
H
3 CV-01
Y1021
X114
BU 3 D B
BK 4
I 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
X112 3 4 XJ2B
BU
BK
J
K
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
J2B
L

Ponssentie 22
LLa 2011-06-03 HYV
74200 VIEREMÄ
OPTIONS KL2010 DAFO, SAFEMATIC VS0090D
FINLAND
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
z38 Webasto "GSM connect"

A
z39
X104
3 1
B X105
X105 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
+ + +
F42
C F35 F36
Wbasto start to clock

clock
Diag In
Webasto start out
Webasto start GSM

1A
GND / 31
+24V / 30
1A 3A
Dafo alram
- - -
Webasto "warm"
Diag Out
D 5
X105
z114
E 8 5/12G
z115
X30 5/18G
F XT1 XT2
1 5 4 6 7 3 2 8 9 5 1 2 3 6 4 7 9 8
1 3 1 3
G
X18B X18C
2 2
H
K100 K101 K102
86 30 86 30 86 30
-
I
F41 3A
85 87 87a 85 87 87a 85 87 87a
+
X105
K 9 X1A104 X2A104
1 3 5 12 3 17 18 4
POWER GPIO
31C
L EZ GSM Control
A104

Ponssentie 22
LLa 2011-06-03 HYV
74200 VIEREMÄ
OPTIONS KL2010 EXTRA PHONE, GSM CONTROL VS0090D
FINLAND
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
A
A105
DEFA DVS90 P7 HORN
SENSOR
B P6 MOTION
12/24V
out-
out+
out+
out+
out+
GND
in-
15C
z47 P3
+
C DP1 DP2 DP4
F23 1 3 2 4 2 4 8 7 6 1 4
-
Window
module
X10
D 15C 15C 15 3
X20
E
5 1 8 2 3
3 9 5 1
X101 P3 P2 P1 P4 X108 24V out 24V in
24V 12V 1 3 2 4 2 1 2 4 7 3 5 7 5 1
F
+
z114 z115 15A
4/28E 4/28E F108
-
G
86 30 86 85
30 87 85 87 87a
KD1
H 87a
85 87 87a KD3
KD4 86 30
J
X101 2 1 85 87 87a
X1011 a
9
D108 KD2
K k
86 30
1
HD1
L 2
31C

Ponssentie 22
LLa 2011-06-03 HYV
74200 VIEREMÄ
OPTIONS KL2010 Defa security VS0090D
FINLAND
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
7 3 9 1
X100
B
X100
Cool box
2 8
C 9 1
X1001
+
7,5A 3A
F150
-
D
E
A52
G24 24
T52 Connect unit

F
24V/12V 2 1
G12 12
H 5A + + + 5A + + +
F157 F158 F159 F151 F152 F153
- - - - - - Reversing
Reversing
camera 2 Display
camera 1
I
J 7 8 9 X1051 1 2 3
8 9 1 2
K X1052

Ponssentie 22
LLa 2011-06-06 HYV
74200 VIEREMÄ
OPTIONS KL2010 Extra 12V, cool box, camera VS0090D
FINLAND
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
A
X325
30F
1
1
C E325
F325 20A
D
S325 13
E 14
D325
K325 k
86 30
+
H325
F a
85 87 87a
-
11
G S325
12
H 3 4 2
+ M325
I
M
-
J
10
X325
31F
L

Ponssentie 22
LLa 2011-06-06 HYV
74200 VIEREMÄ
OPTIONS KL2010 Urea pump VS0090D
FINLAND
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
BKA
31C
A GND
WITHOUT OPTI: WITH OPTI:
Right hand switches

Finger buttons card
Left hand switches

Finger buttons card
CONNECT CONNECT TO OPTI’S 30C KL2010 KL2010
TO PRINTER FREE COM-PORT 24V
BKB
1 NO NO NO NO NO NO
1 2 3 4
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 C C C C C C
B 9 X103
1 9 NC NC NC NC NC NC
SL1 SL2 SL3 SR1 SR2 SR3
RS232
USB1 gnd
X3L 9 8 2 6 X3R 9 8 2 6
1 2 3 4 2 3 5 7 8
C 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 +
X1031
brn
blk
blk
blu
FX1 10A
-
1 2 4 3 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1
D 1 XBKA
XTHL XTHR
1 0
SX1
5
XB891
E 1 3 4 2
1 9 3 12 13 10 7 8 21 4 5
XD2 1 2 3 4 5 6 8 7 11 12 13 14 15 18 19 20 21 22 23
XH4
F
(Buzzer)DO/DI
DO/DI
DO/DI
DO/DI
turn sensor A
turn sensor B
+24V out
USB1 GND
USB2 GND
USB2 +5V
220R
220R
USB +5V
USB1 D-
USB1 D+
USB2 D-
USB2 D+
10k
10k
10k
+24V
gnd
gnd
RTS
CTS
gnd
gnd
DI
DI
TX
RX
DI
+5V
+5V
G
DISPLAY MODULE HUB MODULE
can L
can H
can H
can L
can H
can L
+24V
+24V
+24V
+24V
gnd
gnd
gnd
H
XD1 XH3 XH1 XH5
6 5 2 1 1 2 5 6 1 4 5 2 6 1 4
EMC3
wh
bn
gn
ye
XCAN EMC1
I
shield
GND
boom connector 9 10 8 7
Harting 10 XB891
7
J gnd 24Vin
gn
wh
ye
bn
9 24V/12V
T12
gnd 12Vout
2 boom-end connector 3 1 2 4
M12 XB892
K
wh
bk
bu
bn
3 1 2 4
sensor connector
M12
X87
L SCALE SENSOR -/2 +/1
BPA WITHOUT OPTI:

PRINTER POWER SUPPLY

Ponssentie 22
LLa 2011-06-06 HYV
74200 VIEREMÄ
OPTIONS KL2010 Ponsse stand alone scale VS0090D
FINLAND
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
BPA
BKA
B SCALE SENSOR sensor connector
M12
3
4 2 1
BKB
C
boom-end connector
XB892 M12
4 2 1 3
D
brn
blk
blk
blu
E 1 2 4 3
XBKA
boom connector
G
GND
Harting 10
1 3 4 2 XB891 7 8 10 9
120R
1 2
I 1 3 2 4 5 4 10 9 3
SCR
X131
XPC3
can1 L
can1 H
can1 L
can1 H
CHGND
+24V
SENSOR A
SENSOR B
GND
OPTI6 PC
K

Ponssentie 22
LLa 2011-06-06 HYV
74200 VIEREMÄ
OPTIONS KL2010 PC scale VS0090D
FINLAND
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
+
B F39 3 4 5
10A
-
CJ2
31C
C
H
scr
1 3 4 5 7 8
I XM4
GND GND 24VDC 24VDC CAN2 H CAN2 L
J
SUPPLY CAN
K 2020 module

Ponssentie 22
ERy 2011-09-28 HYV
74200 VIEREMÄ
OPTIONS KL2010 I/O expander, supply, CAN VS0090D
FINLAND
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
Winch Variable load area Clamp punk

B
C 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
Y130 Y129 Y128 Y62a Y62b Y63a Y63b Y120 Y121 Y126 Y127 Y122 Y123
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
X213
X214
X215
E
14 8 20 15 21 16 3 1 4 2 6 18 5 19 17 9 10 8 22 13 14 11 21 15 20 16 8 10
XM1 XM2
I
XM3’
+ + + + + + + + + + + + + AI/DI GND
J
Winch free Winch out Load area expand Bunks down Left clamp bunk close Right clamp bunk close Clamp bunk cable tensioning ID
Winch in Load area reduce Bunks up Left clamp bunk open Right clamp bunk open Clamp bunk cable loosening
K 2020 module

Ponssentie 22
ERy 2011-09-28 HYV
74200 VIEREMÄ
OPTIONS KL2010 I/O expander, Winch, clamp punk VS0090D
FINLAND
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
C 2 2 2 2
Y131 Y132 Y133 Y134
1 1 1 1
XM1 3 1 4 2 6 7 10 9
I
+ + + +
J
10W up 10W floating 1
10W down 10W floating 2
K 2020 module

Ponssentie 22
ERy 2012-10-09 HYV
74200 VIEREMÄ
OPTIONS KL2010 I/O expander, 10W VS0090D
FINLAND
Item Device Description Ref Location
31C Ground point 10/12B Cabin, front right
A52 Plug socket 12 V system 6/21F Cabin, right
A104 Telephone GSM remote control unit 4/25K Cabin
A105 Anti-theft alarm Anti-theft device, control unit 5/20B Cabin, front right
B114 Sensor Pressure sensor 1/27D Rear frame, ALS control valve
B115 Sensor Pressure sensor 1/29D Rear frame, ALS control valve
BKA Sensor Slewing sensor 8/23A,9/17B Crane
BKB Sensor Slewing sensor 8/23B,9/18C Crane
BPA Sensor Scales 8/25L,9/23B Harvester head
CJ2 Connector Craner control unit 10/16B Cabin, front right
D108 Diode Auxiliary work light cut-in 5/25K Cabin, electric center
D325 Diode Urea filling pump 7/16F Tank
E1021 Siren Fire extinguishing system 3/18G Cabin, right side pontoon
F23 Fuse Anti-theft device 5/13C Cabin, electric center
F35 Fuse Phone 4/13C Cabin, electric center
F39 Fuse CAN-I/O expander 10/14B Cabin, front right
F41 Fuse Phone 4/13I Cabin, electric center
F42 Fuse Antenna amplifier 4/18C Cabin, electric center
F61 Fuse Central lubrication Safematic 3/29A Cabin, electric center
F86 Fuse Fire extinguishing system 3/22B El. center on the frame
F108 Fuse Auxiliary work light cut-in 5/29G Cabin, electric center
F150 Fuse Voltage reducer 6/15D Cabin, electric center
F151 Fuse 12 V system 6/15H Cabin, electric center
F325 Fuse Urea filling pump 7/15D Tank
FX1 Fuse Scales 8/20C Cabin, electric center
H100 Indication light Central lubrication Safematic 3/30D Cabin, ceiling
H325 Indication light Urea filling pump 7/14F Tank
HD1 Indication light Anti-theft device 5/15L Cabin, ceiling
J2B Central lubrication Safematic OPTIO 3/28K Front frame, front right
K61 Relay Central lubrication Safematic 3/29C Cabin, electric center
K100 Relay GSM remote control unit 4/24I Cabin, front right
Suunn. Pvm/Date Hyv. Viim.

PONSSE Oyj VS0090D FUNCTION LIST 1 / 3 Rev.
2013-12-21
Ponssentie 22 OPTIONS KL2010 VS0090D VS0090DENG
74700 VIEREMÄ
FINLAND
K325 Relay Urea filling pump 7/15F Tank
KD1 Relay Drive brake charge relief 5/12H Cabin, electric center
KD2 Relay Auxiliary work light cut-in 5/27K Cabin, electric center
KD3 Relay Auxiliary work light cut-in 5/28H Cabin, electric center
KD4 Relay Auxiliary work light cut-in 5/25H Cabin, electric center
M325 Pump Urea filling pump 7/17I Urea container
S325 Switch Urea filling pump 7/15E,7/15G Tank
SX1 Switch Scales 8/20D Cabin, side panel
T12 Unit Voltage reducer 8/29J Cabin, electric center
T52 Unit Voltage reducer 6/15F Cabin, electric center
X3L Connector Steering lever, left 8/26B Seat
X3R Connector Steering lever, right 8/29B Seat
X18B Telephone Measuring device 4/14G Cabin, rear left
X18C Telephone Measuring device 4/16G Cabin, rear left
X131 Connector Scales 9/18I Cabin
X205 Connector ALS load space position sensors 1/18E Rear frame
X206 Connector Ground potential 2/19C Rear frame
X207 Connector Ground potential 1/17I Rear frame
X208 Connector Voltage potential 24V 1/20I Rear frame
X209 Connector Pressure sensor 1/27C Rear frame, ALS control valve
X210 Connector Pressure sensor 1/29C Rear frame, ALS control valve
X211 Connector ALS load space control 1/25J Rear frame
X213 Connector Winch 11/13E Rear frame
X214 Connector Load area expand 11/19E Rear frame
X215 Connector The left clamp arm of the clamp bunk 11/25E Rear frame
XB891 Connector Scales 8/25J,9/21G Crane
XB892 Connector Scales 8/25K,9/23D Boom end
XBKA Connector Scales 9/18E Crane
XD1 Connector Scales 8/15H Cabin
XM1 Connector CAN-I/O expander 2/26K,11/13I Hydraulic container
XM2 Connector CAN-I/O expander 2/18K,11/22I Fuel tank
XM3 Connector CAN-I/O expander 1/23K Hydraulic container
XM4 Connector CAN-I/O expander 10/14I Hydraulic container
XPC3 Connector CAN connection 9/23I Cabin
XTHL Connector Scales 8/26D Seat

2013-12-21
74700 VIEREMÄ
FINLAND
XTHR Connector Scales 8/29D Seat
Y62a Valve Load area expand 11/17C Rear frame
Y62b Valve Load area reduce 11/19C Rear frame
Y63a Valve Bunks down 11/20C Rear frame
Y63b Valve Bunks up 11/21C Rear frame
Y102 Valve Fuel 3/18E Front frame, rear left
Y120 Valve The left clamp arm of the clamp bunk 11/22C Rear frame
Y121 Valve The left clamp arm of the clamp bunk 11/24C Rear frame
Y122 Valve Clamp bunk cable tensioning 11/27C Rear frame
Y123 Valve Clamp bunk cable loosening 11/29C Rear frame
Y126 Valve The right clamp arm of the clamp bunk 11/25C Rear frame
Y127 Valve The right clamp arm of the clamp bunk 11/26C Rear frame
Y128 Valve Winch cable out 11/15C Rear frame
Y129 Valve Winch cable in 11/14C Rear frame
Y130 Valve Winch brake release 11/13C Rear frame
Y131 Valve 10W up 12/13C Rear frame
Y132 Valve 10W down 12/14C Rear frame
Y133 Valve 10W floating 12/15C Rear frame
Y134 Valve 10W floating 12/17C Rear frame
Y150 Valve ALS load space, right side cylinder WS1 2/14E Rear frame, ALS control valve
Y151 Valve ALS load space, right side cylinder WK1 2/14E Rear frame, ALS control valve
Y152 Valve ALS load space, left side cylinder WS2 2/15E Rear frame, ALS control valve
Y153 Valve ALS load space, left side cylinder WK2 2/16E Rear frame, ALS control valve
Y154 Valve ALS load space, right side hydraulic bunk pipe WS3 2/17E Rear frame, ALS control valve
Y155 Valve ALS load space, right side hydraulic bunk pipe WK3 2/17E Rear frame, ALS control valve
Y156 Valve ALS load space, left side hydraulic bunk pipe WS4 2/18E Rear frame, ALS control valve
Y157 Valve ALS load space, left side hydraulic bunk pipe WK4 2/21E Rear frame, ALS control valve
Y158 Valve ALS load space, log gate WS5 2/21E Rear frame, ALS control valve
Y159 Valve ALS load space, log gate WK5 2/22E Rear frame, ALS control valve
Y160 Valve ALS load space, log gate WS6 2/23E Rear frame, ALS control valve
Y161 Valve ALS load space, log gate WK6 2/24E Rear frame, ALS control valve
Y162 Valve ALS load space, rear bunk movement WS7 2/24E Rear frame, ALS control valve
Y163 Valve ALS load space, rear bunk movement WK7 2/25E Rear frame, ALS control valve
Y164 Valve ALS load space, rear bunk movement WS8 2/26E Rear frame, ALS control valve
Y165 Valve ALS load space, rear bunk movement WK8 2/27E Rear frame, ALS control valve
Y1021 Valve Extinguishing material, container 3/18H Cabin

2013-12-21
74700 VIEREMÄ
FINLAND
Electrical diagrams for a machine equipped
with the 3A engine
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
FM3 +
FM
A
FMG FM2 125A FM1 50A 100A
225A
+ 30K 30C
z30 30K
B 14/12C
z21
4/16E
88a 85 z20
4/20A
P 0 1 2 3 f4 10A
2 3
KS1 30-58 X X 2/15F
C
30-15/54 XXX z11 X10
88 86 30-19 X 4/13C
3
30-17 X 6 9 4
X101 z14
D
0 1 30-50a X X60 4/12K
1 2
- S1
15 19 17
5A
F90
f90
4 0 1 2
+ P 3
E
11/16A
2
X62A
ADM2 30C
+ 3 2
30 58 50a X62D X62C
12V X62F MB-diag
G3 S10
2 1 12 10 9
F f1
14 5 1 86 30
- 2/13F 15A
z36 K1
8/17B 31C
z12 85 87
4/18C
G 1 1
H7 H8
2 2 D14 X601 a k
15C
a k 31C
D15 1 D13
a k
H k a D17
+
12V
G4
X61
I 10 9 11 4 7 16 5 14 12 13
J
85 88
31Bw 31K
KE1
15/3
BS/4
15/3
BS/4
M1b
L/2
W/1
L/2
K 30 50 B+ B+ 8 13 12 5 6 15 9 11
86 88a
G1b G2b
M G G XMB
+
G1 3 G2 3 RE1
31A M1
L -
31E 31B 31Cb 31A

PONSSE Oyj VS0089C ELECTRIC DIAGRAM 1 / 34 Rev.
Ponssentie 22
VKo 2009-04-27 HYV
74200 VIEREMÄ
FORWARDERS 3A KL2010 OPTI6 Main circuit VS0089C
FINLAND
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
30C
15C
D + + + + + + + + + + + +
F2 F4 F6 F39 F8 F10 F12 F14 F16 F18 F20 F22
10A - 10A - 7,5A - (3A) - 15A - 7,5A - 15A - 7,5A - 7,5A - 10A - 15A - 10A -
E + + + + + + + + + + +
F1 F3 F5 F7 F9 F11 F13 F15 F17 F19 F21
15A - 10A - 7.5A - 3A - (7,5A) - 15A - 5A - 10A - (10A) - 3A - 7,5A -
F
f1 f3 f4 f5
f5’ f6 f7 f9 f10 f11 f12 f14 f15 f17 f18 f21 f22
1/18F 8/16B 1/22C 33/23B 12/12B 3/12B 32/19J 34/18F 19/13C 5/26B 18/12H 12/12B 32/23I 26/18B 7/22K 25/26A
33/23B
f2 f8 f131 f16 f19

1 2 27/23A
13/15C 8/21A 7/28K 7/21E
G
f201 f81 f132 f161 f191
27/23A
10/20A 18/20C 12/27B 27/20G
S25
H
I 4 5
31C

Ponssentie 22
VKo 2010-11-15 HYV
74200 VIEREMÄ
FORWARDERS 3A KL2010 OPTI6 Cabin electric unit VS0089C
FINLAND
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
Crane node
A
CJ1 TJ5
5 12 6 11 18 17 16 15
B XD1BC XD1AB
f7 Without OPTI
2/17F R120
31C
R8
C
XD1C scr scr XD1B Gnd XD1A
2 1 2 1 1 2
RJ45 USB1
7 21 8 15 23 3 4 5 1 6 7
XPWR XAC4 Gnd XD1D
E 1 2
6 3 2 1 1 2 3 4
SJ1
+24V
arcnet -
arcnet +
arcnet -
arcnet +
GND
gnd
gnd
gnd
gnd
gnd
Gnd
F 12 18 19 11
HUB 8 XD2
10
arcnet -
14
arcnet +
arcnet -
arcnet +
arcnet -
arcnet +
Tx+
D-
D+
V
d
+5
gn
17
B
Tx-
US
US
G 9
gnd
gnd
gnd
Rx+
16 Rx-
XAC1 4 5 3 XAC2 4 5 3 XAC3 4 5 3 XD1H

H 1 7
Arcnet+
2 1
2 8
XD1G scr Arcnet-
I Gnd
2 1 2 1
*) scr
XD1E scr XD1F
6 7 5
GND XD1F
J X90
1
Gnd
x7611
33/25B
24Vin
GND
scr 2 DESD
XPC2
R120
K 6 7 5 XD1
5 1
X89 AJ1scr 31 32
7 13 14 8 S89
XPC2 X7611:1 1 1a
Harvester node AJ1
z100 33/23E
L 17/17K
OPTI 6 PC X7611:2
Active axel node
33/24B
SP1
Ponssentie 22
ERy 2010-11-15 HYV
74200 VIEREMÄ
FORWARDERS 3A KL2010 OPTI6 ArcNet VS0089C
FINLAND
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
f53 f52
9/11A
17/18A
A + +
F52 F50
z20
7,5A - 1/20B 7,5A -
B 9
5 6 10
AD1
S11 32/25B
1 0 AD1
z11 10 1 7 2 8 9 z57
C 1/22C
z1 32/24B
8 7
27/27G
z12 z5
1/19G 26/20B 6 5
11 86 30 86 30 86 30 86 30
z4
D S2 K51a K51b K52 5/15K 4 3 K50
12
85 87 87a 85 87 87a 85 87 87a z3 85 87 87a
2 1
z21
E 1/26B
5 z58
32/29H
F X10 31C
86 30
APBS
K60
G
ADM-2 85 87 87a
1
X62B z22 z2
S3 APBS 18/15H 5/19B
2 1
H 8
X602
X10 7,5A +
I 6 F51
- 13 8 9 14 1 10 33
X40 31C
J
11 13
1
1 1 1
z14
1/27D B60 B4 Y31 Y31b Y32
APBS
K 2
2 2 2
12 14
L
31A 31A

Ponssentie 22
VKo 2009-04-27 HYV
74200 VIEREMÄ
FORWARDERS 3A KL2010 OPTI6 Emergency & pressure circuit VS0089C
FINLAND
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
Z27
A X82
12/21D 4 z28
z82
z34 32/24D
17/25C
27/23C 15A
X69
1 5 5 z2 4/29G f12 2/22F
X60 z77 z92 Gnd
B 17/20D 11/28G X80

X67D 5 7 3 2
31C
1 7 9
1 0
1
C 5 10
S70 X602 X601 X60
1 4 6
31C
D
1 2 5 8 4 14 15 16 13 7
TJ5 TJ2 TJ1
Opticontrol Transmission Unit OTU

F R F
G TESD
10 TJ4 TJ1
1 8 7 9 16 4 18 3
H
z7 33
26/18B
I
X60 X61
3 8 7 17 18
J 31C
z324 1 1
12/29D
Y36 Y37
X61
2 2
K z3 z7a 6 28 29 27
4/24D 9/21F
1 1
L Y33 Y34
31A
2 2

Ponssentie 22
VKo 2009-04-28 HYV
74200 VIEREMÄ
FORWARDERS 3A KL2010 OPTI6 OTU transmission unit VS0089C
FINLAND
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30

B
RPM
C
V+
V-
TJ1
TJ2 1 10 3 12 11 13 14
D
X61
R10 R13
I B B
25 24 26 23
C A C A
R10 R13
J X612
scr
4 3 5
K 3
1 4
B12
L

Ponssentie 22
VKo 2009-05-26 HYV
74200 VIEREMÄ
FINLAND
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
B OTU Opticontrol Transmission Unit
TJ4 TJ1 TJ5

D 2 3 4 2 17 5 12 13 3 11 4 10
f19
2/28G
E X601
2 9 8 7 5
X602
X20
19 22 24 14
G X61
15 19 22 30 31 21 8 32 20
z6
Elephant 12/24G
2 2 3 1
H B26 B15 B13 B16
3 1
X612 X612 P
1 2
1 2
1 2 6 7 8
I
2
b5
1 1 11/28K
1 1 1 1
E6 M
2 2
J Y35
Y55 2 Y47 2 Y48 2 2 B51 B52
1 X20
1 1 20 25 17
K 2 2
31A 31A
f21 f16
2/29F
31C 2/25G

Ponssentie 22
VKo 2009-04-28 HYV
74200 VIEREMÄ
FINLAND
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
A f131
2/23G
z36
1/16F X601
B 2 X602
z110
18/17H
f3 3
10A
2/14F
z111
C 18/17G
1 1 4
1
H10 H18 H17
X60
1 z112
2 2 2 2 18/14H
5
D H1
2
6 z113
18/12G
E 1 7 4 5 6 6
X62A
X62A X62A X62D

F RPM
OTU ADM2 PLD

G
TJ2 X62A X62C X62B X62A X62C XMB

H 3
18 6 17 19 20 21 1 10 3 13 14 15 2 1
CAN
J 4 5 6 1 2 3 X61
X62G
31 3 2 1
31C
L

Ponssentie 22
VKo 2009-05-11 HYV
74200 VIEREMÄ
FORWARDERS 3A KL2010 OPTI6 OTU AMD PLD VS0089C
FINLAND
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
15C
A Opticontrol Seat Unit

S26G 1 k S26H 1 k z726 S26J 1 k S26K 1 k
25/29E
10A
f52 f57
4/28A 11/21A
+
2 a 2 a 2 SJ2 1 2 a 2 a
B F57
15A +
SP3
- X93G X93H X93J X93K
F58 86 30
15A 5
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 X761 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
- K67
C
85 87 87a
XP2
+1 +2
D +3 +4
31Cr 31Cs
E OSU
X76 +24V
1 3 2 7 9 z93
19/21A
2 4 10 6 8
F
z7a
AD2 5/16K AD2
1 3 9 5 7
86 30 86 30 86 30 86 30 86 87 87a 86 87 87a
K57 K58 K59 K66 K64 K65

H
85 87 87a 85 87 87a 85 87 87a 85 87 87a 85 30 85 30
I 2 3 4 5 6 7
K K
X103 X103
D10 D11
X1031 X1031
1 7 3 A 2 1 A 1 3 1 2 3 1 2 3
9 3
J X26 X26
X16E X16T
M8
M M9
M M11 M
+
M10 M
+
M M
K M14 M15
Front - Rear -
GND GND
5 5 X26 X1031
9 8
X103
L
31C
Ponssentie 22
VKo 2009-04-28 HYV
74200 VIEREMÄ
FORWARDERS 3A KL2010 OPTI6 Window washers VS0089C
FINLAND
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
A
30C
f201
2/14G
z56 15C
B 18/20C 1
1 X30
H2
2
f63
C 12/22A
+ 5A
F63 H51 1 H50 1 H49 1
12 14
D -
2 2 2
AD1
E 11 13
X30
2 9
F
Z17
86 30 12/19D
K63
Z19
G 12/13B
85 87 87a
9 4 3
z66 S21
32/27J 201
10 8 2 7 1
H
Z32
12/14F
a
1
I D18
k
E2
2 z101
33/27G
J 2
S30
1
31C
K
31C

Ponssentie 22
VKo 2009-04-28 HYV
74200 VIEREMÄ
FORWARDERS 3A KL2010 OPTI6 Safety window, interior lights VS0089C
FINLAND
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
f90 f57 f54

A Z23 1/13E 9/13A 32/27G
12/27C
+ + + +
20A
F93 5A F92 F91 10A F94 +
20A 20A
- - - - F54
B X10 -
10
f93
32/23I
C
X10
z62 3 f37
1 11 32/17H
16/14B
z26 1
D f37’ 13/16B H191
16/13B z29 X192
X14 Timer
z43 13/15E 2
12/25A
z42
E 7 8 2 4 12
17/18E
z75
K54 16/13B
85 87 87a
E15
F
86 30 X191
M
1
8 2 6 Air conditioning
16 15
G Z30
3 9 5
X104 31C
12/27G z92
4 3 7 AD1 5/17B
H
16 18
X20
I 31C
X10
9 7 8 1 4
rd/wh
bl/wh
J B5 P
2 1
bk/wh
bl/rd
4 3 5 2 8 1 9
+ 2 3
b5
M 7/23I
K X1010 M 31K +
E13 Engine heater
-
M13 E5 M
L

Ponssentie 22
VKo 2009-04-28 HYV
74200 VIEREMÄ
FORWARDERS 3A KL2010 OPTI6 Air conditioning & heating system VS0089C
FINLAND
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
f63
A 10/16C
z43 f161
10A 7,5A + 11/20D 2/25G
f15 f6 Z19 F55 7,5A 7,5A
2/24F 2/17F10/18G z44
B - 30/13B
K55
(85) (86)
R1 R2
1 1 Z23
49a
11/15A
C 49 31
2 2
(87)
Z17 z25
10/18F 13/15C
S14 S15 Z27
D 1 2 9 1 7 9 5/13A
210 1 0
S24 z324
S13 S12
9 6 5 10 5 1 9 5/14J
3 6 8 10 5 10 1 0
6 8 z325
E 10 0 1 0 1 29/29G
8 2 7 1 9 7 1 5 10
Z32
10/18H
3
2 1
F X40 X20
5 H31 23
2 1
X20
H32 X201
3 4
G X20 8
2 1 z6
5 X20 Z30
7/29G
X201 11/17G
5 7
X202 X20
H 6
8
X203 5
X202 X201 X203
4 1 1 4 6
56b 56a 56b 56a
I X204
H4R H4L z81a
5 H4 H4 14/29K X203 X324 X325
z81 1 4 6 1 1
31 31
14/27L
E33 1 E324 E325
J X203 X201
1 4 6
X204
F R
X204 3 3 3
x204 2
29K
2 2
X324 X325
3 31E H16R H16L
K X202
x204
17J
L
31A
31K
Ponssentie 22
RPe 2007-03-07 HYV
74200 VIEREMÄ
FORWARDERS 3A KL2010 OPTI6 On road equipment VS0089C
FINLAND
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
B
z26
11/25D
f2 10A
2/14G
C
z25
12/21D
1 9 SP1 SP2
1 0
D
S16 GND GND
5 10 Switch Panel Switch Panel
E
z29
11/25D
F
31C
G 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2
X93A X93B X93C X93D X93E X93F
S26A S26B S26C S26D S26E S26F
H
Left Right Back Front Crane Crane
I X93A X93B X93C X93D X93E X93F

3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4
z50a z50b z50c z50d z50e z50f
14/12A 14/13A 14/15A 14/21A 14/23A 14/25A

Ponssentie 22
VKo 2009-05-18 HYV
74200 VIEREMÄ
FORWARDERS 3A KL2010 OPTI6 Control switches of work lights VS0089C
FINLAND
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
A
z50d z50e z50f
13/22I 13/23I 13/25I
z50a z50b z50c z135
13/17I 13/19I 13/20I
13/20I 32/15H
B
X20 z51
15/19B
7 8 9 15 11 12 13
C
z30
1/17B 30K
125A
D + F72 + F71 + F73 + F74 + F75 + F76 F77 + +

25A 25A 25A 20A X35 20A 20A 15A F84 15A
- - - - - - - -
K72 K71 K73 K74 K75 K76 K77

E 86 30 86 30 86 30 86 30 86 30 86 30 86 30 1
HS1
2
85 87 87a 85 87 87a 85 87 87a 85 87 87a 85 87 87a85 87 87a 85 8787a
85 K71b 85 K73b 85 K74b 85 K75b 85 K76b 85 K77b 85 k78 31K
F K72b 33/12E
31K
X1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 9 8
AMP-9
G X201
7
WITH DUAL REAR

X11 6 7
X203 EXTENSIONS & SKIDDERS
H 4 5 a XP XP 7
HN+ HP+
D35
k
XDU1
HV3 1 HV1 1 HO3 1 HO1 1 HN1 1 HN3 1 HP1 1
HT6 1
I 1
HT1 1 HT3 1 HT5 1
2 1 2 2 1 2 1 1 2 1 2 2 1 XDU2 XDU3
2 1
HH1 1 HE2 2
2 1 2 HT4 1 2
HV2 2 HO2 2 HH2 2 HE1 2 HN2 2 HP2 2
HT7 2
J 2
HT2 2 2
XP
X11 HF1 1 HF2 1 HF3 1
9 8 HPN-
2 3
K 2 2 2
31E 31F 31F
z81a
12/19I
31G z81
12/19I
L 31T

Ponssentie 22
RPe 2007-03-07 HYV
74200 VIEREMÄ
FORWARDERS 3A KL2010 OPTI6 Work lights, frame unit VS0089C
FINLAND
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
z51 z53
14/30B 31/13A
B
z61
32/18H
OPTION
C F81 10A F82 10A F85 15A F88 25A
D 2
X201
E 2 2
X202 86 30
X203
K88
85 87 87a
F 13
S59
14
+
G + +
XH1 HA1 HA2
- -
- 1
XS88
H
M88
+ 13 +
M 1 S88
M2 P M
I VAC
3 3 RE2 14
- -
X202 2
X203
XS88
2
J 3
X201
K
31F 31K 31C 31C 31K

Ponssentie 22
VKo 2009-04-28 HYV
74200 VIEREMÄ
FORWARDERS 3A KL2010 OPTI6 Vacuum pump, fuel filter heater VS0089C
FINLAND
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
A
31C1 31C
AC 24V batt 12V 12V
z75 f37’f37 f27 z40
11/21D 30/29D
11/22F 30/21D
B
+ +
C F38 F37
- -
1A 7,5A
D
7 1 6 9 8 5
X106
E
XCPW1 XCOM1
1 2 SCR 2 3 5
-/2 +/1
F GND +12V
Printer
X87
G
3 5 1 2 4 USB
GND
H 11 12 29 14 9 XPC2
XPC1 +12V GND RXD TXD GND
out COM RS232
24V IN
12V IN
GND
GND
HEATER
I
OPTI PC6
USB USB USB
J
K Mouse Keyboard

Ponssentie 22
RPe 2007-03-07 HYV
74200 VIEREMÄ
FORWARDERS 3A KL2010 OPTI6 OPTI6, measuring unit VS0089C
FINLAND
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
A
f53
4/18A
+
B F53
15A -
X81
z82
C 3 5/19A
z77
5/16B
OHU On/Off
D 86 30 2 8 1 7 9 1 7 2 8 9
1 0 1 0
5
K53 X80 S80 S50
X81
85 87 87a 5 10 5 6 10
E
z42
11/20E
31C
F
z72
4 34/15B
X80
z71 6
G 34/16B
X40
H 1
XY52
I 1 1
Y52a Y52b 2
2
J
2
5 6 7 1 2 3 4
XY52
z100
K 3/14L X89
31C 31A
Harvesterhead

Ponssentie 22
VKo 2010-03-01 HYV
74200 VIEREMÄ
FORWARDERS 3A KL2010 OPTI6 Harvester connection (DUAL) VS0089C
FINLAND
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
B
f132 z56
2/23G 10/13B
E30
C
Buzzer unit
EJ1 EJ2 EJ3

D
1
3 4 9 1 2 4 1 2 3 4 H19
2
Steering
E Wheel
G
z113 z15 z111 z73
8/26D 25/18H 8/26C 26/19B
H
f14 z112 z22 z110 z16
2/23F 8/26D 4/22G 8/26B 25/18H
31C
I

Ponssentie 22
VKo 2009-04-28 HYV
74200 VIEREMÄ
FORWARDERS 3A KL2010 OPTI6 Alarm buzzer VS0089C
FINLAND
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
A XP1
z93
9/30E
+1 +2
+3 +4
15A
C f11
2/21F
1
XS41
D
X79
31C
2 6
1 1 1 1
S49 S41 S46 S47

E
C C C C
B
1
8 6 13 13
2 3
F X76 B73 XS41
14 14 C
S79A S79B B72
A
X79
4 8
H
31Cs
12 18 11 10 4 1 10 4 11 7 5 2 3
SJ1 SJ4 SJ1 SJ4
I
AGnd
+24V
act.
J
EMCS
Opticontrol Seat Unit OSU

K

VS0089C ELECTRIC DIAGRAM 19 / 34 Rev.
PONSSE Oyj RPe 2007-03-07 HYV
FORWARDERS 3A KL2010 OPTI6 OSU seat unit VS0089C
Vieremä
FINLAND
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
C
R11 OUT R21 out
0V +5V + -
SC
D
XR11 XR21
E M12/5-p 1 4 3 2 2 M12/5-p 1 3
9 6 12 11 5 16
31Cs
SCR SCR
J
SJ1 SJ2 SJ1
+5V gnd
gnd +5V

L

Ponssentie 22
VKo 2009-04-28 HYV
74200 VIEREMÄ
FORWARDERS 3A KL2010 OPTI6 OSU seat unit, controls VS0089C
FINLAND
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
LEFT RIGHT
A
R22 R24 R23 R25

B
Y Y Y Y
C
X X X X
D
8 1 2 4 3 5 1 2 3 4 8 1 2 4 3 5 1 2 3 4
X94 X94T X95 X95T
E
G
1 2 4 3 5 6 1 2 4 3 5 6
8 8
X726 X729
22/15J 22/24J
H
I 31Cs
12 6 13 17 15 SC 1 18 17 8 9 7 2
SC
SJ4 SJ5
J
+5V 0V X Y Z +5V 0V X Y Z
K

Ponssentie 22
VKo 2010-08-11 HYV
74200 VIEREMÄ
FORWARDERS 3A KL2010 OPTI6 OSU seat unit, ball joystics VS0089C
FINLAND
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
A LEFT RIGHT
R22 R23
Z
Z
Y Y
X X
R26
E
1 2 6 4 3 5 8 X94T 2 3 4 1 2 6 4 3 5 8 X95T 2 3 4
G X94M X95M
+5V 0V 0V +5V +5V 0V 0V +5V
J
X726 X729
21/14H 21/23H

Ponssentie 22
VKo 2010-11-29 HYV
74200 VIEREMÄ
FORWARDERS 3A KL2010 OPTI6 OSU seat unit, mini joystics VS0089C
FINLAND
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
1 2 1 2 1 1a 1b 1a 1b
102 102 102 102
B 1 2
C 3 C S38 1 S39 1 102 1 2 102 1
S40 S48 S42
option S43 S44 S45
C C C
C S38 & S39 SWITCH

CONNECTIONS ONLY
WITH MINI JOYSTICS
option
D 1 3 2 4 7 9 8 10 5 1 10 8 9 7 4 2 3 5
X2A18 X2A19
X1:9 A19
24/12J A18 Key matrix
Key matrix deviding card
E deviding card
X1:10 X1:15 X1r:20
24/12J 24/16J 24/22J
X1:20 X1r:1 X1r:10
24/12J 24/28J 24/22J
X1:19 X1:11 X1:12 X1:14 X1:16 X1:17 X1:8 X1:13 X1:1 X1r:13 X1r:8 X1r:17 X1r:16 X1r:14 X1r:12 X1r:11 X1r:19 X1r:9
24/12J 24/14J 24/14J 24/14J 24/14J 24/16J 24/16J 24/16J 24/18J X1r:15 24/26J 24/26J 24/26J 24/24J 24/24J 24/24J 24/24J 24/22J 24/22J
24/26J
F
X1A18 X1A19
9 10 20 19 11 12 14 16 17 8 13 15 1 1 15 13 8 17 16 14 12 11 19 20 10 9
31Cl 31Cr
31Cs
I 13 7 1 14 12 6 16 11 10 5 4 3 SCL SCR 9 15 2 8
SJ3
SL0 SL1 SL2 SL3 RL0 RL1 RL2 RL3 RL4 RL5 RL6 RL7 SL7 SL6 SL5 SL4
J LEFT:
RIGHT: Mode1 Mode3 Cruise

K

L

Ponssentie 22
VKo 2010-11-11 HYV
74200 VIEREMÄ
FORWARDERS 3A KL2010 OPTI6 OSU basic matrix VS0089C
FINLAND
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
A A22 A23
S.A S.D S.B S.C S.F S.E S.A S.D S.B S.C S.F S.E
B S3.C S4.E S3.C S4.E

S2.D S1.B S2.D S1.B
9 8 1 2 3 6 5 7 4 X2A22 9 8 1 2 3 6 5 7 4 X2A23
C
1a 1b S38 & S39 SWITCH 1a 1b

102 102
CONNECTIONS ONLY
WITH BALL JOYSTICS
D
S38 1 S39 1
6 8 3 1 2 7 10 5 4 9 6 8 3 1 2 7 10 5 4 9
X2A20 X2A21
E
X3A20 X3A21
RL7 (ball) RL7 (ball)
SL2 RL0 RL1 RL2 RL4 SL3 RL3 RL5 RL6 SL6 RL0 RL1 RL2 RL4 SL7 RL3 RL5 RL6
RL3 (mini) RL3 (mini)
2 2
7 7
3 3
F 8 8
A20 4 4 A21
6 6
5 5
9 9
G
X1A20 2 1 11 12 10 9 7 15
X1A21 4 3 8 6
2 1 11 12 10 9 7 15 4 3 8 6
SC SC
H
2 1 11 12 10 9 7 15 4 3 8 6 20 2 1 11 12 10 9 7 15 4 3 8 6 20
X3A18 X3A19
I
X1r:11RL0 RL4
23/20F
23/22E
X1:11 RL0 X1:17 RL4 X1r:9 SL4 X1r:17
X1r:1
X1:1
23/12E 23/14F 23/17F 23/30F 23/27F 23/24F

X1:10 X1:12 RL1 X1:8 RL5 X1r:10SL5 X1r:12RL1 RL5
X1r:8
J 23/12E 23/15F 23/18F 23/29E 23/27F 23/24F
X1r:13
23/13E 23/16F 23/19F 23/29E 23/26F 23/23F
X1r:15
23/13F 23/16F 23/20E 23/28F 23/25F 23/22F
A18 A19
K Key matrix Key matrix
deviding card deviding card

Ponssentie 22
VKo 2010-11-11 HYV
74200 VIEREMÄ
FORWARDERS 3A KL2010 OPTI6 OSU basic matrix VS0089C
FINLAND
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
A
X76
f22 5
2/29F
15A
B
Opticontrol Seat Unit OSU + + +

C F724 10A F725 5A F726 10A
- - -
H L
D 33/25C
SJ2 z726
3 8 6 4 7 10 X727 9/23A
2 3
E
1 1 7 9
1 0
S37 S36
F
C 5 10
X76 X761
4 1 6 2 3 4
E36 M M111
G BK
4 6 5
27 28 29 X7612 X727
X40
H z16 z15
18/18H 18/15G
Y90
I
Y46a 1 Y46b 1 1
H3 X7612
3
2 2 2 BU
J
31Cs
K
31C

Ponssentie 22
VKo 2009-04-28 HYV
74200 VIEREMÄ
FORWARDERS 3A KL2010 OPTI6 OSU seat unit, drivers seat VS0089C
FINLAND
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
B f18 z7 z73 z4 z46

10A 5/17H
2/26F 18/18G 4/24D 27/25G
Steering Wheel
X7821 GND
C 1 2 3 4
3 2 3 4
X701
X70 X69
D
1 4 X783 2 4 2 X784 1 2 3 4 X782

3
GND
Steering Wheel Unit

G
H
3 2 4 1
X781
3 2 4 1
31C X71C
J
1 1
K
2 2
Y41b Y41a
L

Ponssentie 22
VKo 2009-04-28 HYV
74200 VIEREMÄ
FORWARDERS 3A KL2010 OPTI6 Steering wheel VS0089C
FINLAND
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
f81
A 2/19G
f8 15A
2/19G 31C
X131
B 1 2 3 4
X70
z131 1 2 8 9
21H z34
C 5/12A
31C
2 3 1 2 4 3
CJ1
CJ3
D
Opticontrol Crane Unit OCU

E
CJ3 10
6 1 CJ2 9 10 8 12 7 13 7 6 8 1 11 12
G f191 z46
26/21B X701
2/28G z1 1
X701 2 4/23C
z131
12C
H
X71E X71D
6 1 9 10 8 3 2 12 7 6 8 4 1 11 2 10 3 12
I XB
2 1 3 4
XB2
XB105e C A
2 3 2 3
J 1 1
1 1 B30 B27b 1 1 3 S/3
2 3 B48 P B25 P
B8 B14 2 1 3 4 P B2 P B9 P
SCR +/1 -/2
1 1
2 2 XB105 4 B17
K 2 2
- + B
XB2
B105
L Y X
31E

Ponssentie 22
VKo 2009-04-29 HYV
74200 VIEREMÄ
FORWARDERS 3A KL2010 OPTI6 OCU crane unit, sensors VS0089C
FINLAND
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
Y5B 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
Y3A Y2B Y38a Y38b Y40
C Y1A
1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 1 1
Y5A Y1B Y3B Y2A
1 1 1 1 31E
D
E
12 11 10 3 1 2 9 7 8 6 5 4 1 5 7
X71A X71F
F
15 3 9 18 1 2 17 4 8 13 7 11 11 5 1
CJ5 CJ4
H

J

Ponssentie 22
RPe 2007-03-07 HYV
74200 VIEREMÄ
FORWARDERS 3A KL2010 OPTI6 OCU crane unit, valves VS0089C
FINLAND
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
31E
A
2 4
XY9
B
Y6A Y6B
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
Y43a Y42a Y49a
Y61 Y9
2
C 1
Y43b
2 1
Y42b
2 1
Y49b
2 2 1 1 1 1 Y4B 1 Y7B 2 1 Y8B 2 1 2
Y60 Y10
1 1 1 1 1 Y4A 1 Y7A 1 Y8A 1
D
XY9
1 3
E
12 6 11 12 3 4 10 9 8 8 9 10 11 9 8 7 3 2 1 6 5 4 10 11
X71C
X71F X71C X71B
F
1 2 7 8
X77a z701
33/12B
X77b
G 1 2
z702 z325
5 6 12/30E
33/17B
X77b
X701 7
X77a
5 6 8 X701
H
9 10 3 4 18 7 15 17 6 12 16 14 2 8 14 12 6 16 5 10 16 17 18
I CJ4 CJ3 CJ4 CJ5 CJ3
R
J
K OCU Opticontrol Crane Unit

Ponssentie 22
VKo 2009-05-20 HYV
74200 VIEREMÄ
FORWARDERS 3A KL2010 OPTI6 OCU crane unit, valves VS0089C
FINLAND
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
z44 z45
12/25B 32/29J z38
B 33/21G
z39
85 87 87a 33/22G
C
K56 5A 15A + 3A 1A + 10A
+ + f27 +
86 30 F25 F27 16/14B
F24 F28 F26
k
30C - - - - -
D D6
z40
a
16/17B
XT51b
XT51a
MUTE
E
12 24
5 7 4 X17B 8
1
F -
15A RADIO/CD
F56
+ 3 4 5 6 4 3 1
A51
X17A
T51
G 24/12 2
X18A
2
H
7 5 6 3 4 X30
gnd gnd
XT51b
XT51a
G5 F95
J - + 25A z47
+ - + - + - + -
+ -
33/26G W3
H52A H52 H53 H53A
K
31C 31C

Ponssentie 22
VKo 2009-04-29 HYV
74200 VIEREMÄ
FORWARDERS 3A KL2010 OPTI6 12V equipment, audio, phones VS0089C
FINLAND
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
A
z53
15/21B
F83 25A
B
30F
Hydraulic oil refill switch box

Fuel refill switch box
X321 X322
D 1 1
F321 20A F322 20A
E
S321 13 S322 13
14 14
D321
D322
F
K321 k K322
86 30 86 30 k
H321 + H322 +
a a Connection with
85 87 87a 85 87 87a
G - - hydraulic oil tank
11 11
upper level sensor
S3211 X321 S3221 X322
H 12 2 12 2
X321 X322 X322
X321 + M321 X322 + M322 X322
3 4 M 3 4 M 3 4
I - -
+/1
S/3
+/1
S/3
J
B321 B322
K
-/2
-/2
31F 31F 31F
L

Ponssentie 22
RPe 2007-03-07 HYV
74200 VIEREMÄ
FORWARDERS 3A KL2010 OPTI6 Refill options VS0089C
FINLAND
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
Scale Reversing camera Extra +12/24 Winch and clamp

z57
B 15C
30C 15C z5 4/24C
4/24C
1 2 3 9
C X82
1 9 2 8 3 7
X103 X100 +
D F120 z28
5/16A
-
31C
E 1 2 3 4 5 7 8 9
X88
31C
F
Dafo Telecontrol + SCR Safematic

G
z135
15C 14/20A f54
z61 z89 11/23A
15/24B 33/12A
+
z62
H 11/19D
+ F61 10A
F86 10A X40 -
z58
- 5 2 4 4/22F
3 5
30 86 30 86
f93
I 11/17C
X108 12 11 K62 f17 K61
X10 2/26F
87a87 85 87a87 85
1 9
f9 z66 z45
J 3 2/20F 10/16H 30/15B
X10
9 1
9 2 1 4 5 6
X102 31C
K 31C 5 1 X104 9 X100

Ponssentie 22
RPe 2007-03-07 HYV
74200 VIEREMÄ
FORWARDERS 3A KL2010 OPTI6 Voltage supply for options VS0089C
FINLAND
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
A Display
z89
Side panel Seat
32/20H
z702 f5’
f5 x7611
29/14G X77b 2/16F X7611:2 3/29J
3/27L
B F87 15A 2/16F
z701
29/19G
1 7 2 8 5 6 X761
21 7
C X20 25/24D
X84A X7611
1 7 2 8 9
86 30
S32 1 9 1 2
D
K87 5 6 10
85 87 87a
E k78
31C
X7611:1
3/27L 31Cs
14/27F
15C
z38 z39
30/29B 30/27C
z47 z101
G 30/15J 10/22J
Extra phone Defa

+
H 1 3 25A
F23
-
I 5 X105
9
2
1 8 5 9
J M87 M 8
X101
X30
1
31C
31E 31C
W2
L

Ponssentie 22
RPe 2007-03-07 HYV
74200 VIEREMÄ
FORWARDERS 3A KL2010 OPTI6 Voltage supply for options VS0089C
FINLAND
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
A Regel valve
z71
17/22G
1 1
B
z72
17/22F Y56 2 Y57 2 Y58
A B C D E F G
C AJ1
J1
7 1 4 11 5 13 15 11
1 2 9
210
D
S90
AJ2
AJ2
AJ1
AJ1
AJ5
AJ5
AJ5
AJ5
3 6 8 10
E
AJ1
31C
X90
F X701 6 1 18 Opticontrol Active axle Unit OAU
f10
2/20F
GND
7 6
X80
G 12
AJ1
AJ5
AJ1
AJ5
AJ5
AJ5
AJ5
AJ5
AJ5
AJ5
AJ1
AJ5
AJ5
AJ5
H
1 1 9 18 4 10 17 12 8 7 3 16 2 6
9 7 JPG JGG
I X602
31A
9 7 1 3 2
J XB96
TJ5 TJ5 B98
rd gn bl 2 3 1 3 6 4 5 1
B96 B97
K OTU
Inclinometer Potentiometer GYRO

L

Ponssentie 22
VKo 2009-04-28 HYV
74200 VIEREMÄ
FORWARDERS 3A KL2010 OPTI6 Option: OAU active axle unit VS0089C
FINLAND
15C Voltage point Voltage - after ignition lock 1/29G Cabin
30C Voltage point Voltage - after main current switch 1/29E Cabin
30F Voltage point Refuelling pumps 31/14B Tank
30K Voltage point Voltage - after main current switch 14/13C El. center on the frame
31A Ground point Ground potential 1/12L Motor, right
31B Ground point Ground potential 1/12L Front frame
31Bw Ground point Ground potential 1/13J Motor, left
31Cb Ground point Ground potential 1/13L Cabin, front right
31Cs Ground point Ground potential 20/29I Seat
31E Ground point Ground potential 1/11L Front frame
31F Ground point Ground potential 14/26K Tank
31K Ground point Ground potential 1/14J,14/12F El. center on the frame
A18 Printed circuit board Input signals 23/16E Seat
A20 Printed circuit board Input signals 24/16F Control handle, left
A21 Printed circuit board Input signals 24/26F Control handle, right
A22 Printed circuit board Input signals 24/16B Control handle, left
A23 Printed circuit board Input signals 24/26B Control handle, right
A51 Plug socket 12 V system 30/29G Cabin, right
AD1 Diode 4/25D Cabin, electric center
AD2 Diode Windscreen wiper/-washer 9/17F El. center
B2 Sensor Hydraulic filter, cooling 27/20J Front frame, rear left
B4 Sensor Drive brake load pressure 4/19K Front frame, rear left
B5 Sensor Air conditioner 11/27J Front frame, front left
B8 Sensor Hydraulic oil temperature 27/12J Hydraulic container
B9 Sensor Drive feed pressure 27/24J Front frame, rear left
B12 Sensor Hydraulic motor r.p.m. 6/25K Hydraulic motor
B13 Sensor Coolant low limit 7/27H Expansion tank
B14 Sensor Fuel gauge 27/14J Fuel tank
B15 Sensor Step position indicator 7/25H Bumber casing, left
B16 Sensor Drive brake light 7/29H Cabin, under
B17 Sensor Crane control 27/22J Crane
B25 Sensor Parking brake pressure 27/28J Front frame, rear right
B26 Sensor Air filter blockage 7/23H Air filter
B27b Sensor Hydraulic oil low limit 27/18J Hydraulic container
B30 Sensor Hydraulic return filter 27/16J Hydraulic container
B48 Sensor Brakes pressure lower limit 27/26J Front frame, rear left

PONSSE Oyj VS0089C FUNCTION LIST 1 / 10 Rev.
2012-10-17
Ponssentie 22 FORWARDERS 3A KL2010 OPTI6 VS0089C VS0089C_ENG
74700 VIEREMÄ
FINLAND
B51 Sensor Gear information 7/20J Front frame, rear left
B60 Sensor Automatic Parking Brake System 4/17K Front frame, rear left
B72 Sensor Seat direction 19/21F Seat
B73 Sensor Driver identification 19/19F Seat
B96 Sensor Active dampening 34/23K Front frame
B98 Aerial Active dampening 34/28K Front frame
B105 Sensor Active tilt 27/15L Crane
B321 Sensor Fuel filling pump 31/14J Fuel tank
D6 Diode Voltage reducer 30/12D Cabin, electric center
D10 Diode Front window washer 9/16I Cabin, front
D11 Diode Rear window washer 9/19I Cabin, rear
D13 Diode Battery, stand-by 1/22H Cabin, electric center
D18 Diode Cab interior light 10/21I Cabin, left
D35 Diode Working lights 14/22H Cabin, on the roof
E2 Solenoid Emergency exit 10/15I Cabin, front right
E5 Compressor Air conditioner 11/27K Motor, left
E6 Motor Cooler fan 7/18J Motor
E33 Buzzer Horn 12/27J Front frame, front right
E36 Resistor Seat warming 25/27G Seat
E324 Buzzer Horn 12/28J Front frame
E325 Buzzer Horn 12/30J Rear frame
EJ1 Buzzer Buzzers 18/13D Under control panel
EJ3 Buzzer Warning buzzer - loud sound 18/18D Under control panel
F1 Fuse Ignition switch 2/13E Cabin, electric center
F2 Fuse Working light switches 2/14D Cabin, electric center
F3 Fuse ADM engine cab unit 2/14E Cabin, electric center
F4 Fuse Engine diagnostics 10A 2/15D Cabin, electric center
F5 Fuse Opticontrol display 2/16E Cabin, electric center
F6 Fuse Instrument panel, back light 2/17D Cabin, electric center
F7 Fuse Hub 2/17E Cabin, electric center
F8 Fuse Craner control unit 2/19D Cabin, electric center

2012-10-17
74700 VIEREMÄ
FINLAND
F10 Fuse Reserve position 2/20D Cabin, electric center
F11 Fuse Seat node 2/21E Cabin, electric center
F12 Fuse Drive transmission, central unit 2/22D Cabin, electric center
F13 Fuse Hazard warning light 2/23E Cabin, electric center
F14 Fuse Buzzers 2/23D Cabin, electric center
F15 Fuse Driving lights 2/24E Cabin, electric center
F16 Fuse Brake lights 2/25D Cabin, electric center
F17 Fuse Reserve position 2/26E Cabin, electric center
F18 Fuse Electric steering wheel steering 2/26D Cabin, electric center
F19 Fuse Sensors 2/27E Cabin, electric center
F22 Fuse Seat heater 2/29D Cabin, electric center
F23 Fuse Anti-theft device 33/26H Cabin, electric center
F25 Fuse Radio 30/19C Cabin, electric center
F26 Fuse Printer 30/29C Cabin, electric center
F37 Fuse Opti 16/14C Cabin, electric center
F50 Fuse Drive brake charging 4/28A Cabin, electric center
F51 Fuse Engine shut-off 4/15I Cabin, electric center
F52 Fuse Drive brake charge relief 4/19A Cabin, electric center
F53 Fuse Measuring device 17/19B Cabin, electric center
F54 Fuse Air conditioner 11/22B Cabin, electric center
F55 Fuse Direction indicator light 12/23B Cabin, electric center
F56 Fuse 12 V system 30/15F Cabin, electric center
F57 Fuse Windscreen wipers 9/12B Cabin, electric center
F58 Fuse Side window wiper 9/12B Cabin, electric center
F61 Fuse Central lubrication Safematic 32/28H Cabin, electric center
F63 Fuse Emergency exit 10/15D Cabin, electric center
F71 Fuse Working light, right 14/14D El. center on the frame
F72 Fuse Working light, left 14/12D El. center on the frame
F73 Fuse Working lights to the back 14/17D El. center on the frame

2012-10-17
74700 VIEREMÄ
FINLAND
F74 Fuse Working light, tree top 14/20D El. center on the frame
F75 Fuse Working lights forward 14/23D El. center on the frame
F76 Fuse Working lights, crane 14/24D El. center on the frame
F77 Fuse Working light, crane 14/26D El. center on the frame
F81 Fuse Vacuum pump 15/13C El. center on the frame
F82 Fuse +24V plug (repair light) 15/16C El. center on the frame
F83 Fuse Refuelling pumps 31/14B El. center on the frame
F84 Fuse Main current switch indicator light, optio reserve 14/30D El. center on the frame
F85 Fuse 15/20C El. center on the frame
F86 Fuse Fire extinguishing system 32/19H El. center on the frame
F87 Fuse CAN-I/O expander 33/14B El. center on the frame
F88 Fuse Cabin tilt 15/23C El. center on the frame
F90 Fuse Main relay 1/12D El. center on the frame
F91 Fuse Fire extinguishing system 11/19A El. center on the frame
F92 Fuse Heater 11/18A El. center on the frame
F94 Fuse Air conditioner 11/21A El. center on the frame
F724 Fuse Seat heater 25/27C Seat
F725 Fuse Stand tilting 25/28C Seat
F726 Fuse Windscreen washers 25/29C Seat
FM1 Fuse Main current, cab 1/18A Motor, right
FM2 Fuse Main current, frame 1/17A Motor, right
FM3 Fuse Glow 1/19A Motor, right
FMG Fuse Charger main current 1/15A Motor, right
G1 Alternator Alternator 1 1/17L Motor, right
G3 Battery Start 1/12F Front frame, front right
G4 Battery Start 1/12I Front frame, front right
G5 Battery 12 V system 30/13J Cabin, left side pontoon
H1 Indication light Glow 8/18D Control panel
H2 Indication light Emergency exit 10/13B Control panel
H3 Indication light Battery, stand-by 25/20I Control panel
H4L Light Driving lights 12/17I Front frame, front left
H4R Light Driving lights 12/15I Front frame, front right
H7 Indication light Alternator 1 1/16G Control panel
H10 Indication light Oil pressure 8/20C Control panel

2012-10-17
74700 VIEREMÄ
FINLAND
H16L Light Brake lights 12/26K Rear light
H16R Light Brake lights 12/25K Rear light
H17 Indication light Engine, yellow 8/22C Control panel
H18 Indication light Engine, red 8/21C Control panel
H19 Indication light Steering wheel 18/20D Control panel
H31 Indication light Direction indicator lights, right 12/21F Control panel
H32 Indication light Direction indicator lights, left 12/21F Control panel
H49 Light Cab interior light, in the front 10/22D Cabin, ceiling
H50 Light Cab interior light, in the rear 10/20D Cabin, ceiling
H52 Loudspeaker Radio 30/19J Cabin, ceiling
H191 Light Air conditioner 11/27D Instrument panel
HA1 Light Auxiliary work light cut-in 15/16G Front frame, front left
HA2 Light Auxiliary work light cut-in 15/18G Rear frame
HE1 Light Working lights forward 14/23I Cabin, on the roof
HF1 Light Working light, rear frame 14/28K Rear frame
HH1 Light Working light, hydraulic tank 14/14J Front frame, rear left
HH2 Light Working light, hydraulic tank 14/16I Front frame, rear right
HN1 Light Working light, crane 14/24I Crane
HO1 Light Working light, right 14/15I Cabin, on the roof
HP1 Light Working light, crane 14/26I Crane
HS1 Indication light Main current on 14/30E Cabin, under left
HT1 Light Working light, back 14/17I Cabin, on the roof
HT2 Light Working light, back 14/18J Cabin, on the roof

2012-10-17
74700 VIEREMÄ
FINLAND
HV1 Light Working light, left 14/13I Cabin, on the roof
K1 Relay Main current, cab 1/28F Cabin, electric center
K50 Relay Drive brake charging 4/28D Cabin, electric center
K51a Relay Engine shut-off 4/15D Cabin, electric center
K51b Relay Engine shut-off 4/17D Cabin, electric center
K52 Relay Drive brake charge relief 4/19D Cabin, electric center
K53 Relay Measuring device 17/19D Cabin, electric center
K54 Relay Air conditioner 11/21F Cabin, electric center
K55 Relay Direction indicator light 12/23C Cabin, electric center
K56 Relay 12 V system 30/14C Cabin, electric center
K57 Relay Front window wiper 9/15H El. center
K58 Relay Rear window wiper 9/18H El. center
K59 Relay Front window washer 9/20H El. center
K60 Relay Automatic Parking Brake System 4/21G Cabin, electric center
K61 Relay Central lubrication Safematic 32/28I Cabin, electric center
K62 Relay Fire extinguishing system 32/22I Cabin, electric center
K63 Relay Emergency exit 10/15G Cabin, electric center
K64 Relay Window wiper, left 9/25H El. center
K65 Relay Window wiper, right 9/28H El. center
K66 Relay Rear window washer 9/22H El. center
K67 Relay Windscreen washers 9/22C Seat
K71 Relay Working light, right 14/14E El. center on the frame
K72 Relay Working light, left 14/12E El. center on the frame
K73 Relay Working light, back 14/17E El. center on the frame
K74 Relay Working light, tree top 14/20E El. center on the frame
K75 Relay Working light forward 14/22E El. center on the frame
K76 Relay Working lights, crane 14/24E El. center on the frame
K77 Relay Working light, crane 14/26E El. center on the frame
K87 Relay CAN-I/O expander 33/13D El. center on the frame
K88 Relay Cabin tilt 15/23F El. center on the frame
KE1 Relay Glow 1/26K Motor, right
KS1 Relay Main current 1/12C Motor, right
M1 Engine Start 1/15L Motor, right
M2 Compressor Vacuum pump 15/13I Hydraulic container

2012-10-17
74700 VIEREMÄ
FINLAND
M8 Engine Front window wiper 9/16K Cabin, front
M9 Engine Rear window wiper 9/19K Cabin, rear
M10 Engine Rear window washer 9/23K Cabin, rear
M11 Engine Front window washer 9/21K Cabin, front
M13 Pump Heater 11/23K Fuel tank
M14 Engine Window wiper, left 9/26K Cabin, left
M15 Engine Window wiper, right 9/29K Cabin, right
M87 Motor Additional hydraulic cooler 33/14J Cabin, under
M88 Pump Cabin tilt 15/23I Cabin, under left
M111 Motor Stand tilting 25/28G Seat
M321 Pump Fuel filling pump 31/16I Fuel tank
M322 Pump Hydraulic oil filling pump 31/21I Hydraulic container
R1 Potentiometer Back lights, instrument panel 12/19C Control panel
R8 Resistor Terminator 3/27B Cabin, rear right
R10 Pedal Gas pedal in the front 6/17I Cabin, front
R11 Potentiometer Windscreen wipers 20/20C Seat
R13 Pedal Gas pedal in the rear 6/21I Cabin, rear
R21 Potentiometer Steering lever, articulated steering 20/23C Seat
R22 Potentiometer Steering lever, left 21/14C Seat
R24 Potentiometer Thumb joystick 21/19C Seat
R26 Potentiometer Steering lever, articulated steering 22/28D Control handle, right
RE1 Resistor Glow 1/27L Motor, right
RE2 Resistor 15/20I Motor
S2 Switch Emergency stop 4/13D Front frame, front left
S3 Switch Emergency stop 4/13G Control panel
S10 Ignition switch Ignition switch 1/18E Control panel
S11 Switch Parking brake 4/21C Control panel
S12 Switch Direction indicator light 12/25E Control panel
S13 Switch Hazard warning light 12/22E Control panel
S14 Switch Driving lights 12/12D Control panel
S16 Switch Working lights 13/16D Control panel
S21 Switch Cab interior light 10/20H Control panel
S24 Switch Horn 12/27E Control panel

2012-10-17
74700 VIEREMÄ
FINLAND
S25 Switch Welding protection 2/12H Cabin, electric center
S26A Switch Working lights to the left 13/16H Control panel
S26B Switch Working lights to the right 13/18H Control panel
S26C Switch Working lights to the back 13/19H Control panel
S26D Switch Working lights forward 13/21H Control panel
S26E Switch Working lights, crane 13/22H Control panel
S26F Switch Working lights, crane 13/24H Control panel
S26G Switch Front window wiper 9/15A Control handle, right
S26H Switch Rear window wiper 9/18A Control handle, right
S26J Switch Window wiper, left 9/25A Control handle, right
S26K Switch Window wiper, right 9/28A Control handle, right
S30 Switch Cab interior light 10/21J Cabin, left
S36 Switch Seat heating 25/27F Seat
S37 Switch Seat release 25/23F Seat
S38 Switch Drive direction selector 23/20B,24/12D Control handle, left
S39 Switch Windscreen wiper/-washer 23/22B,24/22D Control handle, right
S40 Switch Differential gear lock 23/12B Control handle, left
S41 Switch Driver confirmation 19/26E Control handle, left
S42 Switch Frame lock 23/18B Control handle, left
S43 Switch Driving program selection 23/26B Control handle, right
S44 Switch Constant r.p.m. 23/28B Control handle, right
S45 Switch Bulldozer blade activation 23/30B Control handle, right
S46 Switch Speed range selector 19/27E Control handle, right
S47 Switch Rear drive release 19/29E Control handle, right
S48 Switch Log gate forward / backward 23/16B Control handle, left
S49 Switch Crane activation 19/24E Control handle, left
S50 Switch DUAL function change 17/26D Control panel
S59 Switch Start 15/12F Hydraulic container
S70 Switch Crane control 5/14C Control panel
S79A Pedal Tilt down 19/17F Cabin, on the floor
S79B Pedal Tilt up 19/18F Cabin, on the floor
S80 Switch Harvester head switch 17/23D Control panel
S88 Switch Cabin tilt 15/22I Cabin, under left
S90 Switch Active dampening 34/16D Control panel
SP1 Ground point Ground potential 13/21D Under control panel
SP3 Ground point Ground potential 9/16B Control handle, right

2012-10-17
74700 VIEREMÄ
FINLAND
T51 Unit Voltage reducer 30/12G Cabin, electric center
X10 Connector Cabin, X10 1/29D,32/19I Cabin, on the floor
X11 Connector Working lights 14/19H Cabin, on the roof
X14 Control unit Digital timer for heater 11/15D Control panel
X18A Telephone Phone 30/25G Cabin, rear left
X20 Connector Cabin, X20 12/12F Cabin, on the floor
X40 Connector Cabin, X40 4/21I Cabin, on the floor
X62F Connector Engine diagnostics 10A 1/21F Cabin, electric center
X62G Unit CAN connection 8/16J Cabin, electric center
X87 Unit Printer 16/17F Cabin, front
X131 Connector 27/13B Cabin
X191 Air conditioner Air conditioner 11/26F Cabin, rear right
X201 Connector Limit lights to the back 12/14G Front frame, rear left
X202 Connector Limit lights forward 12/11H Front frame, front left
X321 Connector Fuel filling pump 31/14D Fuel tank
X322 Connector Hydraulic oil filling pump 31/20D Hydraulic container
X1010 Unit Water heating device 11/16K Front frame, front left
X7821 Unit Control unit, electric steering wheel 26/24C Seat
XH1 Voltage point +24V plug (repair light) 15/14G Cabin, under left
XP1 Voltage junction point Seat node 19/22A Seat
XP2 Voltage junction point Seat node 9/29D Control handle, right
Y1A Valve Lifting boom up 28/16C Valve table
Y1B Valve Lifting boom down 28/17C Valve table
Y2A Valve Luffing boom down 28/23C Valve table
Y2B Valve Luffing boom up 28/22C Valve table
Y3A Valve Extension out 28/19C Valve table
Y3B Valve Extension in 28/20C Valve table
Y4A Valve Grapple closed 29/23C Valve table
Y4B Valve Grapple open 29/22C Valve table
Y5A Valve Crane slewing to the right 28/14C Valve table
Y5B Valve Crane slewing to the left 28/13C Valve table
Y6A Valve Rotator to the left 29/20C Valve table
Y6B Valve Rotator to the right 29/21C Valve table
Y7A Valve Articulated steering to the left 29/25C Valve table
Y7B Valve Articulated steering to the right 29/24C Valve table
Y8A Valve Bulldozer blade down 29/27C Front frame, rear left
Y8B Valve Bulldozer blade up 29/26C Front frame, rear left

2012-10-17
74700 VIEREMÄ
FINLAND
Y9 Valve Bulldozer floatation 29/28C Front frame, front left
Y31 Valve Parking brake 4/21K Front frame, rear left
Y31b Valve Parking brake 4/23K Front frame, rear left
Y32 Valve Drive brake charging 4/28K Front frame, rear left
Y33 Valve Drive transmission 5/26L Cabin, under
Y35 Valve Drive transmission 7/17J Hydraulic motor
Y36 Valve Range selection 5/18K Front frame, rear left
Y37 Valve Operating brake 5/19K Front frame, rear left
Y38a Valve Differential lock, front 28/25C Front frame, rear left
Y38b Valve Differential gear 28/27C Front frame, rear left
Y40 Valve Rear drive release 28/28C Front frame, rear left
Y41a Valve Control unit, electric steering wheel 26/23K Front frame, rear left
Y41b Valve Control unit, electric steering wheel 26/21K Front frame, rear left
Y42a Valve Log gate up / down 29/13C Front frame, rear left
Y42b Valve Log gate up / down 29/14C Front frame, rear left
Y43a Valve Log gate forward / backward 29/12C Front frame, rear left
Y43b Valve Log gate forward / backward 29/13C Front frame, rear left
Y46a Valve Urea 25/15I Front frame, rear left
Y46b Valve Urea 25/16I Front frame, rear left
Y47 Valve Frame lock 7/14J Front frame, rear left
Y49a Valve Tilt up 29/15C Front frame, rear left
Y49b Valve Tilt down 29/16C Front frame, rear left
Y52a Valve DUAL function change 17/28I Front frame, rear left
Y52b Valve DUAL function change 17/30I Front frame, rear left
Y55 Valve Drive direction 7/13J Front frame, rear left
Y56 Valve Active axle OAU 34/23B Front frame, rear left
Y58 Valve Active dampening 34/28B Front frame, rear right
Y60 Valve Cooler fan 29/17C Front frame, rear right
Y90 Valve Seat release 25/24H Seat

2012-10-17
74700 VIEREMÄ
FINLAND
Electrical diagrams for a machine equipped
with the 3B engine (SCR system)
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
FM3 +
FM
A
FMG FM2 125A FM1 50A 100A
225A
+ 30K 30C
z30 30K
B 14/12C
z21
4/16E
88a 85 z20
4/20A
P 0 1 2 3 f4 10A
2 3
KS1 30-58 X X 2/15F
C
30-15/54 XXX z11 X10
88 86 30-19 X 4/13C
3
30-17 X 6 9 4
X101 z14
D
0 1 30-50a X X60 4/12K
1 2
- S1
15 19 17
5A
F90
f90
4 0 1 2
P 3
X62G:7
X62G:9
X62H:3
+
35/28I
8/15K
8/16K
11/16A
E 2
X62A
ADM3 30C
+
30 58 50a 16 8 12 13 14 X62D X62C
12V
G3 S10 X62F MB-diag(OBD)
2 1 12 10 9
F f1 7 9 4 5 6
86 30
- 2/13F 15A
z36 K1
X62H:1
35/27I
8/17B
z12 85 87
4/18C
31C
G 1 1
H7 H8
2 2 D14 X601 a k
15C
a k 31C
D15 1 D13
a k
H k a D17
+
12V
G4
X61A
I A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 B2 B3 B4 B5
X40:5a
32/23G
J
85 88
31Bw 31K
KE1
15/3
BS/4
15/3
BS/4
M1b
L/2
W/1
L/2
K 30 50 B+ B+ 8 13 12 5 6 15 9 11
86 88a
31Cs G1b G2b
M G G XMB
+
G1 3 G2 3 RE1
31A 31C M1
L -
31E 31B 31Cb 31A

PONSSE Oyj VS0086B ELECTRIC DIAGRAM 1 / 35 Rev.
Ponssentie 22
VKo 2009-04-27 HYV
74200 VIEREMÄ
Forwarders 3B KL2010 Opti6 Main circuit VS0086B
FINLAND
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
30C
15C
D + + + + + + + + + + + +
F2 F4 F6 F39 F8 F10 F12 F14 F16 F18 F20 F22
10A - 10A - 7,5A - (3A) - 15A - 7,5A - 15A - 7,5A - 7,5A - 10A - 15A - 10A -
E + + + + + + + + + + +
F1 F3 F5 F7 F9 F11 F13 F15 F17 F19 F21
15A - 10A - 7.5A - 3A - (7,5A) - 15A - 5A - 10A - (10A) - 3A - 7,5A -
F
f1 f3 f4 f5 f6 f7 f9 f10 f11 f12 f14 f15 f17 f18 f21 f22
1/18F 8/16B 1/22C 33/23B 12/12B 3/12B 32/19J 34/18F 19/13C 5/26B 18/12H 12/12B 32/23I 26/18B 7/22K 25/26A
f2 f8 f131 f16 f19

1 2 27/23A
13/15C 8/21A 7/28K 7/21E
G
f201 f81 f132 f161 f191
27/23A
10/20A 18/20C 12/27B 27/20G
S25
H
I 4 5
31C

Ponssentie 22
VKo 2010-11-15 HYV
74200 VIEREMÄ
Forwarders 3B KL2010 Opti6 Cabin electric unit VS0086B
FINLAND
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
Crane node
A
CJ1 TJ5
5 12 6 11 18 17 16 15
B XD1BC XD1AB
f7 Without OPTI
2/17F R120
31C
R8
C
XD1C scr scr XD1B Gnd XD1A
2 1 2 1 1 2
RJ45 USB1
7 21 8 15 23 3 4 5 1 6 7
XPWR XAC4 Gnd XD1D
E 1 2
6 3 2 1 1 2 3 4
SJ1
+24V
arcnet -
arcnet +
arcnet -
arcnet +
GND
gnd
gnd
gnd
gnd
gnd
Gnd
F 12 18 19 11
HUB 8 XD2
10
arcnet -
14
arcnet +
arcnet -
arcnet +
arcnet -
arcnet +
Tx+
D-
D+
V
d
+5
gn
17
B
Tx-
US
US
G 9
gnd
gnd
gnd
Rx+
16 Rx-
XAC1 4 5 3 XAC2 4 5 3 XAC3 4 5 3 XD1H

H 1 7
Arcnet+
2 1
2 8
XD1G scr Arcnet-
I Gnd
2 1 2 1
*) scr
XD1E scr XD1F
6 7 5
GND XD1F
J X90
1
Gnd
x7611
33/25B
24Vin
GND
scr 2 DESD
XPC2
R120
K 6 7 5 XD1
5 1
X89 AJ1scr 31 32
7 13 14 8 S89
XPC2 X7611:1 1 1a
Harvester node AJ1 33/23E
z100
L 17/18K
OPTI 6 PC X7611:2
Active axel node 33/24B
SP1
Ponssentie 22
ERy 2010-11-15 HYV
74200 VIEREMÄ
Forwarders 3B KL2010 Opti6 ArcNet VS0086B
FINLAND
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
f53 f52
17/18A 9/11A
A + +
F52 F50
z20
7,5A - 1/20B 7,5A -
B 9
5 6 10
AD1
S11 32/25B
1 0 AD1
z11 10 1 7 2 8 9 z57
C 1/22C
z1 32/24B
8 7
27/27H
z12 z5
1/19G 26/20B 6 5
1 86 30 86 30 86 30 86 30
z4
D S2 K51a K51b K52 5/15K 4 3 K50
2
85 87 87a 85 87 87a 85 87 87a z3 85 87 87a
2 1
z21
E 1/26B
5 z58
32/29H
F X10 31C
86 30
APBS
K60
G
ADM-2 85 87 87a
1
X62B z22 z2
S3 APBS 18/15H 5/19B
2 1
H 8
X602
X10 7,5A +
I 6 F51
- 13 8 9 14 1 10
X40
J
11 13
1
1 1 1
z14
1/27D B60 B4 Y31 Y31b Y32
APBS
K 2
2 2 2
12 14
L
31A 31A

Ponssentie 22
VKo 2009-04-27 HYV
74200 VIEREMÄ
Forwarders 3B KL2010 Opti6 Emergency & pressure circuit VS0086B
FINLAND
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
Z27
A X82
12/21D 4 z28
z82
z34 32/24D
17/25C
27/23C 15A
X69
1 5 5 z2 4/29G f12 2/22F
X60 z77 z92 Gnd
B 17/20D 11/28G X80

X67D 5 7 3 2
31C
1 7 9
1 0
1
C 5 10
S70 X602 X601 X60
1 4 6
31C
D
1 2 5 8 4 14 15 16 13 7
TJ5 TJ2 TJ1

F R F
OUT
G TESD in AGnd +24V
TJ1 TJ1
1 8 10 TJ4 7 9 11 14 8 16 4 18 3
H
z7 X61B
B8
26/18B
I
X60 X61A X61B
3 8 7 B6 B7 A5 A6 A7
J 31C
z324 1 1
12/29D
2 1
Y36 Y37
X61B
2 2
K z3 z7a B11 A8 A9 B2 B3
4/24D 9/21F
3
1 1
L Y33 Y34
31A
2 2

Ponssentie 22
VKo 2009-04-28 HYV
74200 VIEREMÄ
Forwarders 3B KL2010 Opti6 OTU transmission unit VS0086B
FINLAND
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30

B
RPM
C
V+
V-
TJ1
TJ2 1 10 3 12 11 13 14
D
X61B
R10 R13
I B B
A3 A2 A4 A1
C A C A
R10 R13
J X612
scr
4 3 5
K 3
1 4
B12
L

Ponssentie 22
VKo 2009-05-26 HYV
74200 VIEREMÄ
FINLAND
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
B OTU Opticontrol Transmission Unit
TJ4 TJ1 TJ5

D 2 3 4 2 17 5 12 13 3 11 4 10
f19
2/28G
E X601
2 9 8 7 5
X602
X20
19 22 24 14
G X61A
B8 C1 C2 C4 C5 C3 C6 C7 C8
z6
12/24G
2 2 3 1
H B26 B15 B13 B16
3 1
X612 X612 P
1 2
1 2
1 2 6 7 8
I
2
b5
1 1 11/28K
1 1 1 1
E6 M
2 2
J Y35
Y55 2 Y47 2 Y48 2 2 B51 B52
1 X20
1 1 20 25 17
K 2 2
31A 31A
f21 f16
2/29F
31C 2/25G

Ponssentie 22
VKo 2009-04-28 HYV
74200 VIEREMÄ
FINLAND
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
A f131
2/23G
z36
1/16F X601
B 2 X602
z110
18/17H
f3 3
10A
2/14F
z111
C 18/17G
1 1 4
1
H10 H18 H17
X60
1 z112
2 2 2 2 18/14H
5
D H1
2
6 z113
18/12G
E 1 7 4 5 6 6
X62A
X62A X62A X62D

F RPM
OTU ADM3 PLD

G
TJ2 X62A X62C X62B X62A X62C XMB

H 3
18 6 17 19 20 21 1 10 3 13 14 15 2 1
CAN
J 4 5 6 1 2 3 X61A
X62G
31 A3 A2 A1
7 9
K
X62G:7
X62G:9
1/21E
1/22E
31C
L

Ponssentie 22
VKo 2009-05-11 HYV
74200 VIEREMÄ
Forwarders 3B KL2010 Opti6 OTU AMD PLD VS0086B
FINLAND
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
15C
A Opticontrol Seat Unit

S26G 1 k S26H 1 k z726 S26J 1 k S26K 1 k
25/29E
10A
f52 f57
4/28A 11/21A
+
2 a 2 a 2 SJ2 1 2 a 2 a
B F57
15A +
SP3
- X93G X93H X93J X93K
F58 5 86 30
15A
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 X761 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
- K67
C
85 87 87a
XP2
+1 +2
D +3 +4
31Cr 31Cs
E OSU
X76 +24V
1 3 2 7 9 z93
19/21A
2 4 10 6 8
F
z7a
AD2 5/16K AD2
1 3 9 5 7
86 30 86 30 86 30 86 30 86 87 87a 86 87 87a
K57 K58 K59 K66 K64 K65

H
85 87 87a 85 87 87a 85 87 87a 85 87 87a 85 30 85 30
I 2 3 4 5 6 7
K K
X103 X103
D10 D11
X1031 X1031
1 7 3 A 2 1 A 1 3 1 2 3 1 2 3
9 3
J X26 X26
X16E X16T
M8
M M9
M M11 M
+
M10 M
+
M M
K M14 M15
Front - Rear -
GND GND
5 5 X26 X1031
9 8
X103
L
31C
Ponssentie 22
VKo 2009-04-28 HYV
74200 VIEREMÄ
Forwarders 3B KL2010 Opti6 Window washers VS0086B
FINLAND
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
A
30C
f201
2/14G
z56 15C
B 18/20C 1
1 X30
H2
2
f63
C 12/22A
+ 5A
F63 H51 1 H50 1 H49 1
12 14
D -
2 2 2
AD1
E 11 13
X30
2 9
F
Z17
86 30 12/19D
K63
Z19
G 12/13B
85 87 87a
9 4 3
z66 S21
32/27J 201
10 8 2 7 1
H
Z32
12/14F
a
1
I D18
k
E2
2 z101
33/27G
J 2
S30
1
31C
K
31C

Ponssentie 22
VKo 2009-04-28 HYV
74200 VIEREMÄ
Forwarders 3B KL2010 Opti6 Safety window, interior lights VS0086B
FINLAND
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
f90 f57 f54

A Z23 1/13E 9/13A 32/27G
12/27C
+ + + +
20A
F93 5A F92 F91 10A F94 +
20A 20A
- - - - F54
B X10 -
10
f93
32/23I
C
X10
z62 3 f37
1 11 32/17H
16/14B
z26 1
D f37’ 13/16B H191
16/13B z29 X192
X14 Timer
z43 13/15E 2
12/25A
z42
E 7 8 2 4 12
17/18E
z75
K54 16/13B
85 87 87a
E15
F
86 30 X191
M
1
8 2 6 Air conditioning
16 15
G Z30
3 9 5
X104 31C
12/27G z92
4 3 7 AD1 5/17B
H
16 18
X20
I 31C
X10
9 7 8 1 4
rd/wh
bl/wh
J B5 P
2 1
bk/wh
bl/rd
4 3 5 2 8 1 9
+ 2 3
b5
M 7/23I
K X1010 M 31K +
E13 Engine heater
-
M13 E5 M
L

Ponssentie 22
VKo 2009-04-28 HYV
74200 VIEREMÄ
Forwarders 3B KL2010 Opti6 Air conditioning & heating system VS0086B
FINLAND
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
f63 f55
A 10/16C
z43 f161
10A 7,5A + 11/20D 2/25G
f15 f6 Z19 F55 7,5A 7,5A
2/24F 2/17F10/18G z44
B - 30/13B
K55
(85) (86)
R1 R2
1 1 Z23
49a
11/15A
C 49 31
2 2
(87)
Z17 z25
10/18F 13/15C
S14 S15 Z27
D 1 2 9 1 7 9 5/13A
210 1 0
S24 z324
S13 S12
9 6 5 10 5 1 9 5/14J
3 6 8 10 5 10 1 0
6 8 z325
E 10 0 1 0 1 29/29H
8 2 7 1 9 7 1 5 10
Z32
10/18H
3
2 1
F X40 X20
5 H31 23
2 1
X20
H32 X201
3 4
G X20 8
2 1 z6
5 X20 Z30
7/29G
X201 11/17G
5 7
X202 X20
H 6
8
X203 5
X202 X201 X203
4 1 1 4 6
56b 56a 56b 56a
I X204
H4R H4L
5 H4 H4 X203 X324 X325
31 31 z81 1 4 6 1 1
14/27L
E33 1 E324 E325
J X203 X201
1 4 6
X204
F R
X204 3 3 3
x204 2
29K
2 2
X324 X325
3 31E H16R H16L
K X202
x204
17J
L
31A
31K
Ponssentie 22
RPe 2007-03-07 HYV
74200 VIEREMÄ
Forwarders 3B KL2010 Opti6 On road equipment VS0086B
FINLAND
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
B
z26
11/25D
f2 10A
2/14G
C
z25
12/21D
1 9 SP1 SP2
1 0
D
S16 GND GND
5 10 Switch Panel Switch Panel
E
z29
11/25D
F
31C
G 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2
X93A X93B X93C X93D X93E X93F
S26A S26B S26C S26D S26E S26F
H
Left Right Back Front Crane Crane
I X93A X93B X93C X93D X93E X93F

3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4
z50a z50b z50c z50d z50e z50f
14/12A 14/13A 14/15A 14/21A 14/23A 14/25A

Ponssentie 22
VKo 2009-05-18 HYV
74200 VIEREMÄ
Forwarders 3B KL2010 Opti6 Control switches of work lights VS0086B
FINLAND
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
z50e z50f
A 13/23I 13/25I
z50d
13/22I
z50a z50b z50c z135
13/17I 13/19I 13/20I
13/20I 32/15H
B
X20 z51
15/19B
7 8 9 15 11 12 13
C
z30
1/17B 30K
125A
D + F72 + F71 + F73 + F74 + F75 + F76 F77 + +

25A 25A 25A 20A X35 20A 20A 15A F84 15A
- - - - - - - -
K72 K71 K73 K74 K75 K76 K77

E 86 30 86 30 86 30 86 30 86 30 86 30 86 30 1
HS1
2
85 87 87a 85 87 87a 85 87 87a 85 87 87a 85 87 87a85 87 87a 85 8787a
85 K71b 85 K73b 85 K74b 85 K75b 85 K76b 85 K77b 85 k78 31K
F K72b 33/12E
31K
X1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 9 8
AMP-9
G X201
7
WITH DUAL REAR

X11 6 7
X203 EXTENSIONS & SKIDDERS
H 4 5 a XP XP 7
HN+ HP+
D35
k
XDU1
HV3 1 HV1 1 HO3 1 HO1 1 HN1 1 HN3 1 HP1 1
HT6 1
I 1
HT1 1 HT3 1 HT5 1
2 1 2 2 1 2 1 1 2 1 2 2 1 XDU2 XDU3
2 1
HH1 1 HE2 2
2 1 2 HT4 1 2
HV2 2 HO2 2 HH2 2 HE1 2 HN2 2 HP2 2
HT7 2
J 2
HT2 2 2
XP
X11 HF1 1 HF2 1 HF3 1
9 8 HPN-
2 3
K 2 2 2
31E 31F 31F
z81a
31G z81
12/19I
L 31T

Ponssentie 22
RPe 2007-03-07 HYV
74200 VIEREMÄ
Forwarders 3B KL2010 Opti6 Work lights, frame unit VS0086B
FINLAND
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
z51 z53
14/30B 31/13A
B
z61
32/18H
OPTION
C F81 10A F82 10A F85 15A F88 25A
D 2
X201
E 2 2
X202 86 30
X203
K88
85 87 87a
F 13
S59
14
+
G + +
XH1 HA1 HA2
- -
- 1
XS88
H
M88
+ 13 +
M 1 S88
M2 P M
I VAC
3 3 RE2 14
- -
X202 2
X203
XS88
2
J 3
X201
K
31F 31K 31C 31C 31K

Ponssentie 22
VKo 2009-04-28 HYV
74200 VIEREMÄ
Forwarders 3B KL2010 Opti6 Vacuum pump, fuel filter heater VS0086B
FINLAND
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
A
31C1 31C
AC 24V batt 12V 12V
z75 f37’f37 f27 z40
11/21D 30/29D
11/22F 30/21D
B
+ +
C F38 F37
- -
1A 7,5A
D
7 1 6 9 8 5
X106
E
XCPW1 XCOM1
1 2 SCR 2 3 5
-/2 +/1
F GND +12V
Printer
X87
G
3 5 1 2 4 USB
GND
H 11 12 29 14 9 XPC2
XPC1 +12V GND RXD TXD GND
out COM RS232
24V IN
12V IN
GND
GND
HEATER
I
OPTI PC6
USB USB USB
J
K Mouse Keyboard

Ponssentie 22
LLa 2012-08-20 HYV
74200 VIEREMÄ
Forwarders 3B KL2010 Opti6 OPTI6, measuring unit VS0086B
FINLAND
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
f53
A 4/18A
+
B F53
15A -
X81
z82
C 3 5/19A
z77
5/16B
OHU On/Off
D 86 30 2 8 1 7 9 1 7 2 8 9
1 0 1 0
5
K53 X80 S80 S50
X81
85 87 87a 5 10 5 6 10
E
z42
11/20E
31C
F
z72
4 34/15B
X80
z71 6
G 34/16B
X40
H 1
XY52
I 1 1
Y52a Y52b 2
2
J
2
5 6 7 1 2 3 4
XY52
z100
K 3/14L X89
31C 31A
Harvesterhead

Ponssentie 22
VKo 2010-03-01 HYV
74200 VIEREMÄ
Forwarders 3B KL2010 Opti6 Harvester connection (DUAL) VS0086B
FINLAND
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
B
f132 z56
2/23G 10/13B
E30
C
Buzzer unit
EJ1 EJ2 EJ3

D
1
3 4 9 1 2 4 1 2 3 4 H19
2
Steering
E Wheel
G
z113 z15 z111 z73
8/26D 25/18H 8/26C 26/19B
H
f14 z112 z22 z110 z16
2/23F 8/26D 4/22G 8/26B 25/18H
31C
I

Ponssentie 22
VKo 2009-04-28 HYV
74200 VIEREMÄ
Forwarders 3B KL2010 Opti6 Alarm buzzer VS0086B
FINLAND
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
A XP1
z93
9/30E
+1 +2
+3 +4
15A
C f11
2/21F
1
XS41
D
X79
31C
2 6
1 1 1 1
S49 S41 S46 S47

E
C C C C
B
1
8 6 13 13
2 3
F X76 B73 XS41
14 14 C
S79A S79B B72
A
X79
4 8
H
31Cs
12 18 11 10 4 1 10 4 11 7 5 2 3
SJ1 SJ4 SJ1 SJ4
I
AGnd
+24V
act.
J
EMCS

K

VS0086B ELECTRIC DIAGRAM 19 / 35 Rev.
PONSSE Oyj RPe 2007-03-07 HYV
Forwarders 3B KL2010 Opti6 OSU seat unit VS0086B
Vieremä
FINLAND
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
C
R11 OUT R21 out
0V +5V + -
SC
D
XR11 XR21
E M12/5-p 1 4 3 2 2 M12/5-p 1 3
9 6 12 11 5 16
31Cs
SCR SCR
J
SJ1 SJ2 SJ1
+5V gnd
gnd +5V

L

Ponssentie 22
VKo 2009-04-28 HYV
74200 VIEREMÄ
Forwarders 3B KL2010 Opti6 OSU seat unit, analog inputs VS0086B
FINLAND
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
LEFT RIGHT
A
R22 R24 R23 R25

B
Y Y Y Y
C
X X X X
D
8 1 2 4 3 5 1 2 3 4 8 1 2 4 3 5 1 2 3 4
X94 X94T X95 X95T
E
G
1 2 4 3 5 6 1 2 4 3 5 6
8 8
X726 X729
22/15J 22/24J
H
I 31Cs
12 6 13 17 15 SC 1 18 17 8 9 7 2
SC
SJ4 SJ5
J
+5V 0V X Y Z +5V 0V X Y Z
K

Ponssentie 22
LLa 2011-05-11 HYV
74200 VIEREMÄ
Forwarders 3B KL2010 Opti6 OSU, seat unit ball joystics VS0086B
FINLAND
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
A LEFT RIGHT
R22 R23
Y Y
X X
R26
E
1 2 6 4 3 5 8 1 2 3 4 1 2 6 4 3 5 8 1 2 3 4
G X94M X94T X95M X95T
J X726 X729
21/14H 21/23H

VS0086B ELECTRIC DIAGRAM 22 / 35 Rev.
PONSSE Oyj LLa 2011-05-11 HYV
Forwarders 3B KL2010 Opti6 OSU, seat unit mini joystics VS0086B
Vieremä
FINLAND
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
1 2 1 2 1 1a 1b 1a 1b
102 102 102 102
B 1 2
C 3 C S38 1 S39 1 102 1 2 102 1
S40 S48 S42
option S43 S44 S45
C C C
C S38 & S39 SWITCH

CONNECTIONS ONLY
WITH MINI JOYSTICS
option
D 1 3 2 4 7 9 8 10 5 1 10 8 9 7 4 2 3 5
X2A18 X2A19
X1:9 A19
24/12J A18 Key matrix
Key matrix deviding card
E deviding card
X1:10 X1:15 X1r:20
24/12J 24/16J 24/22J
X1:20 X1r:1 X1r:10
24/12J 24/28J 24/22J
X1:19 X1:11 X1:12 X1:14 X1:16 X1:17 X1:8 X1:13 X1:1 X1r:13 X1r:8 X1r:17 X1r:16 X1r:14 X1r:12 X1r:11 X1r:19 X1r:9
24/12J 24/14J 24/14J 24/14J 24/14J 24/16J 24/16J 24/16J 24/18J X1r:15 24/26J 24/26J 24/26J 24/24J 24/24J 24/24J 24/24J 24/22J 24/22J
24/26J
F
X1A18 X1A19
9 10 20 19 11 12 14 16 17 8 13 15 1 1 15 13 8 17 16 14 12 11 19 20 10 9
31Cl 31Cr
31Cs
I 13 7 1 14 12 6 16 11 10 5 4 3 SCL SCR 9 15 2 8
SJ3
SL0 SL1 SL2 SL3 RL0 RL1 RL2 RL3 RL4 RL5 RL6 RL7 SL7 SL6 SL5 SL4
J LEFT:
RIGHT: Mode1 Mode3 Cruise

K

L

Ponssentie 22
LLa 2011-05-11 HYV
74200 VIEREMÄ
Forwarders 3B KL2010 Opti6 OSU basic matrix VS0086B
FINLAND
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
A A22 A23
S.A S.D S.B S.C S.F S.E S.A S.D S.B S.C S.F S.E
B S3.C S4.E S3.C S4.E

S2.D S1.B S2.D S1.B
9 8 1 2 3 6 5 7 4 X2A22 9 8 1 2 3 6 5 7 4 X2A23
C
1a 1b S38 & S39 SWITCH 1a 1b

102 102
CONNECTIONS ONLY
WITH BALL JOYSTICS
D
S38 1 S39 1
6 8 3 1 2 7 10 5 4 9 6 8 3 1 2 7 10 5 4 9
X2A20 X2A21
E
X3A20 X3A21
RL7 (ball) RL7 (ball)
SL2 RL0 RL1 RL2 RL4 SL3 RL3 RL5 RL6 SL6 RL0 RL1 RL2 RL4 SL7 RL3 RL5 RL6
RL3 (mini) RL3 (mini)
2 2
7 7
3 3
F 8 8
A20 4 4 A21
6 6
5 5
9 9
G
X1A20 2 1 11 12 10 9 7 15
X1A21 4 3 8 6
2 1 11 12 10 9 7 15 4 3 8 6
SC SC
H
2 1 11 12 10 9 7 15 4 3 8 6 20 2 1 11 12 10 9 7 15 4 3 8 6 20
X3A18 X3A19
I
23/20F
23/22E
X1:11 RL0 X1:17 RL4 X1r:9 X1r:11 RL0 X1r:17
RL4
X1r:1
X1:1
23/12E 23/14F 23/17F 23/30F 23/27F 23/24F

X1:10 X1:12 RL1 X1:8 RL5 X1r:10 X1r:12 RL1 X1r:8
RL5
J 23/12E 23/15F 23/18F 23/29E 23/27F 23/24F
RL6
23/13E 23/16F 23/19F 23/29E 23/26F 23/23F
RL7
23/13F 23/16F 23/20E 23/28F 23/25F 23/22F
A18 A19
K Key matrix Key matrix
deviding card deviding card

Ponssentie 22
LLa 2011-05-11 HYV
74200 VIEREMÄ
Forwarders 3B KL2010 Opti6 OSU basic matrix VS0086B
FINLAND
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
A
X76
f22 5
2/29F
15A
B
Opticontrol Seat Unit OSU + + +

C F724 10A F725 5A F726 10A
- - -
H L
s37:1
D 33/23C
SJ2 z726
3 8 6 4 7 10 X727 9/23A
2 3
E
1 1 7 9
1 0
S37 S36
F
C 5 10
X76 X761
4 1 6 2 3 4
E36 M M111
G BK
4 6 5
27 28 29 X7612 X727
X40
H z16 z15
18/18H 18/15G
Y90
I
Y46a 1 Y46b 1 1
H3 X7612
3
2 2 2 BU
J
31Cs
K
31C

Ponssentie 22
VKo 2009-04-28 HYV
74200 VIEREMÄ
Forwarders 3B KL2010 Opti6 OSU seat unit, drivers seat VS0086B
FINLAND
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
B f18 z7 z73 z4 z46

10A 5/17H
2/26F 18/18G 4/24D 27/25H
Steering Wheel
X7821 GND
C 1 2 3 4
3 2 3 4
X701
X70 X69
D
1 4 X783 2 4 2 X784 1 2 3 4 X782

3
GND
Steering Wheel Unit

G
H
3 2 4 1
X781
3 2 4 1
31C X71C
J
1 1
K
2 2
Y41b Y41a
L

Ponssentie 22
VKo 2009-04-28 HYV
74200 VIEREMÄ
Forwarders 3B KL2010 Opti6 Steering wheel VS0086B
FINLAND
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
f81
A 2/19G
f8 15A
2/19G 31C
X131
B 1 2 3 4
X70
z131 1 2 8 9
21H
z34
C 5/12A
31C
2 3 1 2 4 3
CJ1
CJ3
D

E
CJ2 CJ3 10
6 1 9 10 8 12 7 13 7 6 8 1 11 12
G f191
2/28G
X701 2 z46 z1
z131 26/21B 4/23C
12C
H
X71E X71D
6 1 9 10 8 3 2 12 7 6 8 4 1 11 2 10 3 12
I XB
2 1 3 4
XB2
XB105e C A
2 3 2 3
J 1 1
1 1 B30 B27b 1 1 3 S/3
2 3 B48 P B25 P
B8 B14 2 1 3 4 P B2 P B9 P
SCR +/1 -/2
1 1
2 2 XB105 4 B17
K 2 2
- + B
XB2
B105
L Y X
31E

Ponssentie 22
VKo 2011-05-26 HYV
74200 VIEREMÄ
Forwarders 3B KL2010 Opti6 OCU crane unit, sensors VS0086B
FINLAND
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
Y5B 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
Y3A Y2B Y38a Y38b Y40
C Y1A
1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 1 1
Y5A Y1B Y3B Y2A
1 1 1 1 31E
D
E
12 11 10 3 1 2 9 7 8 6 5 4 1 5 7
X71A X71F
F
15 3 9 18 1 2 17 4 8 13 7 11 11 5 1
CJ5 CJ4
H

J

Ponssentie 22
RPe 2007-03-07 HYV
74200 VIEREMÄ
Forwarders 3B KL2010 Opti6 OCU crane unit, valves VS0086B
FINLAND
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
31E
A
2 4
XY9
B
Y6A Y6B
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
Y43a Y42a Y49a
Y61 Y9
2
C 1
Y43b
2 1
Y42b
2 1
Y49b
2 2 1 1 1 1 Y4B 1 Y7B 2 1 Y8B 2 1 2
Y60 Y10
1 1 1 1 1 Y4A 1 Y7A 1 Y8A 1
D
XY9
1 3
E
12 6 11 12 3 4 10 9 8 8 9 10 11 9 8 7 3 2 1 6 5 4 10 11
X71C
X71F X71C X71B
F
1 2 7 8
X77a z701
33/12B
X77b
G 1 2
5 6 z702
33/17B
X77b
X701
X77a z325
5 6 8 12/30E
H
9 10 3 4 18 7 15 17 6 12 16 14 2 8 14 12 6 16 5 10 16 17 18
I CJ4 CJ3 CJ4 CJ5 CJ3
R
J
K OCU Opticontrol Crane Unit

A
Ponssentie 22
VKo 2009-05-20 HYV
74200 VIEREMÄ
Forwarders 3B KL2010 Opti6 OCU crane unit, valves VS0086B
FINLAND
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
z44 z45
12/25B 32/29J z38
B 33/21G
z39
85 87 87a 33/22G
C
K56 5A 15A + 3A 1A + 10A
+ + f27 +
86 30 F25 F27 16/14B
F24 F28 F26
k
30C - - - - -
D D6
z40
a
16/17B
XT51b
XT51a
MUTE
E
12 24
5 7 4 X17B 8
1
F -
15A RADIO/CD
F56
+ 3 4 5 6 4 3 1
A51
X17A
T51
G 24/12 2
X18A
2
H
7 5 6 3 4 X30
gnd gnd
XT51b
XT51a
G5
J - + 25A z47
+ - + - + - + -
33/26G W3
H52A H52 H53 H53A
K
31C 31C

Ponssentie 22
VKo 2009-04-29 HYV
74200 VIEREMÄ
Forwarders 3B KL2010 Opti6 12V equipment, audio, phones VS0086B
FINLAND
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
A
z53
15/21B
F83 25A
B
30F
Hydraulic oil refill switch box

Fuel refill switch box
X321 X322
D 1 1
F321 20A F322 20A
E
S321 13 S322 13
14 14
D321
D322
F
K321 k K322
86 30 86 30 k
H321 + H322 +
a a Connection with
85 87 87a 85 87 87a
G - - hydraulic oil tank
11 11
upper level sensor
S3211 X321 S3221 X322
H 12 2 12 2
X321 X322 X322
X321 + M321 X322 + M322 X322
3 4 M 3 4 M 3 4
I - -
+/1
S/3
+/1
S/3
J
B321
B322
-/2
-/2
31F 31F 31F
L

Ponssentie 22
RPe 2007-03-07 HYV
74200 VIEREMÄ
Forwarders 3B KL2010 Opti6 Refill options VS0086B
FINLAND
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
Scale Reversing camera Extra +12/24 Winch and clamp

z57
B 15C
30C 15C z5 4/24C
4/24C
1 2 3 9
C X82
1 9 2 8 3 7
X103 X100 +
D F120 z28
5/16A
-
31C
E 1 2 3 4 5 7 8 9
X88
31C
F
Dafo Telecontrol + SCR Safematic

G
X40:5a f93a
z135 1/24J 35/12J
15C 14/20A f17a f54
35/12J 11/23A
z61 z89 f17b
15/24B 33/12A 35/13J
+
z62
H 11/19D
+ F61 10A
F86 10A X40 -
z58
- 5 2 4 4/22F
3 5
30 86 30 86
f93
I 11/17C
X108 12 11 K62 f17 K61
X10 2/26F
87a87 85 87a87 85
1 9
f9 z66 z45
J 3 2/20F 10/16H 30/15B
X10
9 1
9 2 1 4 5 6
X102 31C
K 31C 5 1 X104 9 X100

Ponssentie 22
RPe 2007-03-07 HYV
74200 VIEREMÄ
Forwarders 3B KL2010 Opti6 Voltage supply for options VS0086B
FINLAND
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
A Display
z89
Side panel Seat
32/20H
z702 x7611
29/14G X77b f5 X7611:2 3/29J
3/27L
B F87 15A 2/16F
z701
29/19G
1 7 2 8 5 6 X761
21 7
C X20 s37:1
25/25D
X84A X7611
1 7 2 8 9
86 30
S32 1 9 1 2
D
K87 5 6 10
85 87 87a
E k78
31C
X7611:1
3/27L 31Cs
14/27F
15C
z38 z39
30/29B 30/27C
z47 z101
G 30/15J 10/22J
Extra phone Defa

+
H 1 3 25A
F23
-
I 5 X105
9
2
1 8 5 9
J M87 M 8
X101
X30
1
31C
31E 31C
W2
L

Ponssentie 22
RPe 2007-03-07 HYV
74200 VIEREMÄ
Forwarders 3B KL2010 Opti6 Voltage supply for options VS0086B
FINLAND
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
A Regel valve
z71
17/22G
1 1
B
z72
17/22F Y56 2 Y57 2 Y58
A B C D E F G
C AJ1
J1
7 1 4 11 5 13 15 11
1 2 9
210
D
S90
AJ2
AJ2
AJ1
AJ1
AJ5
AJ5
AJ5
AJ5
3 6 8 10
E
AJ1
31C
X90
F X701 6 1 18 Opticontrol Active axle Unit OAU
f10
2/20F
GND
7 6
X80
G 12
AJ1
AJ5
AJ1
AJ5
AJ5
AJ5
AJ5
AJ5
AJ5
AJ5
AJ1
AJ5
AJ5
AJ5
H
1 1 9 18 4 10 17 12 8 7 3 16 2 6
9 7 JPG JGG
I X602
31A
9 7 1 3 2
J XB96
TJ5 TJ5 B98
rd gn bl 2 3 1 3 6 4 5 1
B96 B97
K OTU
Inclinometer Potentiometer GYRO

L

Ponssentie 22
VKo 2009-04-28 HYV
74200 VIEREMÄ
Forwarders 3B KL2010 Opti6 Option: OAU active axle unit VS0086B
FINLAND
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
KL31(GND)
KL31(GND)
CAN high
CAN low
OUT 24V
OUT 24V
IN 0-5V
IN 0-5V
IN 0-5V
IN 0-5V
C A10
CAN high
CAN high
CAN high
CAN high
8-32V
8-32V
8-32V
CAN low
CAN low
CAN low
CAN low
KL30
KL15
KL15
KL31
KL15
KL31
Humi
Temp
gnd
gnd
+5V
gnd
gnd
gnd
gnd
gnd
gnd
gnd
gnd
gnd
gnd
60 7 44 62 50 51 49 42 17 18 25 26 30 29 21 22 11 5 9 16 6 5 4 1 2 3 7 8 9
D X1A10 X62H
59 3 6 2 13 1 32 38 34 37
G
X63 X63
2 1 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
X61B
B4 B5 B6
I
X62H:1
X62H:3
1/22F
1/22E
3 4 2 1
31A
32/25G
32/25G
32/25H
J
f93a
f17a
f17b
1 2 3 4 3 1 2 4 2 2 4 2
2 2
B41 NOX M R%
1
B45 7 14 16 10
K 1 1 1 3 1
M16 Y70 XMB
B42 B43
B44

Ponssentie 22
ERy 2010-05-26 HYV
74200 VIEREMÄ
Forwarders 3B KL2010 Opti6 SCR system VS0086B
FINLAND
15C Voltage point Voltage - after ignition lock 1/29G Cabin
30C Voltage point Voltage - after main current switch 1/29E Cabin
30F Voltage point Refuelling pumps 31/14B Tank
30K Voltage point Voltage - after main current switch 14/13C El. center on the frame
31A Ground point Ground potential 1/12L Motor, right
31B Ground point Ground potential 1/12L Front frame
31Bw Ground point Ground potential 1/13J Motor, left
31C Ground point Ground potential 1/13L Cabin
31Cb Ground point Ground potential 1/13L Cabin, front right
31Cs Ground point Ground potential 1/14K,20/29I Seat
31E Ground point Ground potential 1/11L Front frame
31F Ground point Ground potential 14/26K Tank
31K Ground point Ground potential 1/14J,14/12F El. center on the frame
A20 Printed circuit board Input signals 24/16F Control handle, left
A21 Printed circuit board Input signals 24/26F Control handle, right
A22 Printed circuit board Input signals 24/16B Control handle, left
A23 Printed circuit board Input signals 24/26B Control handle, right
A51 Plug socket 12 V system 30/29G Cabin, right
AD1 Diode 4/25D Cabin, electric center
AD2 Diode Windscreen wiper/-washer 9/17F El. center
B2 Sensor Hydraulic filter, cooling 27/20J Front frame, rear left
B4 Sensor Drive brake load pressure 4/19K Front frame, rear left
B5 Sensor Air conditioner 11/27J
B8 Sensor Hydraulic oil temperature 27/12J Hydraulic container
B9 Sensor Drive feed pressure 27/24J Front frame, rear left
B12 Sensor Hydraulic motor r.p.m. 6/25K Hydraulic motor
B13 Sensor Coolant low limit 7/27H Expansion tank
B14 Sensor Fuel gauge 27/14J Fuel tank
B15 Sensor Step position indicator 7/25H Bumber casing, left
B16 Sensor Drive brake light 7/29H Cabin, under
B17 Sensor Crane control 27/22J Crane
B25 Sensor Parking brake pressure 27/28J Front frame, rear right
B26 Sensor Air filter blockage 7/23H Air filter
B27b Sensor Hydraulic oil low limit 27/18J Hydraulic container
B30 Sensor Hydraulic return filter 27/16J Hydraulic container

PONSSE Oyj VS0086B FUNCTION LIST 1 / 11 Rev.
2012-10-17
Ponssentie 22 Forwarders 3B KL2010 Opti6 VS0086B VS0086B_ENG
74700 VIEREMÄ
FINLAND
B41 Sensor Nitrogen Oxides (NOx) 35/15J Catalytic converter
B42 Sensor Temperature 35/21J Catalytic converter
B43 Sensor Intake air 35/22J Motor
B44 Sensor AdBlue urea 35/23K Front frame, front left
B45 Sensor Intake air 35/19J Motor
B48 Sensor Brakes pressure lower limit 27/26J Front frame, rear left
B60 Sensor Automatic Parking Brake System 4/17K Front frame, rear left
B72 Sensor Seat direction 19/21F Seat
B73 Sensor Driver identification 19/19F Seat
B98 Aerial Active dampening 34/28K Front frame
B105 Sensor Active tilt 27/15L Crane
D6 Diode Voltage reducer 30/12D Cabin, electric center
D10 Diode Front window washer 9/16I Cabin, front
D11 Diode Rear window washer 9/19I Cabin, rear
D18 Diode Cab interior light 10/21I Cabin, left
D35 Diode Working lights 14/22H Cabin, on the roof
E2 Solenoid Emergency exit 10/15I Cabin, front right
E5 Compressor Air conditioner 11/27K Motor, left
E6 Motor Cooler fan 7/18J Motor
E33 Buzzer Horn 12/27J Front frame, front right
E36 Resistor Seat warming 25/27G Seat
E324 Buzzer Horn 12/28J Front frame
E325 Buzzer Horn 12/30J Rear frame
EJ1 Buzzer Buzzers 18/13D Under control panel
EJ3 Buzzer Warning buzzer - loud sound 18/18D Under control panel
F1 Fuse Ignition switch 2/13E Cabin, electric center
F2 Fuse Working light switches 2/14D Cabin, electric center

2012-10-17
74700 VIEREMÄ
FINLAND
F3 Fuse ADM engine cab unit 2/14E Cabin, electric center
F4 Fuse Engine diagnostics 10A 2/15D Cabin, electric center
F6 Fuse Instrument panel, back light 2/17D Cabin, electric center
F7 Fuse Hub 2/17E Cabin, electric center
F8 Fuse Craner control unit 2/19D Cabin, electric center
F11 Fuse Seat node 2/21E Cabin, electric center
F12 Fuse Drive transmission, central unit 2/22D Cabin, electric center
F13 Fuse Hazard warning light 2/23E Cabin, electric center
F14 Fuse Buzzers 2/23D Cabin, electric center
F15 Fuse Driving lights 2/24E Cabin, electric center
F16 Fuse Brake lights 2/25D Cabin, electric center
F17 Fuse Reserve position 2/26E Cabin, electric center
F18 Fuse Electric steering wheel steering 2/26D Cabin, electric center
F22 Fuse Seat heater 2/29D Cabin, electric center
F23 Fuse Anti-theft device 33/26H Cabin, electric center
F26 Fuse Printer 30/29C Cabin, electric center
F50 Fuse Drive brake charging 4/28A Cabin, electric center
F51 Fuse Engine shut-off 4/15I Cabin, electric center
F52 Fuse Drive brake charge relief 4/19A Cabin, electric center
F53 Fuse Measuring device 17/19B Cabin, electric center
F54 Fuse Air conditioner 11/22B Cabin, electric center
F55 Fuse Direction indicator light 12/23B Cabin, electric center
F56 Fuse 12 V system 30/15F Cabin, electric center
F57 Fuse Windscreen wipers 9/12B Cabin, electric center

2012-10-17
74700 VIEREMÄ
FINLAND
F58 Fuse Side window wiper 9/12B Cabin, electric center
F61 Fuse Central lubrication Safematic 32/28H Cabin, electric center
F63 Fuse Emergency exit 10/15D Cabin, electric center
F71 Fuse Working light, right 14/14D El. center on the frame
F72 Fuse Working light, left 14/12D El. center on the frame
F73 Fuse Working lights to the back 14/17D El. center on the frame
F74 Fuse Working light, tree top 14/20D El. center on the frame
F75 Fuse Working lights forward 14/23D El. center on the frame
F76 Fuse Working lights, crane 14/24D El. center on the frame
F77 Fuse Working light, crane 14/26D El. center on the frame
F81 Fuse Vacuum pump 15/13C El. center on the frame
F82 Fuse +24V plug (repair light) 15/16C El. center on the frame
F83 Fuse Refuelling pumps 31/14B El. center on the frame
F84 Fuse Main current switch indicator light, optio reserve 14/30D El. center on the frame
F85 Fuse 15/20C El. center on the frame
F86 Fuse Fire extinguishing system 32/19H El. center on the frame
F87 Fuse CAN-I/O expander 33/14B El. center on the frame
F88 Fuse Cabin tilt 15/23C El. center on the frame
F90 Fuse Main relay 1/12D El. center on the frame
F91 Fuse Fire extinguishing system 11/19A El. center on the frame
F94 Fuse Air conditioner 11/21A El. center on the frame
F724 Fuse Seat heater 25/27C Seat
F725 Fuse Stand tilting 25/28C Seat
F726 Fuse Windscreen washers 25/29C Seat
FM1 Fuse Main current, cab 1/18A Motor, right
FM2 Fuse Main current, frame 1/17A Motor, right
FM3 Fuse Glow 1/19A Motor, right
FMG Fuse Charger main current 1/15A Motor, right
G3 Battery Start 1/12F Front frame, front right
G4 Battery Start 1/12I Front frame, front right
G5 Battery 12 V system 30/14J Cabin, left side pontoon
H1 Indication light Glow 8/18D Control panel
H2 Indication light Emergency exit 10/13B Control panel

2012-10-17
74700 VIEREMÄ
FINLAND
H3 Indication light Battery, stand-by 25/20I Control panel
H4L Light Driving lights 12/17I Front frame, front left
H4R Light Driving lights 12/15I Front frame, front right
H10 Indication light Oil pressure 8/20C Control panel
H16L Light Brake lights 12/26K Rear light
H16R Light Brake lights 12/25K Rear light
H17 Indication light Engine, yellow 8/22C Control panel
H18 Indication light Engine, red 8/21C Control panel
H19 Indication light Steering wheel 18/20D Control panel
H31 Indication light Direction indicator lights, right 12/21F Control panel
H32 Indication light Direction indicator lights, left 12/21F Control panel
H49 Light Cab interior light, in the front 10/22D Cabin, ceiling
H191 Light Air conditioner 11/27D Instrument panel
HA1 Light Auxiliary work light cut-in 15/16G Front frame, front left
HA2 Light Auxiliary work light cut-in 15/18G Rear frame
HH1 Light Working light, hydraulic tank 14/14J Front frame, rear left
HH2 Light Working light, hydraulic tank 14/16I Front frame, rear right
HS1 Indication light Main current on 14/30E Cabin, under left

2012-10-17
74700 VIEREMÄ
FINLAND
K1 Relay Main current, cab 1/28F Cabin, electric center
K50 Relay Drive brake charging 4/28D Cabin, electric center
K51a Relay Engine shut-off 4/15D Cabin, electric center
K51b Relay Engine shut-off 4/17D Cabin, electric center
K52 Relay Drive brake charge relief 4/19D Cabin, electric center
K53 Relay Measuring device 17/19D Cabin, electric center
K54 Relay Air conditioner 11/21F Cabin, electric center
K55 Relay Direction indicator light 12/23C Cabin, electric center
K56 Relay 12 V system 30/14C Cabin, electric center
K57 Relay Front window wiper 9/15H El. center
K58 Relay Rear window wiper 9/18H El. center
K59 Relay Front window washer 9/20H El. center
K60 Relay Automatic Parking Brake System 4/21G Cabin, electric center
K61 Relay Central lubrication Safematic 32/28I Cabin, electric center
K62 Relay Fire extinguishing system 32/22I Cabin, electric center
K63 Relay Emergency exit 10/15G Cabin, electric center
K64 Relay Window wiper, left 9/25H El. center
K65 Relay Window wiper, right 9/28H El. center
K66 Relay Rear window washer 9/22H El. center
K67 Relay Windscreen washers 9/22C Seat
K71 Relay Working light, right 14/14E El. center on the frame
K72 Relay Working light, left 14/12E El. center on the frame
K73 Relay Working light, back 14/17E El. center on the frame
K74 Relay Working light, tree top 14/20E El. center on the frame
K75 Relay Working light forward 14/22E El. center on the frame
K76 Relay Working lights, crane 14/24E El. center on the frame
K77 Relay Working light, crane 14/26E El. center on the frame

2012-10-17
74700 VIEREMÄ
FINLAND
K87 Relay CAN-I/O expander 33/13D El. center on the frame
K88 Relay Cabin tilt 15/23F El. center on the frame
KE1 Relay Glow 1/26K Motor, right
KS1 Relay Main current 1/12C Motor, right
M1 Engine Start 1/15L Motor, right
M2 Compressor Vacuum pump 15/13I Hydraulic container
M8 Engine Front window wiper 9/16K Cabin, front
M9 Engine Rear window wiper 9/19K Cabin, rear
M10 Engine Rear window washer 9/23K Cabin, rear
M11 Engine Front window washer 9/21K Cabin, front
M13 Pump Heater 11/23K Fuel tank
M14 Engine Window wiper, left 9/26K Cabin, left
M15 Engine Window wiper, right 9/29K Cabin, right
M16 Pump AdBlue urea 35/16K Front frame, front left
M87 Motor Additional hydraulic cooler 33/14J Cabin, under
M88 Pump Cabin tilt 15/23I Cabin, under left
M111 Motor Stand tilting 25/28G Seat
M321 Pump Fuel filling pump 31/16I Fuel tank
M322 Pump Hydraulic oil filling pump 31/21I Hydraulic container
R8 Resistor Terminator 3/27B Cabin, rear right
R10 Pedal Gas pedal in the front 6/17I Cabin, front
R11 Potentiometer Windscreen wipers 20/20C Seat
R13 Pedal Gas pedal in the rear 6/21I Cabin, rear
R21 Potentiometer Steering lever, articulated steering 20/23C Seat
R26 Potentiometer Steering lever, articulated steering 22/29D Control handle, right
RE1 Resistor Glow 1/27L Motor, right
RE2 Resistor 15/20I Motor
S2 Switch Emergency stop 4/13D Front frame, front left
S3 Switch Emergency stop 4/13G Control panel
S10 Ignition switch Ignition switch 1/18E Control panel
S11 Switch Parking brake 4/21C Control panel

2012-10-17
74700 VIEREMÄ
FINLAND
S12 Switch Direction indicator light 12/25E Control panel
S13 Switch Hazard warning light 12/22E Control panel
S16 Switch Working lights 13/16D Control panel
S21 Switch Cab interior light 10/20H Control panel
S24 Switch Horn 12/27E Control panel
S25 Switch Welding protection 2/12H Cabin, electric center
S26A Switch Working lights to the left 13/16H Control panel
S26B Switch Working lights to the right 13/18H Control panel
S26C Switch Working lights to the back 13/19H Control panel
S26D Switch Working lights forward 13/21H Control panel
S26E Switch Working lights, crane 13/22H Control panel
S26F Switch Working lights, crane 13/24H Control panel
S26G Switch Front window wiper 9/15A Control handle, right
S26H Switch Rear window wiper 9/18A Control handle, right
S26J Switch Window wiper, left 9/25A Control handle, right
S26K Switch Window wiper, right 9/28A Control handle, right
S30 Switch Cab interior light 10/21J Cabin, left
S36 Switch Seat heating 25/27F Seat
S37 Switch Seat release 25/23F Seat
S38 Switch Drive direction selector 23/20B,24/12D Control handle, left
S39 Switch Windscreen wiper/-washer 23/22B,24/22D Control handle, right
S40 Switch Differential gear lock 23/12B Control handle, left
S41 Switch Driver confirmation 19/26E Control handle, left
S42 Switch Frame lock 23/18B Control handle, left
S43 Switch Driving program selection 23/26B Control handle, right
S44 Switch Constant r.p.m. 23/28B Control handle, right
S45 Switch Bulldozer blade activation 23/30B Control handle, right
S46 Switch Speed range selector 19/27E Control handle, right
S47 Switch Rear drive release 19/29E Control handle, right
S48 Switch Log gate forward / backward 23/16B Control handle, left
S49 Switch Crane activation 19/24E Control handle, left
S50 Switch DUAL function change 17/26D Control panel
S59 Switch Start 15/12F Hydraulic container
S70 Switch Crane control 5/14C Control panel
S79A Pedal Tilt down 19/17F Cabin, on the floor

2012-10-17
74700 VIEREMÄ
FINLAND
S79B Pedal Tilt up 19/18F Cabin, on the floor
S80 Switch Harvester head switch 17/23D Control panel
S88 Switch Cabin tilt 15/22I Cabin, under left
S90 Switch Active dampening 34/16D Control panel
SP3 Ground point Ground potential 9/16B Control handle, right
T51 Unit Voltage reducer 30/12G Cabin, electric center
X10 Connector Cabin, X10 1/29D,32/19I Cabin, on the floor
X11 Connector Working lights 14/19H Cabin, on the roof
X14 Control unit Digital timer for heater 11/15D Control panel
X18A Telephone Phone 30/25G Cabin, rear left
X20 Connector Cabin, X20 12/12F Cabin, on the floor
X40 Connector Cabin, X40 4/21I Cabin, on the floor
X62G Unit CAN connection 8/16J Cabin, electric center
X87 Unit Printer 16/17F Cabin, front
X106 Connector 16/15D Cabin
X131 Connector 27/13B Cabin
X191 Air conditioner Air conditioner 11/26F Cabin, rear right
X201 Connector Limit lights to the back 12/14G Front frame, rear left
X202 Connector Limit lights forward 12/11H Front frame, front left
X321 Connector Fuel filling pump 31/14D Fuel tank
X322 Connector Hydraulic oil filling pump 31/20D Hydraulic container
X1010 Unit Water heating device 11/16K Front frame, front left
X7821 Unit Control unit, electric steering wheel 26/24C Seat
XCOM1 Connector Measuring device 16/21E Cabin
XCPW1 Connector Measuring device 16/19E Cabin
XH1 Voltage point +24V plug (repair light) 15/14G Cabin, under left
XP1 Voltage junction point Seat node 19/22A Seat
XP2 Voltage junction point Seat node 9/29D Control handle, right
XPC1 Connector Measuring device 16/14H Cabin
XPC2 Connector Measuring device 3/21K,16/23H Cabin
Y1A Valve Lifting boom up 28/16C Valve table
Y1B Valve Lifting boom down 28/17C Valve table
Y2A Valve Luffing boom down 28/23C Valve table
Y2B Valve Luffing boom up 28/22C Valve table
Y3A Valve Extension out 28/19C Valve table

2012-10-17
74700 VIEREMÄ
FINLAND
Y3B Valve Extension in 28/20C Valve table
Y4A Valve Grapple closed 29/23C Valve table
Y4B Valve Grapple open 29/22C Valve table
Y5A Valve Crane slewing to the right 28/14C Valve table
Y5B Valve Crane slewing to the left 28/13C Valve table
Y6A Valve Rotator to the left 29/20C Valve table
Y6B Valve Rotator to the right 29/21C Valve table
Y7A Valve Articulated steering to the left 29/25C Valve table
Y7B Valve Articulated steering to the right 29/24C Valve table
Y8A Valve Bulldozer blade down 29/27C Front frame, rear left
Y8B Valve Bulldozer blade up 29/26C Front frame, rear left
Y31 Valve Parking brake 4/21K Front frame, rear left
Y31b Valve Parking brake 4/23K Front frame, rear left
Y32 Valve Drive brake charging 4/28K Front frame, rear left
Y35 Valve Drive transmission 7/17J Hydraulic motor
Y36 Valve Range selection 5/18K Front frame, rear left
Y37 Valve Operating brake 5/19K Front frame, rear left
Y38a Valve Differential lock, front 28/25C Front frame, rear left
Y38b Valve Differential gear 28/27C Front frame, rear left
Y40 Valve Rear drive release 28/28C Front frame, rear left
Y41a Valve Control unit, electric steering wheel 26/23K Front frame, rear left
Y41b Valve Control unit, electric steering wheel 26/21K Front frame, rear left
Y42a Valve Log gate up / down 29/13C Front frame, rear left
Y42b Valve Log gate up / down 29/14C Front frame, rear left
Y43a Valve Log gate forward / backward 29/12C Front frame, rear left
Y43b Valve Log gate forward / backward 29/13C Front frame, rear left
Y46a Valve Urea 25/15I Front frame, rear left
Y46b Valve Urea 25/16I Front frame, rear left
Y49a Valve Tilt up 29/15C Front frame, rear left
Y49b Valve Tilt down 29/16C Front frame, rear left
Y52a Valve DUAL function change 17/28I Front frame, rear left

2012-10-17
74700 VIEREMÄ
FINLAND
Y52b Valve DUAL function change 17/30I Front frame, rear left
Y55 Valve Drive direction 7/13J Front frame, rear left
Y58 Valve Active dampening 34/28B Front frame, rear right
Y70 Valve Compressed air 35/17J Front frame
Y90 Valve Seat release 25/24H Seat

2012-10-17
74700 VIEREMÄ
FINLAND
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
A
A
Korvaava sivu
B Replacement page 1
B
Ø0.5
8bar
C
C
Crane pump
MP1
#619 /3.F10
P /4.F10
D D
Option
S
M
E E
/3.H8 #608
/4.H8
F F
Date 10.4.2012 Elk 6W 0480001->

Cooling circuit Elk 8W 0490001-> D00074
Creator TimoJu Wisent 6W 0520001-> Drawing number
Approved Wisent 8W 0530001-> HL

Copyright © Ponsse Oyj Gazelle 8W 0540001-> 1/ 5
Revision 0 Description 1 Model Machine number Loc Sheet
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
A
A
#501
/5.D2
MP3
B
B
A B M4 M3
XB XA L2
A M1
M1 A
C
n
C
Vg max
425 bar / 8W
400 bar / 6W
380 / Gazelle
425 bar / 8W
D 400 bar / 6W D
28 bar 380 / Gazelle
320bar / Wisent
310bar / Gazelle
M2 B
L1 S M5
B M2
E E
M7 L1
0.5 bar
#471 /3.G10
/4.G10 /3.G8 #473
F F
/4.G8
Date 10.4.2012 Elk 6W 0480001->

Drive transmission Elk 8W 0490001-> D00074
Creator TimoJu Wisent 6W 0520001-> Drawing number
Approved Wisent 8W 0530001-> HL

Copyright © Ponsse Oyj Gazelle 8W 0540001-> 2/ 5
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Option
B
B1 A1 STEERING
A A
A
B A
SLEW
B2 A2
ROTATOR 230 bar
#457
#619
GRAPPLE A B
LIFT LUFFING EXTENSION
/3.F10
/4.F10
/3.F5
B A B A A B B A
B B
190 bar
Ø1.2 Ø0.8 Ø0.9 Ø1.2 Ø1.2 Ø1.0 Ø0.8 Ø1.2
BULLDOZER PLATE
#336
/5.H9
Ø1.2 Ø0.8 Ø0.9 Ø1.2 Ø1.2 Ø1.0 Ø0.8 Ø1.2
YS B A B A B A B A B A B A B A B A LSP
TP
PS
C C
250 bar 250 bar 250 bar 250 bar 250 bar 250 bar 250 bar 250 bar 250 bar 230 bar 230 bar 230 bar 230 bar
T3B
P1 P2B
195 bar 195 bar 190 bar 190 bar 170 bar 170 bar
D D
35 bar
PL
1 Ø0.8 Ø0.8 Ø0.8 Ø0.8 Ø0.8 Ø0.8 Ø0.8 Ø0.8
MP
2
Ø0.8LS 280 bar
T1
E E
X
#457
/5.G6
/1.D4
/5.H5
/3.B1
/4.B1
#457
F /3.B1 25 bar 0.4bar F
#619
0.4bar
MP 1
235 bar
Option
U
A G C
0.02bar
0.02bar
M
G G
#473
/2.F5
#471
/2.F2
#608
/1.E3
Elk 6W 0480001->
D00074 0
Crane circuit K70+ Elk 8W 0490001->
Drawing number Revision
S M1 R T2 Wisent 6W 0520001->
H TimoJu 10.4.2012 Wisent 8W 0530001-> H
Creator Date Gazelle 8W 0540001->
Model Machine number
Higher Level Assigment
Copyright © Ponsse Oyj 3/5

Description 1 Location Sheet
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Option
B
A B1 A1 A
A
B A
STEERING
A B
SLEW
ROTATOR 230 bar
#457
#619
B2 A2
LIFT LUFFING EXTENSION GRAPPLE
/3.F10
/4.F10
/4.F5
B A A B A B B A
B B
190 bar
Ø1.2 Ø0.9 Ø0.9 Ø1.2 Ø1.2 Ø1.0 Ø0.8 Ø1.2
BULLDOZER PLATE
#599
Ø1.2 Ø0.9 Ø0.9 Ø1.2 Ø1.2 Ø1.0 Ø0.8 Ø1.2
YS B A B A B A B A B A B A B A B A LSP
TP
PS
C C
280 bar 280 bar 280 bar 250 bar 250 bar 230 bar 230 bar 250 bar 250 bar 230 bar 230 bar
T3B
P1 P2
235 bar 235 bar 210 bar 210 bar 170 bar 170 bar 235 bar 235 bar 210 bar 210 bar 170 bar 170 bar
D D
35 bar
PL
1 Ø0.8 Ø0.8 Ø0.8 Ø0.8 Ø0.8 Ø0.8 Ø0.8 Ø0.8
MP PX
2
Ø0.8LS 300 bar
T1
E E
X
#457
/5.G6
/1.D4
/5.H5
/3.B1
/4.B1
#457
F /4.B1 25 bar 0.4bar F
#619
0.4bar
MP 1
265 bar
Option
U
A G C
0.02bar
0.02bar
M
G G
#473
/2.F5
#471
/2.F2
#608
/1.E3
Elk 6W 0480001->
D00074 Crane circuit K90+ Elk 8W 0490001->
S M1 R T2
H 20.4.2012 H
Creator Date

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
P
Rear drive release
A A
P FRAME LOCK
MP5
Differential lock
P
B1
T
B B A B A B A B A B
20 bar B A A
MP3 60 bar
Rear B MP6 65 bar
160bar 120bar MP7 30 bar

70bar
Front B 70bar 90bar
MP4
C C
Ø0.6
A B
P
B3
T
B A B A
A A
MP5
D 0.35bar D
A
Ø1.5
#501
/2.A3 R
OPTION
Ø1.5
Ø1.5
F A
Option
Wisent 0.35bar
BRAKE
Elk PRESSURE LOAD
TILT
MP T Log gate front/rear
A
E E
X LT15 LT05
230 bar 230 bar
F Ø1.9 Ø2.5 Ø1.9 Ø2.5 F

230 bar MP4 190 bar 230 bar
T1 T
A Br1 Br
A P1
MP1
Pm Bl
P
/3.F5 #457 P
G
/4.F5 B2 G
T
B A B A B A
B A
MP8
#336
/3.C12
T2 #619 /3.F10
A Br2 /4.F10 B A
P2 MP9
A B A Elk 6W 0480001->
D00074 0
Working hydraulics / Blocks Elk 8W 0490001->
Wisent 6W 0520001->
H TimoJu 10.4.2012 Wisent 8W 0530001-> H
Creator Date Gazelle 8W 0540001->

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
A A
Ø1.2 Ø0.9 Ø0.9 Ø1.2 Ø1.2 Ø1.0 Ø0.8
Ø1.2 Ø0.9 Ø0.9 Ø1.2 Ø1.2 Ø1.0 Ø0.8

B B
YS B A B A B A B A B A B A B A LSPB
TP
PS
T3B
P1 P2
235 bar 235 bar 210 bar 210 bar 175 bar 175 bar 235 bar 235 bar 190 bar 190 bar
C C
35 bar
PL
1 Ø0.8 Ø0.8 Ø0.8 Ø0.8 Ø0.8 Ø0.8 Ø0.8
MP PX
2
LS
D D
T1 300 bar
CLAMP BUNK LEFT CLAMP BUNK WIRE CLAMP BUNK RIGHT
E E
T
B A B A B A
F F
B A B A B A
0.4bar
0.4bar
B A
G G
U
C
0.02bar
0.02bar
All forwarders
D00068 0
Burger clamp bunk hydraulics Skidders
H EvelVi 31.5.2011 H
Creator Date
Copyright © Ponsse Oyj 1/ 1

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Ø1.2 Ø0.9 Ø0.9 Ø1.2 Ø1.2 Ø1.0 Ø0.8
A A
Ø1.2 Ø0.9 Ø0.9 Ø1.2 Ø1.2 Ø1.0 Ø0.8

TP
PS
B B
T3B
P1 P2
35 bar
PL
C 1 Ø0.8 Ø0.8 Ø0.8 Ø0.8 Ø0.8 Ø0.8 Ø0.8 C
MP PX
2
LS
T1 300 bar
D D
CLAMP BUNK
E E
F F
T
B A B A
0.4bar
0.4bar
G B A G
U
C
0.02bar
0.02bar
Forwarders
D00084 0
Ponsse clamp bunk
EvelVi 25.3.2013
hydraulics
H H
Creator Date

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Ø1.2 Ø0.9 Ø0.9 Ø1.2 Ø1.2 Ø1.0 Ø0.8
A A
Ø1.2 Ø0.9 Ø0.9 Ø1.2 Ø1.2 Ø1.0 Ø0.8

TP
PS
B B
T3B
P1 P2
35 bar
PL
1 Ø0.8 Ø0.8 Ø0.8 Ø0.8 Ø0.8 Ø0.8 Ø0.8
MP PX
C 2 C
LS
T1 300 bar
D D
Winch release
Winch control
E E
140 bar / Winch 7t

160 bar / Winch 10t 30 bar
Ø3.0 Ø1.5
F F
P
T
B A B A
0.4bar
0.4bar
G G
U
C
0.02bar
0.02bar
Forwarders
D00085 0
Winch hydraulics
ƣ/1 Ɵ/1
H EvelVi 25.3.2013 H
ɼ/1 9/1
ơ/1 Ƥ/1

Ơ/1 1 Location ƚ/1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
A
A
2,0
140 bar
B
B
From crane valve pressureport - P1

P 210 bar
#6
#9 T
To tank
B A B A
C
C
210 bar
Ø1.5
T P B A
D D
A B
From cooling circulation pump
#5
E E
A B
Korvaava sivu
F
Replacement page 1 F
Date 27.3.2013 Elk 0490090 ->

10W Lift with floating Buffalo 0320453 D00087
Creator EvelVi Drawing number
Approved HL
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Tyre pressure recommandations
2.5.2014
Nokia Forestry Tyres Tread pattern Inflation pressure

100kPa = 1bar
Harvesters
Max inflation and

TRS Front Rear track pressure
Machine Tyre size / PR F Rider ELS *)Nordman TRS kPa p.s.i kPa p.s.i kPa p.s.i
Bear 6w 650/65-26.5 / 20 – – Rear – – – 460 67 550 80
750/55-26.5 / 20 Rear – – Rear – – 460 67 550 80
780/55-26.5 / 20 Rear – – – – – 460 67 550 80
800/50R26.5 Rear – – – – – 460 67 550 80
700/70-34 / 16 – – – Front 260 38 – – 260 38
710/70R34 – Front – – 300 44 – – 400 58
Bear 8w 650/65-26.5 / 20 Front/Rear – Front/Rear – 400 58 460 67 550 80
750/55-26.5 / 20 Front/Rear – – Front/Rear 400 58 460 67 550 80
780/55-26.5 / 20 Front/Rear – – – 400 58 460 67 550 80
800/50R26 5
800/50R26.5 F t/R
Front/Rear – – – 400 58 460 67 550 80
Beaver 6w 600/55-26.5 / 20 Front/Rear – – *)Front/Rear 380 55 460 67 550 80
600/55R26.5 – Front/Rear – – 380 55 460 67 550 80
710/45-26.5 / 16 Front/Rear – – – 350 51 460 67 460 67
710/45-26.5 / 20 Front/Rear – – *)Front/Rear 350 51 460 67 550 80
710/45R26 5
710/45R26.5 – Front/Rear – – 350 51 460 67 550 80
800/40-26.5 Front/Rear – – – 350 51 460 67 500 73
Ergo 6w 600/55-26.5 / 20 Rear – – *)Rear – – 460 67 550 80
600/55R26.5 – Rear – – – – 460 67 550 80
710/45-26.5 / 16 Rear – – – – – 460 67 460 67
710/45-26.5 / 20 Rear – – *)Rear
) – – 460 67 550 80
710/45R26.5 – Rear – – – – 460 67 550 80
800/40-26.5 / 20 Rear – – – – – 460 67 500 73
600/65-34 / 20 – – – *)Front 300 44 – – 360 52
600/65R34 – Front – – 300 44 – – 400 58
700/55-34 / 20 – – – *)Front 300 44 – – 360 52
710/55R34 – F t
Front – – 300 44 – – 400 58
kPa p.s.i Maximum inflation pressure in bead seating

250 36
2.5 bar MAX
1/9
2.5.2014

100kPa = 1bar
Harvesters
Max inflation and

Ergo 8w 600/55-26.5 / 20 Front/Rear – – *)Front/Rear 350 51 460 67 550 80
600/55R26.5 – Front/Rear – – 350 51 460 67 550 80
710/45-26.5 / 16 Front/Rear – – – 350 51 460 67 460 67
710/45-26.5 / 20 Front/Rear – – )
*)Front/Rear 350 51 460 67 550 80
710/45R26.5 – Front/Rear – – 350 51 460 67 550 80
800/40-26.5 / 20 Front/Rear – – – 350 51 460 67 500 73
Fox 8w 600/55-26.5 / 20 Front/Rear – – *)Front/Rear 400 58 460 67 550 80
600/55R26.5 – Front/Rear – – 400 58 460 67 550 80
710/45-26.5 / 16 Front/Rear – – – 400 58 460 67 460 67
710/45 26 5 / 20
710/45-26.5 F t/R
Front/Rear – – *)F t/R
*)Front/Rear 400 58 460 67 550 80
710/45R26.5 – Front/Rear – – 400 58 460 67 550 80
800/40-26.5 / 20 Front/Rear – – – 400 58 460 67 500 73
kPa p.s.i
p si Maximum inflation pressure in bead seating
250 36
2.5 bar MAX
2/9
2.5.2014

100kPa = 1bar
Harvesters
Max inflation and

Scorpion 8w 600/55-26.5/20 Front/Rear – – *)Front/Rear 550 80 550 80 550 80
ScorpionKing 8w 600/55R26.5 – Front/Rear – – 550 80 550 80 550 80
710/45-26.5/16 Front/Rear – – – 460 67 460 67 460 67
710/45-26.5/20 Front/Rear – – )
*)Front/Rear 550 80 550 80 550 80
710/45R26.5 – Front/Rear – – 550 80 550 80 550 80
800/40-26.5/20 Front/Rear – – – 500 73 500 73 500 73

250 36
2 5 bar MAX
2.5
3/9
2.5.2014

100kPa = 1bar
Forwarders
Max inflation and

TRS Front Rear track p
pressure
Machine Tyre size / PR F Rider *)Nordman TRS kPa p.s.i kPa p.s.i kPa p.s.i
Buffalo 6w 710/45-26.5 / 20 Rear – *)Rear – – 550 80 550 80
BuffaloDual 6w 710/45-26.5 / 24 Rear – – – – 550 80 600 87
BuffaloADS 6w 710/45R26.5 – Rear – – – 550 80 550 80
800/40-26.5 / 20 Rear – – – – 500 73 500 73
600/65-34 / 20 – – *)Front 320 46 – – 360 52
600/65R34 – Front – 320 46 – – 400 58
700/55-34 / 20 – – *)Front 320 46 – – 360 52
710/55R34 – Front – 320 46 – – 400 58
Buffalo 8w 710/45-26.5 / 20 Front/Rear – *)Front/Rear 400 58 550 80 550 80
BuffaloDual 8w 710/45 26 5 / 24
710/45-26.5 Front/Rear – – 400 58 550 80 600 87
710/45R26.5 – Front/Rear – 400 58 550 80 550 80
800/40-26.5 / 20 Front/Rear – – 400 58 500 73 500 73
BuffaloKing 6w 750/55-26.5 / 20 Rear – Rear – – 500 73 550 80
780/55-26.5 / 20 Rear – – – – 500 73 550 80
800/50R26.5 – Rear – – – 500 73 550 80
700/70-34 / 16 – – Front 260 38 – – 260 38
710/70R34 – Front – 300 44 – – 400 58
BuffaloKing 8w 600/55-26.5 / 20 Front – *)Front 400 58 – – 550 80
600/55R26.5 – Front – 400 58 – – 550 80
710/45-26.5 / 20 Front – *)Front 400 58 – – 550 80
710/45-26.5 / 24 Front – – 400 58 – – 600 87
710/45R26.5 – Front – 400 58 – – 550 80
750/55-26.5 / 20 Rear – Rear – – 550 80 550 80
780/55-26.5 / 20 Rear – – – – 550 80 600 87
800/50R26.5 – Rear – – – 550 80 550 80

2.5 bar MAX
250 36
4/9
2.5.2014

100kPa = 1bar
Forwarders
Max inflation and

pressure
Elephant 6w 750/55-26.5 / 20 Rear – Rear – – 550 80 550 80
780/55-26.5 / 20 Rear – – – – 550 80 550 80
800/50R26.5 – Rear – – – 550 80 550 80
700/70-34 / 16 – – Front 260 38 – – 260 38
710/70R34 – Front – 320 46 – – 400 58
Elephant 8w 750/55-26.5 / 20 Front/Rear – Front/Rear 450 65 550 80 550 80
780/55-26.5 / 20 Front/Rear – – 450 65 550 80 550 80
800/50R26.5 – Front/Rear – 450 65 550 80 550 80
ElephantKing 8w 750/55-26.5 / 20 Front/Rear – – 450 65 550 80 550 80
780/55 26 5 / 20
780/55-26.5 F t/R
Front/Rear – – 450 65 550 80 550 80
800/50R26.5 – Front/Rear – 450 65 550 80 550 80
Elk 6w 600/55-26.5 / 20 Rear – *)Rear – – 550 80 550 80
600/55R26.5 – Rear – – – 550 80 550 80
710/45-26.5 / 20 Rear – *)Rear – – 500 73 550 80
710/45-26
710/45 26.5
5 / 24 Rear – – – – 500 73 600 87
710/45R26.5 – Rear – – – 500 73 550 80
800/40-26.4 / 20 Rear – – – – 480 70 500 73
600/65-34 / 20 – – *)Front 320 46 – – 360 52
600/65R34 – Front – 320 46 – – 400 58
700/55-34 / 20 – – *)Front 320 46 – – 360 52
710/55R34 – Front – 320 46 – – 400 58

2.5 bar MAX
250 36
5/9
2.5.2014

100kPa = 1bar
Forwarders
Max inflation and

pressure
Elk 600/55-26.5/20 Front/Rear – *)Front/Rear 350 51 550 80 550 80
8w 600/55R26.5 – Front/Rear – 350 51 550 80 550 80
710/45-26.5/20 Front/Rear – *)Front/Rear 350 51 500 73 550 80
710/45-26.5/24 Front/Rear – – 350 51 500 73 600 87
710/45R26.5 – Front/Rear – 350 51 500 73 550 80
800/40-26.5/20 Front/Rear – – 350 51 500 73 500 73
Gazelle 600/50-22.5/20 – – Front/Rear 350 51 500 73 550 80
8w 710/40-22.5/16 Front/Rear – Front/Rear 350 51 430 62 430 62
Wisent / Dual 600/55-26.5/20 Rear – *)Rear – – 550 80 550 80
6
6w 600/55R26 5
600/55R26.5 – R
Rear – – – 550 80 550 80
710/45-26.5/16 Rear – – – – 460 67 460 67
710/45-26.5/20 Rear – *)Rear – – 500 73 550 80
710/45R26.5 – Rear – – – 500 73 550 80
800/40-26.5/20 Rear – – – – 480 70 500 73
600/65-34/20
600/65 34/20 – – *)Front
)Front 300 44 – – 360 52
600/65R34 – Front – 300 44 – – 400 58
700/55-34/20 – – *)Front 300 44 – – 360 52
710/55R34 – Front – 300 44 – – 400 58
Wisent / Dual 600/55-26.5/20 Front/Rear – *)Front/Rear 350 51 550 80 550 80
8w 600/55R26.5 – Front/Rear – 350 51 550 80 550 80
710/45-26.5/16 Front/Rear – – 350 51 460 67 460 67
710/45-26.5/20 Front/Rear – *)Front/Rear 350 51 500 73 550 80
710/45R26.5 – Front/Rear – 350 51 500 73 550 80
800/40-26.5/20 Front/Rear – – 350 51 500 73 500 73

2.5 bar MAX
250 36
6/9
2.5.2014
Trelleborg TWIN Forestry Tread pattern Inflation pressure

100kPa = 1bar
Harvesters
Front Rear With tracks

Min Max Min Max
Machine Tyre size T428 T422 kPa p.s.i kPa p.s.i kPa p.s.i kPa p.s.i kPa p.s.i
Bear 6w 750/65-34 169A8 – Front 200 29 280 41 – – – – – –
750/50-26.5 174A8 Rear – – – – – 370 54 510 74 600 87
Bear 8w 750/50-26.5 174A8 Front/Rear – 290 42 390 57 320 46 440 64 600 87
Beaver 6w 600/55-26.5 160/165A8 Front/Rear Front/Rear 260 38 350 51 220 32 300 44 500 73
710/45-26.5 163/168A8 Front/Rear Front/Rear 240 35 320 46 200 29 280 41 500 73
Ergo 6w 600/65-34 157A8 – Front 220 32 300 44 – – – – – –
710/55-34 161A8 – Front 200 29 280 41 – – – – – –
600/55-26.5 160/165A8 Rear Rear – – – – 270 39 370 54 500 73
710/45 26 5 163/168A8
710/45-26.5 R
Rear R
Rear – – – – 240 35 320 46 500 73
Ergo 8w 600/55-26.5 160/165A8 Front/Rear Front/Rear 220 32 300 44 260 38 350 51 500 73
Fox 8w 600/55-26.5 160/165A8 Front/Rear Front/Rear 220 32 300 44 260 38 350 51 500 73

100kPa = 1bar
Harvesters

Mi
Min M
Max Mi
Min M
Max
Scorpion 8w 600/55-26.5 160/165A8 Front/Rear Front/Rear 550 80 550 80 550 80 550 80 550 80
ScorpionKing 8w 710/45-26.5 163/168A8 Front/Rear Front/Rear 550 80 550 80 550 80 550 80 550 80
7/9
2.5.2014

100kPa = 1bar
Forwarders

Min Max Min Max
Buffalo 6w 600/65-34 157A8 – Front 200 29 280 41 – – – – 600 87
710/55-34 161A8 – Front 190 28 250 36 – – – – – –
600/55-26.5 160/165A8 Rear Rear – – – – 370 54 510 74 600 87
710/45-26.5 163/168A8 Rear Rear – – – – 360 52 480 70 600 87
Buffalo 8w 600/55-26.5 160/165A8 Front/Rear Front/Rear 290 42 390 57 370 54 510 74 600 87
Buffalo Dual 6w 600/65-34 157A8 – Front 200 29 280 41 – – – – – –
710/55-34 161A8 – Front 190 28 250 36 – – – – – –
600/55 26 5 160A8
600/55-26.5 R
Rear R
Rear – – – – 360 52 480 70 600 87
710/45-26.5 163A8 Rear Rear – – – – 340 49 460 67 600 87
Buffalo Dual 8w 600/55-26.5 160/165A8 Front/Rear Front/Rear 290 42 390 57 370 54 510 74 600 87
Buffalo King 6w 750/65-34 169A8 – Front 200 29 280 41 – – – – – –
750/50-26
750/50 26.5
5 174A8 Rear – – – – – 380 55 520 75 600 87
Buffalo King 8w 750/50-26.5 174A8 Rear – – – – – 380 55 520 75 600 87
710/45-26.5 163/168A8 Front Front 340 49 460 67 – – – – 600 87
Elephant 6w 750/65-34 169A8 – Front 200 29 280 41 – – – – – –
750/50-26.5 174A8 Rear – – – – – 380 55 520 75 600 87
Elephant
p 8w 750/50-26.5 174A8 Front/Rear – 300 44 400 58 380 55 520 75 600 87
Elephant King 8w 750/50-26.5 174A8 Front/Rear – 320 46 440 64 430 62 580 84 600 87
Elk 6w 600/65-34 157A8 – Front 200 29 280 41 – – – – – –
710/55-34 161A8 – Front 190 28 250 36 – – – – – –
600/55-26.5 160/165A8 Rear Rear – – – – 340 49 460 67 600 87
710/45-26.5 163/168A8 Rear Rear – – – – 320 46 440 64 600 87
Elk 8w
8 600/55 26 5 160/165A8
600/55-26.5 F t/R
Front/Rear F t/R
Front/Rear 200 29 280 41 340 49 460 67 600 87
Gazelle 8w 600/50-22.5 149A8 Front/Rear – 190 28 250 36 300 44 400 58 500 73
710/40-22.5 151A8 Front/Rear – 160 23 230 33 270 39 370 54 500 73
650/45-22.5 150A8 – Front/Rear 160 23 230 33 270 39 370 54 500 73
8/9
2.5.2014

100kPa = 1bar
Forwarders

Min Max Min Max
Wisent 6w 600/65-34 157A8 – Front 190 28 250 36 – – – – – –
710/55-34 161A8 – Front 170 25 230 33 – – – – – –
600/55-26.5 160/165A8 Rear Rear – – – – 310 45 430 62 600 87
710/45-26.5 163/168A8 Rear Rear – – – – 300 44 400 58 600 87
Wisent 8w 600/55-26.5 160/165A8 Front/Rear Front/Rear 190 28 250 36 310 45 430 62 600 87
Wisent Dual 6w 600/65-34 157A8 – Front 190 28 250 36 – – – – – –
710/55-34 161A8 – Front 170 25 230 33 – – – – – –
600/55 26 5 160A8
600/55-26.5 R
Rear R
Rear – – – – 310 45 410 59 600 87
710/45-26.5 163A8 Rear Rear – – – – 290 42 390 57 600 87
Wisent Dual 8w 600/55-26.5 160A8 Front/Rear Front/Rear 190 28 250 36 310 45 430 62 600 87
710/45-26.5 163A8 Front/Rear Front/Rear 170 25 230 33 300 44 400 58 600 87
9/9
Webasto, water heater Thermo 90 S
Table of Contents
Webasto, water heater Thermo 90 S ............................................... 1
1 Operating safety and maintenance .......................... 1
2 Timer ..................................................................... 3
3 Usage .................................................................... 5
4 Troubleshooting ...................................................... 5
4.1 Heater locked automatically due to a fault ................ 6
4.2 Fault indication ....................................................... 6
4.3 Error codes ............................................................ 6
4.4 Webasto 90ST fault diagnostics differ from the 90S
model as follows ..................................................... 7
1 Operating safety and maintenance

1. Thermo 90 S has been type-approved in Germany in
compliance with StVZO requirements.
2. The heater must be installed following the installation
www.webasto.com
instructions of the manufacturer and importer.
3. The activation year of the heater must be permanently
marked on the side of the device. The marking is made
by removing all other unnecessary years from the name
plate.
4. When the heater is installed in a vehicle transporting
hazardous substances, the installation must fulfil all
special requirements set for specific ADR vehicles.
5. Product requirements can only be set if the user is able
to indicate that they have properly observed the mainten-
ance and safety instructions.
6. The heater cannot be used in confined spaces due
to a poisoning and suffocation risk. During mainten-
ance and repairs, always use a powerful exhaust
vacuum. The aforementioned must be kept in mind,
particularly, when a timer is used to control the
heater or when the heating is switched on or off
using a switch located outside the cabin.
7. Due to an explosion risk, the heater must not be
used at refuelling stations or in fuel storage areas.
8. Due to an explosion risk, the heater must not be
used in locations that may contain flammable gases
or dust, e.g. fuel vapour, coal dust or sawdust, grain
dust, etc.
9. To ensure that the device is in full operating condition,
the heater must be used for 10 minutes at least once a
month when the vehicle is cold and with the blower at
the slowest speed. The heater must be inspected once
a year by an authorised Webasto service point. It is
recommended that the heater is inspected in autumn.
10. If the heater generates thick smoke for an extended time,
there are any unusual sounds during operations or there
is the smell of fuel, immediately switch off the heater and
prevent its later use: Remove the fuse (20 A). The heater
must not be restarted until it has been inspected by an
authorised Webasto service point.
1
11. The heater uses the same fuel as that the vehicle man-
ufacturer has approved for use in the vehicle engine.
12. The heater must not be exposed to temperatures higher
than 120 °C (during storage). Excessive temperatures
may permanently damage electronic components.
13. Check the level and frost resistance of the coolant in
accordance with the vehicle's maintenance programme.
Follow the vehicle manufacturer's instructions during
inspections. The coolant must contain at least 20% of a
high-quality antifreeze agent.
14. Webasto assumes no responsibility for any faults or
damage caused by installation or use not in accordance
with instructions. This also applies to repairs that have
not been performed properly or using original spare
parts.
2
2 Timer
4 5 6
3
2
1
10 9 8 7
1 Clock button 4 Date 7 Forward
2 Memory slot 5 Time display 8 Backward
3 Alarm symbol 6 Heater in operation symbol 9 Heater start button
10 Programming button
General The heater can be programmed to start seven days beforehand. Three
optional start times can be programmed, and they can be activated
one at a time. The timer also includes an alarm clock function.
When the vehicle current is switched on using the ignition key, the
date and time will be shown in the timer display. When the heater is
in operation, the display and operating buttons will be lit. When the
timer current is switched on for the first time, all symbols will flash.
First, set the correct date and time.
Usage When all symbols are flashing in the display, the timer can be pro-
grammed using the and buttons. If no buttons are pressed
within five seconds, the displayed date and time will be saved. When
the or button is pressed for more than two seconds, the time
starts to change at a high speed.
If the vehicle current is switched off when the heater is set to operate
continuously, the remaining operating time will be displayed. The
heater will operate for another 15 minutes (basic setting).
Starting the heater Manual control: Press the Heater start (continuous heating) button.
Automatic mode: Set the heater start time beforehand.

Shutting down the Manual control: Press the button.
heater
Automatic mode: Once the pre-programmed time ends, the heater
will shut down automatically.
When the heater is in operation: You can reset the remaining heater
operating time.
3
Setting the date and Press the button for at least two seconds. The time will start to
time
flash. Set the time by pressing the or button. Next, the date
will start to flash. Set the date using the arrow buttons.
Checking the time When the vehicle current is switched off, press the button.
Setting the heater Press the button. The memory slot number will start to flash. Set
start time
the heater start time by pressing the or buttons. The date will
start to flash. Set the desired date using the arrow buttons. Program
memory slots 2 and 3 similarly. You can later select the start time
quickly from three options.
Searching for or Press the button so many times that the device displays the
removing a pro- memory slot you want to select or the settings of which you want to
grammed time from
the device memory change. To remove programming, press the button so many times
that the programmed time is removed and the current time is displayed.
Setting the operating Shut down the heater if it is in operation. Press the button for at
time least three seconds. The time will start to flash. Set the operating time
by pressing the or buttons. You can select from 10 to 120
minutes.
Setting the remaining This can only be set when the heater is in operation and the vehicle
operating time current is switched off. Set the remaining operating time by pressing
the or buttons. You can select from 1 to 120 minutes. The
heater will shut down after the time set.
Setting an alarm You can also use the timer as an alarm clock or to alert you of other
important dates and times. The alarm is not tied to the days of the
week. Press the programming button so many times that the alarm
clock symbol is displayed. Set the alarm by pressing the arrow buttons.
When the alarm is active, press any button to mute it. The alarm is
also muted automatically after five minutes.
Checking and remov- Press the button so many times that the symbol is displayed.
ing the alarm
To remove an alarm, press the button so many times that the
symbol is no longer displayed.
Remote use Remote use is possible using a separate operating switch.
ADR vehicles On TRS/ADR vehicles, the timer cannot be programmed to start the
heater. The date and time can be set normally. The alarm clock
function also works identically on all vehicles.
4
3 Usage
Before starting the heater, turn the vehicle's temperature
controller to the extreme heating position. Switch the heater
blower to the slowest speed. (This saves the battery and
prevents any unnecessary power consumption.)
Thermo 90 S installed in an ADR vehicle: Check the accom-

panied operating instructions. In the following situations, there
is a short run-on period (40 seconds), after which the heater
will be deactivated and locked:
- The engine is switched off.

- The pump is switched on.
Resetting a lock caused by a fault: Switch off the current by

pressing the operating switch or the timer heater start button.
Start the heater normally.
Emergency switch: Only use the emergency switch in case

of an emergency, because this will shut down the heater
without any run-on period. This may cause overheating.
4 Troubleshooting
In the case of a fault, the heater will automatically be deactiv-
ated and locked. You can check the fault time from the timer
display or interpret the error code from the flashing signal
light. Error codes have been described at the end of these
instructions.
First, check that you have operated the heater in accordance

with instructions. Then, check that all fuses and cables are
in order and that the device has been installed safely (no
loose wires, etc.).
Repair any visible faults. Try to reactivate the heater by

pressing the heater start button. The lock will be disabled.
Press the heater start button again.
5
4.1 Heater locked automatically due to a fault
Fault Fix
The heater does not start after two Shut down and restart the heater. If the heater does not
attempts. The flame goes off dur- start, contact an authorised Webasto service point.
ing operations.
The voltage decreases for more Check the fuses, connections and the battery.
than 20 seconds.
The heater overheats. Check the coolant level, and refill, if necessary. Check
that the heater tap is switched to hot.
Resetting the overheating guard. The overheating guard
pushbutton must be down before the heater is restarted.
4.2 Fault indication
The heater has an automatic fault detection system. This

self-diagnostics indicates the fault type directly in the timer
display or as an error code indicated by the flashing signal
light.
4.3 Error codes
Note! When the heater is controlled from the operating switch

instead of the timer, the signal light indicates the fault type
during the run-on period. The flashing light also indicates the
error code, on the basis of which the fault type can be inter-
preted.
F 01 The heater does not start.

F 02 The flame has gone off (at least five times).
F 03 Over- or under-voltage.
F 04 Preliminary flame message.
F 05 Flame guard: interruption or short-circuit.
F 06 Thermal sensor: interruption or short-circuit.
F 07 Dosing pump: interruption or short-circuit.
F 08 Blower: interruption, short-circuit or incorrect
speed.
F 09 Glow rod: interruption or short-circuit.
F 010 Overheating.
F 011 Circulating pump: interruption or short-circuit.
6
4.4 Webasto 90ST fault diagnostics differ from the

90S model as follows
● Webasto is locked as a result of a fault if error codes

F01, F03–F11 appear three times in succession or if
error code F02 appears six times in succession. (Error
codes are described in the previous section.)
● Webasto indicates the lock mode so that F -- or 0 starts
to flash. The lock mode can be deactivated as follows:
1. Switch off the Webasto device (see Picture 1).
2. Switch on the device.
3. Remove the Webasto fuse. (The fuse is located in
the main electrical panel in the base machine frame,
and it is marked F92.) -> The device resets its
memory.
4. Reconnect the fuse.
Picture 1. Webasto current on / off

button
7
PonsseControl II
Table of Contents
1 Introduction .......................................................................... 1
2 Device components .............................................................. 2
2.1 Relay functions ....................................................... 3
3 Commissioning ..................................................................... 3
3.1 Programming the phonebook .................................. 4
3.2 Removing a user .................................................... 4
4 Device operation .................................................................. 4
4.1 Commands ............................................................ 5
4.2 Remote operation of Webasto ................................. 6
4.3 Alarms ................................................................... 6
4.3.1 Anti-theft alarm (optional equipment) ....................... 6
4.3.2 Extinguishing system (optional equipment) ............... 6
4.3.3 Battery undervoltage ............................................... 7
4.3.4 Battery overvoltage ................................................. 7
4.4 Troubleshooting and repair instructions .................... 8
4.4.1 Indicator light operation ........................................... 8
PonsseControl II
1 Introduction
PonsseControl II is a remote-control monitoring device
that can be controlled by text messages and no separate
controls need to be acquired. A standard GSM phone is
enough.
The device is operated by sending it text message commands

starting with the # sign, for example #W to activate the
Webasto system. The commands are written with capital
letters. PonsseControl acknowledges your control commands
and setting changes by sending a text message. If the device
does not understand the received command, it returns the
message UNKNOWN COMMAND.
You need your own GSM subscription to operate

PonsseControl. All other subscription types except pre-paid
subscriptions are suitable. A pre-paid subscription may stop
operating suddenly if the credit limit is reached, after which
messages cannot be received.
The system has two different user levels. Level 1 enables

the user to control Webasto and receive alarm messages
sent by the device. Level 2 users can only receive alarm
messages, Webasto control is disabled for this user level.
The data security of PonsseControl is based on a feature

that only control commands and queries sent from the num-
bers included in the device's own phonebook are implemen-
ted.
Access to the device is permitted to anyone who knows the

phone number of the device. The number of the GSM sub-
scription used for the device must be set as unlisted so that
it cannot be inquired about from the phone directory service.
1
PonsseControl II
2 Device components
PonsseControl is located in the machine cabin next to the
large electrical centre / printer, under the cover shown in
Picture 1.
Picture 1
PonsseControl II control unit
1 RS-232 serial connector, can be used when program-

ming the device
2 GSM antenna connector
3 Power switch (Not in use, power is switched off by
disconnecting the power cord (8))
4 Indicator light AUX = Green, indicates arrival of text
messages and operating status of the device
5 Indicator light GSM = Red, indicates GSM network
status
6 Audio connector (for connecting a speaker unit or
microphone)
7 SIM card installation holder
8 Power supply connector
9 GPI0 connector AD-4/RE-4 card connector for con-
trolling the optional equipment controls
2
PonsseControl II
2.1 Relay functions

The relay marking starting with the letter ‘K’ in the table below
corresponds with that of the wiring diagram function list. A
detailed wiring/connection diagram is included in the electrical
diagram for the base machine optional equipment.
Relay Size Function

K100 24 V / 10 A Webasto WARM
K101 24 V / 10 A Extinguishing system alarm (DAFO)
K102 24 V / 10 A Webasto start
3 Commissioning
Before PonsseControl is ready to be used, a SIM card must
be installed and the phone numbers of the users must be
added to the SIM card's phonebook.
1. Acquire a GSM subscription from a teleoperator. Pre-

paid subscriptions are not recommended, as they may
stop operating suddenly if the credit limit is exceeded.
2. Deactivate the PIN code request from the SIM card of
the GSM subscription. The request can be deactivated
by placing the SIM card in your own mobile phone and
deactivating the request from the phone settings (see
the phone instruction manual).
3. Disconnect the power cord (8).
4. Place the SIM card in the installation holder (7).
5. Push the card slot latch closed and close the cover.
Reinstall PonsseControl in its designated location next
to the printer in the machine cabin.
6. Reconnect the power cord to the device. The device
takes approximately 30 seconds to start. When the
device is functioning correctly, the red indicator light is
3
PonsseControl II
flashing every three seconds and the green light every

15 seconds. See section 4.4.1 Indicator light operation.
7. Add your own phone number to the device's phonebook
as described in section 3.1.
3.1 Programming the phonebook
Before programming the phonebook of the device, make

sure that the phonebook does not contain any unnecessary
numbers. Perform the check by using the command #P?.
Set yourself as the device user by adding your phone number

to the device's phonebook by using the #Px +nnnnnnnnnnnn
y command, where x refers to the list position (1…20),
+nnnnnnnnnnnn to your own phone number in international
format (+358…), and y to the user level (1 or 2).
Webasto can only be used at user level 1!
Note that there is a space between the list position x and

your own phone number +nnnnnnnnnnnn!
Always use the international format, such as #P1

+358409999999 1, when programming your phone number.
3.2 Removing a user

A number can be removed from the phonebook with the #Px
command, where x refers to the serial number of the list
position.
Only numbers included in the phonebook have the removal

right.
Before removing a number, check the contents of the list

position by using the #P? command.
4 Device operation
This section discusses the commands and alarms
needed to operate the device.
4
PonsseControl II
4.1 Commands
PonsseControl receives control commands by text messages.
The system has two different user levels. Level 1 enables
the user to control Webasto and receive alarm messages
sent by the device. Level 2 users can only receive alarm
messages, Webasto control is disabled for this user level.
Starting of Webasto and the status messages are sent only

to the phone number of the person giving the start command.
The # sign serves as the command signal. If the command

requires more than one character, they are separated with
a space.
Commands:
Command Description
#P? Returns the content of list positions 1
- 20
#P30-40? Returns the content of list positions
30 - 40
#P1? Returns the content of list position 1
#Px +nnnnnnnnnnnn Programmes number
y "+nnnnnnnnnnnn" in position x for
user level y
#Px Removes the content of list position x
#W Starts / stops Webasto, user level 1
is required
#B Returns the supply voltage
#V Returns the program version
5
PonsseControl II
PonsseControl reply messages:
Message Situation
UNKNOWN COMMAND Command is not identified
PERMISSION DENIED #W and no user level 1 for the number
ADD OK Adding to phonebook successful
ADD FAIL Adding to phonebook failed
REMOVE OK Removing from phonebook successful
REMOVE FAIL Removing from phonebook failed
COMMAND ERROR Command for removing from the phonebook is given without a
memory location
REMOVE FAIL: PERMIS- Attempting to clear a list position from a number not included in
SION DENIED the phonebook
4.2 Remote operation of Webasto

Webasto is switched on by sending the text message #W to
PonsseControl. Once Webasto is activated, the device sends
the Webasto ON acknowledgement message. When the
circulation water temperature is approximately +30°C, the
device sends the user who activated Webasto a Webasto
WARM text message.
You can also switch off Webasto in the middle of heating by

resending the message #W to PonsseControl. The device
will then send the message Webasto OFF.
4.3 Alarms
4.3.1 Anti-theft alarm (optional equipment)
If the forest machine anti-theft alarm is activated,

PonsseControl sends a message DEFA burglar alarm to
the users.
4.3.2 Extinguishing system (optional equipment)
If the forest machine is equipped with an automatic extinguish-

ing system and it activates, PonsseControl sends a text
message of the activation to the users. Dafo fire control
alarm.
6
PonsseControl II
4.3.3 Battery undervoltage
The battery voltage varies within the range of (22 V - 30 V).

If the battery voltage of the forest machine drops below 22
V, PonsseControl sends a message such as Batteries
voltage too low = 20.1 V to the users.
A delay of 20 seconds precedes sending of the message to

prevent short voltage variations from causing an alarm.
4.3.4 Battery overvoltage
The battery voltage varies within the range of (22 V - 30 V).

If the battery voltage rises above 30 V, the device sends a
message such as Batteries voltage too high = 31.6 V to
the users.
A delay of 20 seconds precedes sending of the message to

prevent short voltage variations from causing an alarm.
7
PonsseControl II
4.4 Troubleshooting and repair instructions
If the device does not reply to the commands you have sent,
remove the SIM card from the device and clear the messages
from the SIM card by using your own GSM phone.
4.4.1 Indicator light operation
Function: Description: Cause/Repair:

Red or green light is not on / Device is not receiving Switch on the power / device's
flashing power power supply is damaged
Red light flashes every three Device is connected cor- Device should function properly
seconds rectly to the GSM network
Red light flashes every second Device cannot find the GSM dead zone
GSM network
Red light flashes every second Device cannot find the The antenna of the device is dis-
GSM network connected -> Connect the antenna
Green light flashes every 15 Device is ready for opera- Device is ready to receive com-
seconds tion mands
Green light is on continuously Device is receiving a Green light is on until the device
for several seconds message has handled the received com-
mand
You can check that PonsseControl is connected to the GSM

network also by phoning the device. When the device func-
tions correctly, it gives two alarms and then a busy signal!
8
Table of Contents
1 User's guide ........................................................................ 1
1.1 Technical specifications ......................................... 1
1.2 Functions and controls ........................................... 3
1.3 Cleaning the rear view camera ............................... 4
1.4 Disclaimer ............................................................. 4
1 User's guide
The user's guide for the Brigade BE-870 rear view system
provides instructions for the correct use of the camera and
monitor. The rear view camera is a safety device which,
when installed and used correctly, extends visibility to the
back of the vehicle. The rear view camera does not offer any
assistance when driving carelessly and recklessly. Traffic
and safety regulations must always be followed.
1.1 Technical specifications

BE-800C CAMERA/BE-810C SHUTTER CAMERA
Resolution CCD (interline transfer)

Pixels 500 (horizontal) x 582 (ver-
tical) Pal
Image size 1/3 inches
Lens Focal length 3.0 mm (0.1 in),
maximum aperture F=2.0
Synchronisation internal
Horizontal resolution 330 TV lines
Light requirement Minimum 0.5 lux
Signal-to-noise ratio Minimum 50 dB (AGC off)
Power source 12 V DC
Power consumption 2.4 W (12 V DC)
Operating temperature -20 °C - +70 °C (-4 °F -
+158 °F)
Storage temperature -30 °C - +85 °C (-22 °F -
+185 °F)
Weight 0.65 kg (1.4 lbs)
1
BE-870EM Monitor
Input voltage DC 10.5…32 V

Power requirement Maximum 15 W
Video system NTSC/PAL automatic image
type identification
LCD screen 7" colour, aspect ratio 16:9 or
4:3
Image field Up 30°, down 50°, left 45°,
right 45°
Fade function Automatic/manual
Automatic contrast/bright- Day/night sensor
ness
Screen controls see section Functions and
controls
Background lights LED, service life minimum
20 000 hours
Internal speaker
Operating temperature -20 °C - +65 °C (-4 °F -
+149 °F)
Storage temperature -30 °C - +85 °C (-22 °F -
+185 °F)
Usage Indoors only
Vibration strength 15 G
Dimensions 197 x 138 x 32.2 mm (7.8 x
5.4 x 1.3 in)
Weight Approx. 0.65 kg (1.4 lbs)
2
1.2 Functions and controls
1. Power On/Off button

Red LED in the button – the monitor is in stand-by mode
Green LED in the button – the monitor is switched on
Power is switched off when the ignition key is in 0-posi-
tion.
2. Menu button
When the Menu button is pressed for less than two
seconds, brightness, contrast, colour or tint (NTSC
format) can be adjusted in the menu. When the Menu
button is pressed for more than two seconds, the Setup
Menu will open. The menu can be exited by pressing
the Menu button.
3. Select button
Use the Select button to select the display image and
accept menu functions.
4. Up/Dn buttons
Move up or down in menus. Adjust brightness, for
example. The Dn button decreases brightness and the
Up button increases brightness.
5. -/+ buttons
Select Setup Menu functions and adjust speaker
volume.
6. Brightness and remote control sensor
Display brightness is adjusted automatically according
to the light conditions when the Day/Night function is
on. The monitor can be operated by a remote controller.
Point the remote controller towards the sensor when
using the monitor.
3
7. Speaker
8. Screen cable
The function list will be cleared from the screen after five
seconds if no functions are selected.
1.3 Cleaning the rear view camera

Remove dust and dirt using a soft and moist cloth. Ingrained
dirt can be cleaned using cloth wetted with mild washing
agent. Do not use strong washing agents that contain petrol,
thinner, benzene or alcohol. These substances may damage
the screen.
1.4 Disclaimer
The use of the Brigade BE-870 rear view system does not
promise or guarantee that the user will not have an accident
or collide with an obstacle. The device does not replace rear
view mirrors or other statutory vehicle equipment.
4
Table of Contents
1 General ............................................................................... 1
2 Technical specifications ......................................................... 1
3 System functionality .............................................................. 2
3.1 Display buttons ....................................................... 2
3.2 Functions and adjustments ...................................... 3
3.2.1 Switching the system on/off ..................................... 3
3.2.2 Settings ................................................................. 3
3.3 Troubleshooting ...................................................... 4
4 Cleaning the reversing camera .............................................. 4
1 General
Brigade BE-970 two-camera system contains an automatic
switch between driving directions. The reversing camera
system is a safety device which improves visibility when
installed and used correctly. The camera system does not
offer any benefits when driving carelessly and recklessly.
Always follow the traffic laws of the country where the

machine is used.
The use of the Brigade BE-970 reversing camera system

does not guarantee or promise that the user cannot have an
accident or hit an obstacle. The system does not replace
rear-view mirrors or other statutory vehicle equipment.
BE-800C-NIR camera
Imaging technology CCD (interline transfer)

Pixels NTSC: 270 000 px, PAL: 320 000
px
Image size 1/3 inches
Lens Focal length 2.9 mm (0.1 in),
maximum aperture F=2.0
Synchronisation Internal
Horizontal resolution 330 TV lines
Light requirement Minimum 0.1 lux
Signal-to-noise ratio Minimum 47 dB (AGC off)
Power source 12 V DC
Power consumption 2.4 W (12 V DC)
Operating temperature -30°C ... +50°C (-22°F ... +122°F)
Weight 0.4 kg (0.88 lbs)
BE-970WM display
Video system NTSC/PAL. Automatic image

format detection
Screen 7" LCD colour screen
Image field Up 50°, down 60°, side 65°
Resolution 800 x 3 x 480
Aspect ratio 16:9
Supply voltage DC 12 ... 24 V
1
Video input 2 x camera

Dimensions (w x h x d) 194 x 124 x 48 mm (7.6 x 4.9 x
1.9 in)
Background lights LED, service life at least 20 000
hours
Power consumption Maximum 11 W
Operating temperature -40°C ... +70°C (-40°F ... +158°F)
Storage temperature -40°C ... +85°C (-40°F ... +185°F)
Brightness 500 cd/m2
Display adjustments See the Functions and adjust-
ments section
Vibration resistance 20 G
Weight Approximately 0.85 kg (1.87 lbs)
3 System functionality
3.1 Display buttons
1
2
3
1 Start/Shutdown button
2 Enter button
3 Menu button
4 Up/Down buttons
5 Automatic brightness detector. The display brightness is

adjusted automatically according to lighting conditions.
2
3.2 Functions and adjustments
3.2.1 Switching the system on/off
1. Press the Start/Shutdown button ( ).

● Red light in the button – display in standby mode
● Green light in the button – display on
● The system is switched off when the ignition key is
in the 0 position. In the Settings menu, the automatic
start/shutdown function can be enabled/disabled.
2. Adjust volume using the Up/Down buttons ( ) and ( ).
3.2.2 Settings
1. Press the Menu button ( ) once. The menu will open.

2. Navigate between settings in the menu using the
Up/Down buttons ( and ).
3. Select the setting to be changed by pressing the Enter
button ( ).
In the menu, it is possible,
● for example, to adjust brightness; the Down
button ( ) reduces and the Up button ( )
increases brightness.
● to adjust contrast and colour saturation.
4. Press the Menu button ( ) for 0.5 seconds. The Set-

tings menu will open.
5. Navigate between settings in the menu using the
Up/Down buttons ( and ).
6. Select the setting to be changed by pressing the Enter
button ( ).
7. Change the settings using the Up/Down buttons.
● In language settings, go to the desired language
using the Enter button ( ).
8. Exit the menu by pressing the Menu button again ( ).
The changes made will remain in force.
In the Settings menu, it is possible

● to select the display language
● to enable/disable the automatic start/shutdown
function for the display
● to enable/disable the night/day function for the dis-
play
● to restore factory settings.
3
3.3 Troubleshooting
If the system does not start:
● if no lights are on, check that the fuse is undam-
aged. The fuse is located in the camera display's
cable set.
● check all connections.
4 Cleaning the reversing camera

Remove any dirt and dust using a moist soft cloth. Ingrained
dirt can be removed using a piece of cloth moistened with a
mild cleaning agent. Do not use strong cleaning agents that
contain gasoline, thinner, benzene or alcohol. These sub-
stances may damage the outer display surface.
4
SIT RIGHT PROGRAMMING, Short instructions
Seat leveller for tilt compensation forward/backward model 2005 1/2
Factory settings:
ZERO-POINT/MIDDLE in the right position, HOME-position in the middle, LIMIT switch 1 on 10
degrees (when the unit is tilting forward) and the LIMIT switch 2 on 8 degrees (when the unite is
tilting backwards) , OPERATOR 1 the middle speed, OPERATOR 2 the lowest speed, OPERATOR 3
the highest speed.
Programming
)
Do not manually change position of the seat leveller when the unit is out of power,
because the ZERO/MIDDLE position affects the limit positions. Therefore it is important
to program the ZERO/MIDDLE in the correct way to avoid incorrect limit positions.
The unit goes out of programming if there is no pushing on a key within 8 sec or the S-
key is not pushed in 4 sec.
If the voltage protection function breaks the current, you have to switch the power off to
reset.
All functions are programmable with the control box. The control box has10 keys, 6 of which are in
use in this application (see figure next page). The rest of the keys are reserved for future needs.
Programmable functions:
ZERO-POINT/ MIDDLE, SPEED, positions of LIMIT switches, HOME-position, and 3 different
OPERATOR PROFILES.
Setting instructions
Zero-point
Move the unit with arrow keys or manually in a position where the measurement is 90 mm from the
downside of the unit to the downside of the upper plate (the upper plate of the unit is tilting a little
backward).
Programming: Press D/P-key for 8 sec until the LEDs start to twinkle. Press 6 times on S-key (LED 2
twinkles) and then confirm by pressing D/P-key again.
Limit switch No 1 (see figure next page)
Press D/P key for 8 sec. The LEDs start to twinkle. Press 7 times on S-key (LED 1 twinkles). Go to the
wished position by using the arrow keys. Confirm by pressing D/P-key and wait until the twinkling
stops.
Limit switch No 2 (see figure next page)
Press D/P-key for 8 sec. The LEDs start to twinkle. Press 8 times on S-key (LED 3 twinkles). Go to the
wished position by using the arrow keys. Confirm by pressing D/P-key and wait until the twinkling
stops.
Home-position
HOME is normally in the middle but can be programmed in other positions too (also operator profile
programming). Do as above but press 9 times with S-key. As a result, LED A/H starts to twinkle.
Confirm by pressing D/P-key.
2005-01-20
SIT RIGHT PROGRAMMING, Short instructions
Seat leveller for tilt compensation forward/backward model 2005 2/2
Speed
Speed can be set individually for each operator (3). Press D/P-key (short push) to choose the wished
operator. Press S-key until one of the LEDs starts to twinkle. Now it is possible to adjust the speed in 7
steps. The forward arrow key reduces and the backward arrow key increases the speed.
TECHNICAL DATA
Keys not in use in this application

Keys not in use in this application.
Forward key
Forward key Backward key
Backward key
90mm
90 mm Position
Position for
forZero-point
Zero-point
Front sideside
Front Back side
Limit switch 2 Back switch
Limit side 1
Limit switch 2 Limit switch 1
Stops movement Stops movement
stops movement
backward tilting Stops movment
forward tilting
Backward tilting forward tilting
Placement of cables on Electronic 172053 Sit Right automatic seat leveller

Placement of cables on Electronic 172053 Sit Right automatic seat leveller.
Contact 7-pole
Contact 7- forpower
pol for powerand
andcontrol
controlbox
box Contact
Contact8-pol forfor
8-pole motor power
motor andand
power pulscoder
pulse sensor
Power2424
Power volt
volt DCDC (+)(+)
redred Power pulscoder
Power red red
pulse sensor
Power
Powerground
ground (-) (-)
black
black Power pulse sensor
Power pulscoder blackblack
Controlbox
Control box (+)(+)
withewhite Motor powerred
Motor power red
ELECTRONICS
Controlbox
Control box (-) (-)
brownbrown ELECTRONIC Motor powerblack
Motor power black
Controlbox
Control box data yellow
data yellow SEEN
SEEN FROM ABOVE
FROM ABOVE Pulse sensor watch green
Pulscoder watch green
Not
Notininuse
usein in
this application
this application Pulse sensor
Pulscoder datadata yellow
yellow
Not
Notininuse
usein in
this application
this application Not
Not in
inuse
useininthis
thisapplication
application
Not in use in this application
Not in use in this application
Further information
More detailed information is to be found in the instructions for seat leveller delivered with the unit.
2005-01-20
SIT RIGHT 2005

Automatic
Seat Leveller
MODEL 2005
OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
The leveller shown is equipped with special accessories.
IMPORTANT!
To avoid costly and time-consuming mistakes
always familiarize yourself with these instructions
before starting to use the seat leveller.
SIT RIGHT 2005 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
Seat leveller, automatic sideways levelling 1/5
1 CONTENTS
1 CONTENTS ........................................................................................................................................................1
2 PRODUCT INFORMATION ..........................................................................................................................1
2.1 GENERAL WARNINGS ...................................................................................................................................1
2.2 TERMS OF WARRANTY .................................................................................................................................2
3 ELECTRONICS.................................................................................................................................................2
3.1 ELECTRONIC FUNCTIONS .............................................................................................................................2
3.2 PROGRAMMING ............................................................................................................................................2
3.2.1 Factory settings ...................................................................................................................................2
3.3 KEYS AND FUNCTIONS .................................................................................................................................3
3.3.1 Programming the right LIMIT – Example .........................................................................................3
3.4 SPEED SETTING FOR OPERATOR PROFILES ..................................................................................................3
3.5 PROGRAMMING ERRORS ..............................................................................................................................4
3.6 SWITCH DIAGRAM ........................................................................................................................................4
3.7 ELECTRONIC CABLES ...................................................................................................................................4
4 MAINTENANCE...............................................................................................................................................5
4.1 SAFETY LINKS ..............................................................................................................................................5
4.2 MAINTENANCE, SPARE PARTS AND REPAIR SERVICES ...............................................................................5
5 TECHNICAL DATA.........................................................................................................................................5
2 PRODUCT INFORMATION
Electronic improvements and some corresponding adjustments on the mechanics are the main
innovations made on the leveller model SIT RIGHT 2005. The control box design allows for
continuous product innovation. Thus the keys Å, Æ, right A/H, U/D and F/B are reserved for future
needs.
The SIT RIGHT seat leveller is a complete unit including all you need for installation in a forest
machine or another similar machine. All you need is to connect it to a 24 V DC supply voltage.
The automatic seat leveller 2005 is a patented product. The SIT RIGHT products have CE marking and
fulfil the valid EMC directives.
2.1 General warnings
)
DANGER! Do not ever put your hand or foot between the plates of an activated leveller.
Risk of getting squeezed!
NOTE! Do not ever turn the leveller manually when the power is cut. At worst this can
result in machine breakdown.
NOTE! Do not keep any loose objects lying on the machine floor, as these can get squeezed
under the leveller during levelling of sideways inclination
2005-01-20
2.2 Terms of warranty

SIT RIGHT RKN AB’s warranty of twelve (12) months or alternatively 2000 operating hours is given
to the product for faulty material and manufacturing. The warranty shall not apply to any faults or
defects arising from normal wear, negligence or improper operation, faulty installation or incorrect or
inadequate maintenance.
3 ELECTRONICS
The features of the new electronics are surface mounted components, microprocessor control, pulsed
control steps for motor drive and totally soundless electronics.
The electronics can be adjusted and set only through the control box. No dismantling of the leveller
itself is needed for replacing the electronics.
The unit’s WORKING POSITIONS are either AUTO or HOME
3.1 Electronic functions

1. Automatic levelling with the HOME position. (When activated the unit will take MIDDLE
position).
2. Proportional levelling: minor deviation of inclination = slower levelling, big deviation =
proportionally faster levelling.
3. Manual control by using arrow-keys (service position).
4. Programmable LIMIT positions (0-13 degrees).
5. Improved levelling of inclination.
6. 5 amp fuse, which acts in case of overloading.
7. Programmable for individual positions (3 operators).
8. Speed setting in 7 steps.
3.2 Programming
3.2.1 Factory settings
The speed of the leveller is factory set at step 4
that is to the average position, and the LIMIT
positions as standard to 11 degrees. The right and
left LIMIT position can easily be reset within 0-
13.
When starting the job and connecting the power

the system always starts from MANUAL position.
You reach AUTO position by pushing left A/H
once. You can, whenever you want, move to
MANUAL settings from the AUTO or HOME
positions.
2005-01-20
3.3 Keys and functions

P/D is the key for programming and confirming, and the S-key for selecting the function you wish to
programme. The arrow keys are used for settings and for manual control. NOTE! The
programmability stops and the unit goes into normal position, if no key is pushed within 8 seconds
or the S–key within 4 seconds.
NOTE! The keys Å, Æ, Right A/H, U/D and F/B are not in use in this model.
KEY PROCEDURE FUNCTION

A/H First push Activates the AUTO function ´ levelling of inclination starts
A/H 2nd push Activates the HOME function ´ the leveller places itself in the
MIDDLE position. A third push takes back to the AUTO position
etc.
D/P Short push Steps between operator profiles 1, 2 and 3
D/P Longer push The LEDs are flashing ´ select wanted programming with the S –
(about 8 s) key ´ confirm with one push of D/P.
S First push Zeroes the calculator
S 2nd push Activates the left programmable LIMIT. Move to wanted position
with the arrow keys (Right/Left). Lock the LIMIT by pushing D/P.
S 3rd push Activates the right programmable LIMIT. Proceed as above.
S 4th push Activates the position programming of HOME. Set as above.
3.3.1 Programming the right LIMIT – Example

As standard the LIMIT positions are set to11 degrees.
Speed: Driver 1 = 50 %, Driver 2 = min. speed and Driver 3 = max. speed.
Standard installation of the leveller: Speed programming and possible alterations of the LIMIT
positions will be enough. All operator profiles have the same LIMIT positions. Only the speeds can be
individually programmed in this model.
When you are seated, the right LIMIT position is the one limiting the stroke when inclining to the
right. Likewise the right arrow key guides the leveller towards inclination to right.
1. Push D/P for about 8 sec or until the LEDs flash.
2. Step forward with the S –key by pushing 3 times to the right LIMIT position.
3. Then move with the arrow keys to the position wanted and confirm the setting within 8 sec
with D/P.
3.4 Speed setting for operator profiles

The arrow to the left decreases and the arrow to the right increases the speed. The speed setting can be
made in 7 steps.
1. Push the S –key until all the LEDs begin to flash.
2. Use the arrow keys to set the wanted speed. You can find it out, for instance, by pushing the
arrow key to the right 7 times thus reaching the maximum speed. After that you only need to
step down to the wanted speed.
3. After about 8 seconds the LEDs stop flashing and the programming of the speed set is
completed.
Note! By manual control the speed is half the maximum speed, which also goes for setting the HOME
position.
2005-01-20
3.5 Programming errors
)
NOTE! To avoid changed settings: If you move the unit when the power is cut, the basic
settings will change. Should you, by mistake, re-programme the ZERO position (with the
power on) all other settings, like HOME and the programmable LIMIT positions, will change,
because they relate to the ZERO -position.
)
Checking /Correcting the basic settings: You can easily check, if the settings of the leveller
are faulty by activating the HOME position.
When HOME is activated, the unit shall stand parallel with the machine floor. If not, the basic
settings are faulty. This is easily corrected by cutting the power. Then drive the re-powered
leveller through the MIDDLE position and the unit will automatically correct the settings. You
can of course also programme the ZERO position manually as advised in point 3.3.
NOTE! The fuse on the supply cable will prevent the unit from overload.
3.6 Switch diagram
Control
Controlbox
box
Connection
Conection ofofseat
the seat leveller
leveller.
Electronic
Electronics
Black= =Ground
Ground TTo
o bebeconected
connectedto to power
power
Black 24 volt DC and controlled
24 volt Dc and controlled
Red
Red= =2424volt
voltDC
DC bby ignitionkey
y ignition key
Fuse55amp.
Fuse amp.
3.7 Electronic cables

Cablesfor
Cables forelectronic
electronics
SitSit Right
Right Automatic
Automatic leveller
leveller 2005
2005
Contact for power and control box
Contact for power and controllbox Contact
Contactfor
formotor
motorpower
powerand
andpulse
pulsesensor
sensor
Power
Power24 24volt
voltDCDC (+)(+)red
red Power
Power pulse sensor
pulse sensorredred
Power
PowerGround
Ground(-) (-) black
black Power
Power pulse sensor
pulse black
sensor black
Controllbox
Control box(+)(+)withe
white ELECTRONICS Motor
Motor power
power redred
Controllbox UPPSIDE
Control box(-)(-)brown
brown Motor
Motor power
powerblack
black
Controllbox
Control boxdata datayellow
yellow ELECTRONIC
SEEN FROM ABOVE Pulse
Pulse sensor
sensor watchwatch green
green
Notininuse
Not useininthis
thisapplication
application Pulse
Pulse sensor
sensor data data yellow
yellow
Not
Notininuse
useininthis
thisapplication
application Hall sensor signal green (fine)
Hall sensor signal green (Fine)
Hall
Hall sensor
sensor signal
signal yellow
yellow (fine)
(fine)
2005-01-20
4 MAINTENANCE
The leveller is prelubricated and needs no maintenance. Of course the mechanical components will
wear in the long run, but the wear damages will arise slower, if you grease the upper bowl regularly:
1. Remove the dust cover, which is fastened with Velcro tape.
2. Drive the plate to either side thus uncovering most of the bearing surface in the upper bowl.
3. Apply a thin layer of normal bearing grease.
4. Repeat on the other side. Now the applied grease will follow down to the glide layer of the lower
bowl.
4.1 Safety links

With the two safety links at the back of the unit you can easily lock the leveller mechanically in case of
transmission damage. Otherwise only the internal friction of the unit is keeping the inner bowl in its
position. This is, however, not enough to keep the seat in position in heavy sideway forces. Always use
both links for locking! After locking you can continue your work and postpone the dismantling and
repair to a more convenient moment.
4.2 Maintenance, spare parts and repair services

When you need spare parts or repair services, please contact your local PONSSE service.
5 TECHNICAL DATA
Weight: 18 kg
Dimensions: 395 x 350 x 95 mm
Supply voltage: 24 V DC (voltage doubler needed for 12 V installation)
Current consumption: At normal load less than 3 A
Fuse: Max. 5 A
We reserve the right to change the technical data without advance notice.
2005-01-20
Be-Ge 3000 Series
Table of Contents
1 Control devices, function and adjustment .............................. 1
2 Maintenance ....................................................................... 4
3 Check points ....................................................................... 5
4 Trouble shooting plan for authorized service staff .................. 7
5 Recycling ............................................................................ 8
Be-Ge 3000 Series
The seat’s original performance may not be changed. The security may be
effected. The seat may not be adjusted when the vehicle is moving.
Be-Ge Industri AB reserves the right to technical modifications.
1 Control devices, function and adjustment
1. Adjustable seat
Length adjustment 80 mm. Lift the lever and adjust forwards/backwards.
2. Horizontal adjustment
160 mm adjustment.
3100/3400: move the lever of the sliding mechanism to the right, adjust
the seat.
3. Backrest adjustment
To adjust backrest tilting, lift the lever, help out with your body. Release
the lever when the tilting feels right.
1
Be-Ge 3000 Series
4. Safety belt
2-point belt.
5. Headrest
Can be raised or lowered.
6. Seat tilting
Infinite tilting of the seat cushion. To adjust, lift the lever, help out with
your body. Release the button when the tilting feels right.
7. Height adjustment
3000/3100: 100 mm. To raise the seat, lift the lever upwards. To lower,
press it downwards The weight adaptation is automatically adjusted.
8. Adjustable shock absorber

Infinite adjustment. Harder/softer absorption, move the console button
upwards respectively downwards.
9. Airvent
Infinite adjustment of ventilation system. On/off switch. For dry and com-
fortable sitting.
2
Be-Ge 3000 Series
10. Heating element

Console button in position 0, 1, 2.
Thermostat controlled
Level 1: 10/20°C on/off (comfort heating)
Level 2: 28/37°C on/off
Supply: 24 V, 50W
11. Lumbar support

Air controlled lumbar support 3000/3100: Press + to increase the lumbar
support. Press - to decrease.
12. Air-controlled side supports

Infinite adjusted support for the back. Press + to increase the support,
press - to decrease the support.
3
Be-Ge 3000 Series
2 Maintenance
Daily inspection:
Make sure that no seat functions are blocked by foreign

objetcs.
Check that all belt components are undamaged. Replace

the whole belt kit in case of:
● cut or frayed strap
● worn or damaged hardware including anchor points
● buckle or retractor (if fitted) malfunction
● loose strap stitchings
If the seat does not retain in the adjusted height position,

check that there is no leakage in the air system.
Every 125th hour:
Check all seat functions with respect to satisfactory function

of: Length adjustment, height adjustment, tilting adjustment,
backrest adjustment, air valve and safety belt (see daily
inspection).
Every 1000th hour:
Lubricate the slinding rails, see check point 2. Make sure

that no oil leaks from the shock absorber. In such case,
replace the absorber. Check the safety belt (see daily
inspection). Check the floor attachment and that there are
no loose bolts.
Risk of injury by cruching in the scissor system if

the protection bellow is missing or damaged.
4
Be-Ge 3000 Series
3 Check points
Remove all blocking objects. Check the possibility to adjust
the settings. If any setting function does not work, contact a
service technician.
If the seat is provided with safety belt, make sure that the
belt components are undamaged (see daily inspection).
1. Height adjustment
Check the function of raising and lowering the seat. Also
check that the seat remains in the height setting and
that the suspension is satisfactory.
If the raising and lowering functions do not work properly

or if the suspension is not satisfactory, check that the
inlet air is in function and does not leak. In case of
defective function, contact a service technician.
2. Length adjustment
Push the seat into its end positions and make sure that
it runs freely. Lubricate the sliding rails regularly, e.g.
with Texando 20 or similar. First clean with a lint free
cloth.
If the sliding rails have a clearance exceeding 1 mm

lengthways or sideways, they shall be replaced.
Check that the inlet air is in function and does not leak.
In case of damage or leakage. contact a service techni-
cian.
3. Attachment
Make sure that no bolts are loose. Check the attachment
of the seat against floor or frame.
4. Backrest adjustment
Check that the back rest controls are undamaged and
not defect. In case of damage, replace the control device
or contact a service technician.
5
Be-Ge 3000 Series
5. Tilting function - seat

Check that the tilting function works properly, i.e. the
seat can be tilted forwards and backwards. Check that
the inlet air is in function and does not leak. In case of
damage or leakage contact a service technician.
6. Shock absorber
Check that the seat suspension is in function, i.e. that
the suspension is harder when moving the console but-
ton upwards and softer when moving it downwards. In
case of defective function, contact a service technician.
7. Connections
Check that no connections (air/electricity), hoses and
cables are defect. In case of visual damage, contact a
service technician.
Before correction of any defect, refer to the Trouble shooting

plan.
6
Be-Ge 3000 Series
4 Trouble shooting plan for

authorized service staff
Problem Possible reason Remedy
3100/3400: Seat tilt not Defect wire Replace the wire
adjustable
3000/3100: The seat’s height Air valve leakage Replace the valve
adjustment/ suspension does The air connection hose is not Check that air connection
not function or does not workproperly mounted hose is mounted and correctly
properly connected to the seat
The air connection hose is Replace the air connection
squeezed hose
The air supply is out of func- Check the pressure air supply
tion in the vehicle
Defect air spring Replace the air spring
3000/3100: Shock absorber Defect shock absorber Replace the shock absorber
seems to have to much play Defect shock absorber bush- Replace the bushings
ings
Defect wire Replace the wire
The sliding rails seem stiff The rails do not run freely from Check that there are spaces
the basement between seat and basement
Dirty rails Clean and re-lubricate the rails
The seat length adjustment Defect locking mechanism Replace the locking mechan-
does not lock ism
3000/3100: Lumber/side sup- Air connection leakage Replace the hose
port/ shoulder cover Defect bellows Replace the bellows
The hose is squeezed Replace the hose
The heating out of order Not cold enough The heating coil at the seat
thermostat is cooled to 10°C
in level 1 and 28°C in level 2.
Replace the seat cushion if
still out of function.
7
Be-Ge 3000 Series
5 Recycling
Upholstery and foam Shall be taken to energy recovery
Metall Shall be taken to metal recycling
Side and back covers Plastic recycling or energy recovery
Plastic Shall be taken to energy recovery
Air spring Shall be left with metals, alternatively taken to energy
recovery
Gas spring and shock absorber Shall be discarded as environmental hazardous waste
Armrest, foamed Metal recycling
Armrests, plastic Shall be separated for metal and plastic recycling
respectively
Protective bellows Shall be taken to energy recovery
Belt Shall be taken to metal recycling
Dismounting of seat: Push up the flexible metal piece at the

front of the seat bottom and move the seat forwards.
To fast and easy dismounting of seat upholstery etc. use a

knife. To dismount the seat back and shock absorbers one
6 mm and one 5 mm six edged key will be needed. To loosen
the gas spring for tilt-functions of the seat, one six edged
key 5 mm will be needed.
8
Airvent 9000
Airvent 9000
On the right side of the seat:
1 Regulation of back fan speed
On the left side of the seat:
2 Regulation of seat cushion fan speed

3 ON/OFF button for seat and back cushion fans
4 ON/OFF button for seat and back cushion electrical
heating

10w additional axle (optional equipment,
Buffalo and Elk)
Table of Contents
1 10w additional axle (optional equipment,
Buffalo and Elk) .................................................................... 1
1.1 Control buttons ....................................................... 1
1.2 Driving on a highway .............................................. 2
1.3 Installation of tracks ................................................ 3
2 Regular scheduled maintenance and tightening torques .......... 5
1 10w additional axle (optional

equipment, Buffalo and Elk)
The additional axle enables harvesting at poorly bearing ter-
rain sites when the ground is unfrozen. The load-bearing
capacity of a machine equipped with an additional axle
improves and surface pressures are decreased, reducing
the damage caused in the terrain and timber can be transpor-
ted from the terrain to the side of the road even from poorly
bearing terrain sites.
1.1 Control buttons
Additional axle down button

- When the button is pressed once, the axle will
lower and axle pressing remains on.
Additional axle up button

rise and remain in the upper position.
Opti4G 4.720 Up1 program or later:

rise and remain in the upper position.
- When the button is pressed for more than 0.2
seconds, automatic control is interrupted and the
axle is controlled up until the button is released.
Activating the floating of 10w additional axle (requires

Opti4G 4.720 program or later):
- Press the Additional axle down and Additional axle up
buttons simultaneously for one second.
1
1.2 Driving on a highway

the machine has appropriate road traffic equipment.
Also read the Driving on a highway instructions of the base

machine's Owner's Manual.
4 4
Installing contour lights, turning signals and a triangle warning of

a slow moving vehicle to the 10w additional axle:
4 Push the arms for the lights to the counterparts in the rear frame
extension.
5 Insert the rear lights plug into the socket in the rear frame extension.
Test that the contour lights and turning signals work.
Contour lights, turning signals and a triangle warning of a slow moving

vehicle, with the additional axle in the upper position
Always raise the axle when driving on a hard terrain.
Tracks/chains may not be used on wheels when driving on

public roads.
2
1.3 Installation of tracks

In the installation of tracks, 10 m (32.8 ft) of straight chain,
track installation chains and a few fastening shackles are
required.
Track manufacturers also provide various tensioners that

facilitate the installation of tracks.
1. Set the tracks on a level platform with the track pads

1
facing upwards behind the machine's rear tires (1).
2. Attach the chain firmly onto the first track pad using
shackles (1 and 2).
3. Pull the installation chain over all three tires and wedge
2 it under the centre tire (1 and 2).
4. Drive the machine slowly forward and follow that the
chain remains in the middle of the tire and does not slide
away from the centre line (2 and 3).
5. Drive forward until a track pad is free behind the addi-
tional tire (4).
3 6. Install the installation chains (image 5) to the side links
between the second and third track pads, on both sides
of the tracks.
4
The installation chains must be of equal length on both sides.

Tighten both sides equally or the tracks will be installed in a
warped position.
A B
Image 5. Correct installation of the installation chains
A Installation chains
B Additional chain
3
7. Next, move the machine until the track connection is

between the tires. The tracks are now tightened and the
additional chain in the middle is loose. If the tracks need
to be tightened more: shorten them, reverse and install
a suitable track lock.
8. Install the track connectors so that the links are facing
inwards towards the tire.
9. Drive the machines forward for loosening the installation
chains. Turn off the machine and remove the installation
and additional chains.
10. Drive the machine back and forth a few times. Check
the tension of the tracks (image 6). Dimension A must
be approximately 100 mm (3.9 in).
Image 6. Correct tension of the tracks
Do not tighten the tracks too much.
ening them.
If the tightening chains do not tighten the tracks sufficiently,

install an additional chain between the track ends and drive
forward. The chain holds the ends together so that the tight-
ening chain can be tightened more (image 5).
4
2 Regular scheduled maintenance and tightening torques

Item Service interval (h) Tightening torques

/ operating hours ● 1 kpm = approx. 10 Nm (7 lbf-
50 300 1200 ft)
● by machine tightening approx.
0.93 x table value
1. Hub greasing I Note: An air margin must be left in
the grease box for the thermal
expansion of grease.
2. Check the tension of the tire I, T 550 Nm
tightening nuts and tighten them, (406 lbf-ft)
if required.
3. Check the tension of tracks, I, A The give measured in the middle
adjust if required. of the tracks must be approximately
100 mm (3.9 in).
4. Tire pressure I, A 3 bar, i.e. 0.3 MPa (43.5 PSI)
5. Attachment of hubs to the addi- I 8 pcs M20 12.9 550 Nm
tional axle (406 lbf-ft)
6. Attachment of the rear frame I 15 pcs M24 10.9 800 Nm
extension to the rear frame (590 lbf-ft)
7. Bogie fastening I 4 pcs M27 10.9 1250 Nm
(922 lbf-ft)
2 pcs M27 10.9 1200 Nm
(885 lbf-ft)
2 pcs M24 10.9 800 Nm
(590 lbf-ft)
8. Check the welded seams. VI
9. Check that hydraulic joints hold. VI
10. Check the tightness of cylinder I, T 6 pcs M12 10.9 125 Nm
pin locking screws, adjust if (92 lbf-ft)
required. 6 pcs M16 10.9 310 Nm
(229 lbf-ft)
1. Grease the additional axle hubs. Grease is added to

the hubs at 1200 hour intervals. Grease is to be added
so that the hub box (2) is detached completely, after
which only a little grease is spread onto the bearing.
Never apply too much grease onto a freely rotating hub.
The thermal expansion / excess filling of grease will
cause damage in the hub box or axle seal.
5
2. Tire fastening must be checked using a torque wrench.

The correct tightening torque of nuts is 550 Nm (406 lbf-
ft).
When tightening the nuts, check that the washers below
the nuts are intact.
3. Correct tension of tracks. The correct tension of tracks
is performed at intervals of 50 operating hours. Tighten-
ing/loosening is described in more detail in the installa-
tion of the tracks. The give measured between the tires
must be approximately 100 mm (3.9 in).
4. Tire pressure is measured using a regular air pressure
gauge. The correct pressure for additional axle tires is
3 bar. This way the tires will provide the flexibility
required in different situations where the additional axle
is strained.
5. The fastening of hubs to the additional axle must be
checked using a torque wrench. The correct torque is
550 Nm (406 lbf-ft).
6. The fastening of the rear frame extension to the rear
frame must be checked using a torque wrench. The
correct torque for M24 bolts is 800 Nm (590 lbf-ft).
When tightening the nuts, check that the sleeves and
washers below the nuts are intact.
7. Bogie fastening must be checked using a torque
wrench. When tightening the nuts, check that the wash-
ers below the nuts are intact.
8. The welded seams are inspected visually. If any faults
are observed in the seams/other structures, do not con-
tinue working before the faults are repaired.
9. Check visually that hydraulic joints hold. If any faults
are observed in the joints, do not continue working before
the faults are repaired.
10. The tightness of the cylinder pin locking screws must
be checked using a torque wrench.
6
10w additional axle
(optional equipment, Wisent)
Table of Contents
1 Additional axle ...................................................................... 1
1.1 Installation of the additional axle .............................. 1
1.2 Installation of tracks ................................................ 6
2 Regular scheduled maintenance and tightening torques .......... 8
1 Additional axle
The additional axle enables harvesting at poorly bearing ter-
rain sites when the ground is unfrozen. The load-bearing
capacity of a machine equipped with an additional axle
improves and surface pressures are decreased, reducing
the damage caused in the terrain and timber can be transpor-
ted from the terrain to the side of the road even from poorly
bearing terrain sites.
The following must be taken into account before installing

the additional axle to a machine:
● The tire pattern must be ELS and 700.

● The suitability of bunks for the additional axle must be
ensured.
● Electrical connections of the reversing camera and the
rear light must be taken into account.
1.1 Installation of the additional axle

1. Before starting installation, tighten / check the vertical
bolts of the rear bogie mounting (1), the horizontal bolts
(2) and the underbody shield's fastening bolts (3), M24
= 800 Nm (590 lbf-ft).
1
2. Install the rear frame extension (4) to the rear frame

using bolts (5) as illustrated in the image, M22 = 700
Nm (516 lbf-ft). The bolts are not delivered with the
installation set.
3. Attach the additional axle to the rear frame extension

according to Section (6), M20 = 550 Nm (406 lbf-ft).
2
4. Install the hubs (8) to the additional axle frame using

bolt fastening (15), M20 = 550 Nm (406 lbf-ft).
5. Attach the reinforcement plate (7) below the rear bogie

using bolts (14), M20 = 550 Nm (406 lbf-ft).
3
6. Install the fastening plate (9) using bolts (10) to the

reinforcement plate (7) attached. Weld the fastening
plate (9) lightly to the rear frame.
7. Then, detach the reinforcement plate (7). Weld the

fastening plate (9) and triangular pieces (11, 12) to the
rear frame.
The fastening plate and triangular plates are welded using
flank fillet a8, so that the 30 mm (1.2 in) washers placed
under the fastening bolts fit in their places. Paint the welded
seams and frame parts using paint RAL7021.
4
8. Re-install the reinforcement plate (7) using bolts (10),

M20 = 550 Nm (406 lbf-ft).
9. Attach tires to the additional axle hubs. The additional

tires are installed so that the valve cap is located outside
the machine, M22x1.5 = 550 Nm (406 lbf-ft).
5
1.2 Installation of tracks

In the installation of tracks, 10 m (32.8 ft) of straight chain,
track installation chains and a few fastening shackles are
required.
Track manufacturers also provide various tensioners that

facilitate the installation of tracks.
1. Set the tracks on a level platform with the track pads

1
facing upwards behind the machine's rear tires (1).
2. Attach the chain firmly onto the first track pad using
shackles (1 and 2).
3. Pull the installation chain over all three tires and wedge
2 it under the centre tire (1 and 2).
4. Drive the machine slowly forward and follow that the
chain remains in the middle of the tire and does not slide
away from the centre line (2 and 3).
5. Drive forward until a track pad is free behind the addi-
tional tire (4).
3 6. Install the installation chains (image 5) to the side links
between the second and third track pads, on both sides
of the tracks.
4
The installation chains must be of equal length on both sides.

Tighten both sides equally or the tracks will be installed in a
warped position.
A B
Image 5. Correct installation of the installation chains
A Installation chains
B Additional chain
6
7. Next, move the machine until the track connection is

between the tires. The tracks are now tightened and the
additional chain in the middle is loose. If the tracks need
to be tightened more: shorten them, reverse and install
a suitable track lock.
8. Install the track connectors so that the links are facing
inwards towards the tire.
9. Drive the machines forward for loosening the installation
chains. Turn off the machine and remove the installation
and additional chains.
10. Drive the machine back and forth a few times. Check
the tension of the tracks (image 6). Dimension A must
be approximately 100 mm (3.9 in).
Image 6. Correct tension of the tracks
ening them.
If the tightening chains do not tighten the tracks sufficiently,

install an additional chain between the track ends and drive
forward. The chain holds the ends together so that the tight-
ening chain can be tightened more (image 5).
7
2 Regular scheduled maintenance and tightening torques

Item Service interval (h) Tightening torques

/ operating hours ● 1 kpm = approx. 10 Nm (7 lbf-ft)
50 300 1200 ● by machine tightening
approx. 0.93 x table value
1. Hub greasing I Note: An air margin must be left in
the grease box for the thermal
expansion of grease.
2. Check the tension of the tire I, T 550 Nm
tightening nuts and tighten (406 lbf-ft)
them, if required.
3. Check the tension of tracks, I, A The give measured in the middle of
adjust if required. the tracks must be approximately 100
mm (3.9 in).
4. Tire pressure I, A 3 bar, i.e. 0.3 MPa (43.5 PSI)
5. Attachment of additional axle I 14 pcs M20x80 12.9 550 Nm
to the rear frame extension (406 lbf-ft)
6. Attachment of hubs to the I 8 pcs M20x50 12.9 550 Nm
additional axle (406 lbf-ft)
7. Attachment of the rear frame I 15 pcs M22x110 10.9 700 Nm
extension to the rear frame (516 lbf-ft)
8. Check the fastening plate bolts I 8 pcs M20x65 12.9 550 Nm
below the rear bogie. (406 lbf-ft)
9. Bogie fastening I 4 pcs M24x200 10.9 800 Nm
(590 lbf-ft)
2 pcs M24x75 10.9 800 Nm
(590 lbf-ft)
10. Check the welded seams. VI
1. Grease the additional axle hubs. Grease is added to

the hubs at 1200 hour intervals. Grease is to be added
so that the hub box (2) is detached completely, after
which only a little grease is spread onto the bearing.
Never apply too much grease onto a freely rotating hub.
The thermal expansion / excess filling of grease will
cause damage in the hub box or axle seal.
2. Tire fastening must be checked using a torque wrench.
The correct tightening torque of nuts is 550 Nm (406 lbf-
ft).
8
3. Correct tension of tracks. The correct tension of tracks

is performed at intervals of 50 operating hours. Tighten-
ing/loosening is described in more detail in the installa-
tion of the tracks. The give measured between the tires
must be approximately 100 mm (3.9 in).
4. Tire pressure is measured using a regular air pressure
gauge. The correct pressure for additional axle tires is
3 bar. This way the tires will provide the flexibility
required in different situations where the additional axle
is strained.
5. The fastening of the additional axle to the rear frame
must be checked using a torque wrench. The correct
torque is 550 Nm (406 lbf-ft).
6. The fastening of hubs to the additional axle must be
checked using a torque wrench. The correct torque is
550 Nm (406 lbf-ft).
7. The fastening of the rear frame extension to the rear
frame must be checked using a torque wrench. The
correct torque for M22 bolts is 700 Nm (516 lbf-ft).
8. The fastening plate bolts below the rear bogie must
be checked using a torque wrench. The correct torque
is 550 Nm (406 lbf-ft).
9. Bogie fastening must be checked using a torque
wrench. The correct torque is 800 Nm (590 lbf-ft). When
tightening the nuts, check that the washers below the
nuts are intact.
10. The welded seams are inspected visually. If any faults
are observed in the seams/other structures, do not con-
tinue working before the faults are repaired.
9
Clam bunk and winch control
/ PONSSE Comfort user interface
Table of Contents
1 Clam bunk control ................................................................ 1
2 Controlling the winch ............................................................ 1
Clam bunk and winch control (optional equipment)
/ PONSSE Comfort user interface
1 Clam bunk control
L Left control handle R Right control handle
Left jaw open Right jaw closed

Left jaw closed Right jaw open
Jaws open, cables loose Cables loose
Jaws closed, cables tight Cables tight
See greasing points in the base machine Owner's Manual, section Scheduled
maintenance.
2 Controlling the winch
Cable out
Cable in
Winch release
- When the button is pressed, the
winch brake will be released and
the cable will move freely. When
the button is pressed again, the
winch will be locked.
Before operating the winch, read

the separate manual delivered
with the machine.
1
Clam bunk and winch control
/ User interface 2004–2012
Table of Contents
1 Clam bunk control ................................................................ 5
2 Controlling the winch ............................................................ 5
Clam bunk and winch control (optional equipment) / User inter-
face 2004–2012
1 Clam bunk control
Clam bunk controls 1–8
Left jaw Left cable Right cable Right jaw

1 open 3 loosen 5 loosen 7 open
2 close 4 tighten 6 tighten 8 close
See greasing points in the base machine Owner's Manual,

section Scheduled maintenance.
2 Controlling the winch
Winch controls 9–11
9 Winch ON/OFF
OFF = winding drum spins freely
10 Cable in
11 Cable out
Before operating the winch, read the separate manual

delivered with the machine.
5
Lifting the front bogie (optional Gazelle)
Lifting the front bogie (optional Gazelle)

1 2
5 4 3
Front bogie lifting control switches 1–5:

1 Lift from back left
2 Lift from front left
3 Lift from front right
4 Lift from back right
5 Free bogie lifting
For greasing, see the Greasing points section of the base

machine's Owner's Manual.
1
Anti-theft alarm, DEFA DVS90 (optional equipment)
Anti-theft alarm, model DEFA

DVS90 (optional equipment)
6 5
2 3
1 DVS90 central unit

2 Window module with a blinking LED (light-emitting diode)
3 Remote control
4 Siren
5 Motion sensor
6 Signal light (blue), in the cabin ceiling
The alarm is used with the remote control. Other detectors,

such as a glass break detector, can also be connected to the
alarm.
The alarm package in the machine cabin contains a PIN card

with an individual security code for the alarm. Always store
the PIN card carefully and never leave it in the machine.
If necessary, contact an authorized PONSSE service.
Also read the alarm supplier's manual.
1
1 Switching the alarm on
1 1. Press the remote control's locking button (3) once.

2. The signal light (6) in the ceiling indicates that the alarm
2 is switched on through two long flashes. The LED (1) is
on for 20 seconds, after which it starts to blink.
When the alarm is switched on:

● The immobiliser is activated.
● The machine's approach light is lit for 30 seconds.
Window module
1 LED 1.1 Switching the alarm on with additional
2 Button
detectors disabled
3 4 The alarm can be switched on so that additional detectors

are not activated.
1. Disconnect the machine's ignition current.

2. Press the window module's button (2) once. The LED
(1) is lit when the button is pressed.
3. Press the remote control's locking button (3) once.
Remote control 4. The signal light (6) in the ceiling indicates that the alarm
3 Locking button is switched on through two long flashes. The LED starts
4 Opening button to blink, indicating that additional detectors have not
been activated.
6
6 Signal light (blue), in the cabin

ceiling
2
2 Switching the alarm off
6 1. Press the remote control's opening button (4) once.

2. The signal light (6) in the ceiling indicates that the alarm
is switched off through three short flashes, and the LED
(1) stops blinking.
When the alarm is switched off

● The immobiliser is deactivated.
● The machine's approach light is lit for 30 seconds.
6 Signal light (blue), in the cabin

ceiling 2.1 Switching the alarm off, a signal of an alarm
occurred
3 4
The alarm has given an alarm while switched on if it gives
five soft reset sounds when switched off.
The detector which has given the alarm can be identified on

the basis of how many times the LED (1) blinks.
Remote control The LED continues to blink in specific sequences until the
3 Locking button
machine's ignition current is connected or the alarm is
4 Opening button
switched on.
1 Number of blinks Detector

2 Level sensor
2 3 Door switch
4 Bonnet switch
5 Rear hatch switch
6 Ignition current sensor
7 Optional equipment sensor
8 Motion sensor
Window module
9 Glass break detector
1 LED
2 Button
2.2 Emergency disconnection
The alarm can be switched off using the alarm's individual

PIN code if the remote control is missing or its battery has
run out.
1. Open the door. The alarm is switched on.

2. Connect the machine's ignition current.
3. Press the window module button (2) as many times as
is required to match the first digit of the PIN code. The
LED (1) indicates each press of the button by blinking.
3
- For example, if the first digit of the PIN code is 5,

press the window module button five times.
4. Once the number has been entered, wait (approx. 1
second) until the LED acknowledges the presses by
blinking once.
5. Enter the remaining digits of the PIN code in the same
way (instructions, Points 3 and 4).
6. The alarm is switched off if the code is entered correctly.
3 Encoding the remote control / Entering

the PIN code
1 1. Switch off the alarm.

2. Connect the machine's ignition current.
2 3. Press the window module button (2) as many times as
is required to match the first digit of the PIN code. The
LED (1) indicates each press of the button by blinking.
- For example, if the first digit of the PIN code is 5,
press the window module button five times.
4. Once the number has been entered, wait (approx. 1
second) until the LED acknowledges the presses by
Window module
1 LED
blinking once.
2 Button 5. Enter the remaining digits of the PIN code in the same
way (instructions, Points 3 and 4).
6. Once the final digit has been entered, the LED blinks
rapidly for a short time, indicating that the PIN code has
been entered correctly.
7. If the code was incorrect, restart from Point 2.
3 4 The alarm is now ready to receive the first remote control

code:
8. Press both remote control buttons at the same time.
Hold the buttons down until the LED blinks rapidly for a
short time (approx. 0.5 seconds).
9. Repeat Point 8 for all remote controls to be used. The
next remote control's buttons must be pressed within 30
Remote control seconds of encoding the previous remote control.
3 Locking button 10. Stop encoding by disconnecting the machine's ignition
4 Opening button
current.
A maximum of four remote controls can be added to a single

alarm.

Contact Information

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Contact Information

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Contact information

Contact details of subsidiaries, service centres, retailers and

We thank you for the trust shown towards Ponsse by selecting

The solutions used in Ponsse products have been tested in

The actual repair actions are not included in this manual.

Due to the continuous development work, Ponsse Oyj will retain

Familiarize yourself carefully with the forest machine construction

We wish you best of success!

All products of Ponsse Oyj have been granted the right to

These operating and service instructions apply to the following

This forwarder is designed to be used only in connection with a

PONSSE forwarders are designed for the transportation of wood

Note! If the forwarder is equipped with a loader model by any

Copyright © Ponsse Plc

1.18 Plates .......................................................................... 47

4.9 Stopping the engine .................................................... 105

5 Operating and service instructions

5.6.9 Lubricating the bogie pivot ............................. 133

5.19 Heating and air conditioning equipment ........................ 155

7 Oils and liquids

Table of Contents Part 1

1.15 Welding the machine .......................................................... 40

In order to minimise the dangers, read and ensure that you

These general safety instructions do not cover all situations

In addition to these instructions, always follow any statutory

If any of the information in this manual conflicts with the

This Owner's Manual is part of the machine; ensure that it is

1.2 General warning symbol

1.3 Signal terms

WARNING expresses a potentially imminent dangerous

ATTENTION indicates a potentially dangerous situation,

ATTENTION can also be used to draw your attention to

This symbol is used to draw your attention to situations or

1.4 Electronic equipment

The use of all radio transmitters with an antenna inside the

However, note any hazards caused by antennas installed

The use of all electronics products not tested and type-

The manufacturer assumes no responsibility for any changes

1.5 Purpose of use of the machine

1. Harvester – a forest machine that fells, delimbs, cuts

2. Crane – a harvester crane used to control the harvester

3. Harvester head – a forest machine component that cuts

vertical positions. The harvester head is attached to the

4. Forwarder – is a forest machine designed for the

5. Loader – a forwarder loading device used to lift trees

6. Grapple – a forwarder component used to grab trees.

7. Dual machine – a forest machine that is a combination

8. Skidder – is a forest machine designed for the transport-

9. Clam bunk – an additional device located in the cargo

● Opti4G – the control system used in a Ponsse harvester

1.7 Safety features

1. Steps, slip-resistant objects and handles

Activates when the seat is turned sideways when com-

1.8 Noise and vibration level

1.8.1 Machine noise level

The measurements have been taken in compliance with the

1.8.2 Machine vibration

The vibration level measurements have been taken in com-

The maximum weighted root mean square value (RMS value)

Total vibration level to which the operator's hands and arms

The operator can influence the vibration level by reducing

1.9 General safety instructions

Make sure that you follow the regulations of occupational